Home

User's Guide - Allied Telesis

Contents

1. 122 Event Logri eee Se impe oe o E edt a aAa 123 Event Log p E 129 Activity ie 130 Syslog TAD we cee E elie eee it seeks eevee vinden ane ie an ae 131 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card 134 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card 134 Port A Tab for the Management Card sssssssssseeeeeene nennen mener ener nennen enne rennen 136 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Card sse nennen nennen enne enne 136 Temperature Threshold Configuration Menu sese nennen nennen rnen nene enne 142 Management Card Redundancy Menu ccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeseaaeaeeeesesecaeeeeseseeaeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeaeaeees 144 Confirmation Prompt for Switch Over Management Cards sssssssssssssss eene enne nnns 144 Figures Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87
2. The management card enters the event in the event log and sends an SNMP trap Figure 9 AT CM2 Line Cards and First RPS Failure Signal Listed here are the requirements of this feature O The first RPS failure signal is supported only on the AT CM Line Cards in the AT CV1203 and AT CV5000 Chassis This feature is not supported on the AT CV Line Cards the AT CV1000 Chassis or the AT CV1200 Chassis C You do not have to configure any of the settings on the management card in the remote AT CV1203 Chassis for it to support the first RPS failure signal and you do not have to connect its 10 100Base TX port to the network The card simply has to be present in the AT CV1203 Chassis 65 Chapter 3 OAM based Features 66 Note The AT CM708S Line Card which is a double slot card does not support the first RPS failure signal because it uses both slots in the AT CV1203 Chassis leaving no available slot for a management card AT CM3 Line Cards The AT CM3 Line Cards also support the first RPS failure signal And as with the AT CM2 Line Cards they send the signal when the AT CV1203 Chassis loses power on just one of its two power supplies The difference is that these line cards when installed in the newer version of the AT CV1203 Chassis do not require the AT CV5M02 Manageme
3. 130 Menus ier rer eint ep tertie rre E eR Redde etis 130 liio EC EE 130 Configuring the Syslog Glient 5 ire eaaet eie ts 131 VIA rcc CN 131 lapse ETT 131 Configuring the 10 100Base TX Port 1 ici einen eset cesse trece tut med qe ced ite d end P pes Dua Ede qud seek e riedenia 133 Ua rae hee i eri a ee eee i ee ee ee rd 133 llle d 136 Restoring the Default Setting on the 10 100Base TX Port nennen nenne nnne nrnen nennen nnne 138 Menus 5 diti pte epis idees iG eL tede tute e t b mee etal d Eten ta t ee bod atitem quttes 138 luy ee ve ee a le ee ee i 138 Restoring the Default Values on the AT CV5M02 Management Card sss eene eene mener 140 aM 140 Web Browser 2 ich ern VU eren i 141 Configuring the Temperature Threshold sse nennen nne ennemi nnne nennen ner nennen 142 MODUS 4 cote E ERA ER ER ERN Boatman TRR RENE ERE Ue EON DU E IRR EDEN ETE PRESE RR SEPETE E 142 Web Browser Et 142 Activating a Standby AT CV5M02 Management Card ssssssssssseeeeeen nee nennen enne nnne ennt nene enne 144 ua 144 Web BrowSeht CH ard 145 Setting the Baud Rate
4. 24 SYSlOG Cliont SER RARI DEL 24 Network Lime Protocol Clierit 5 2 2 reni trie aa doeet tin PASI rede SE etd oll aae 24 Manager and Operator Accounts 2 ee EEEE Ie e e ende epe EAOa e Re needed je eese do dee re poene vue pede tes 25 M nagement ACCESS d 26 Local M nagement RC cc seeed eta deseee aai aiaei a tide A dddeepebde i aaae inii 26 Remote Telnet Managementa minari 0 beat aa eaa aae retinui dese DE e a a a aaia iiaa 26 Remote Web Browser Management nirien a ee a e aa EEEE E Aate 26 SNMP Management sree iera 27 Active and Standby Management Cards sssssssssssessessseses eset ne nens t hn EEE remet etit resin sin ESE sisi EEEE Enes ennnen idein nen 28 Accessing Your NetWOork o eee tme nee ede meii 31 iere oe el C EET 32 NEG IHELISeLIO TAE CPC 32 lage o rc E 32 AT CV5MO2 Managemient Gard texte Re Rr RR EIE ARES AER ERE D Re EE De ERR advacecgedlanestanedtaes 32 Restoring Configurations to the AT CM Line Cards ssssseeene een enne nnne nnne nennen nennen 33 AT CM Line Cards and Remote Peer Management enne enne nnn nennen nnnm nnna nenna 35 Active and Standby Management Cards ssssssssssseeesee eene eene nennen nennen nene en erret nennen 36 SNMPv3 Configuration Files a epe Ide es eU dE Eee te ee go AE a Feu eee 37 Gre VIT ESAE
5. eee emm eene en nene erret nri enne AEAN tnr sen nene nennen nnns 326 TFTP File Upload Download Configuration esee eee nne 331 Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP Menu seeeseseeeeeeeem emen nenne nnne 332 Default Settings for the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT S99 Management Software 338 Default Settings for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards and the AT S73 Management Software 340 Default Settings for the AT CM3 Line Cards and the AT S102 Management Software sss 342 Default Settings for the AT CV Line Cards sssssssssees eene enne enrnen enr nen nene enne 343 Rate Limits Equivalents red e dar UHR EUREN RU MERERI eerp Re engen 352 Tables Preface This is the management guide for the Converteon product line of media converter line cards and management card In this guide you ll learn about the features of the AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards and the AT CV5M02 Management Card and how to monitor and configure the devices from the menus and the web browser windows in the AT S99 Management Software on the management card This preface contains the following sections o Where to Find Web based Guides on page 16 o Product Name Conventions on page 17 0 Contacting Allied Telesis on page 18 Preface Where to Find Web based Guides The installation and user guides for all of the Allied
6. Column Definition Date This column displays the dates of the events Time This column displays the times of the events Classification This unlabeled column displays the classifications of the events An event s classification can be REPORT or CLEAR A report signals an event s occurrence while a clear signifies the resolution of a prior event For example if a chassis operating temperature exceeds the temperature threshold the management module marks the event s occurrence by entering a High Temperature Threshold event in the log with a classification of report After the temperature returns below the threshold the management card logs the same event message with a clear classification All of the messages are reports but only a few can also be clear signals ModuleName Message This column displays the names of the line cards that generated the event messages This column displays the event messages The messages are described in Table 13 123 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Table 13 lists the general event messages For the event messages related to SFP modules in the AT CM3KOS Line Card refer to Table 14 on page 127 Table 13 General Event Messages Message Chassis Classi Definition fication Auto Copy Succeeded AT CV1200 Report The AT CM Line Card in slot n on linecard n AT CV1203 successfully received its configuration AT CV5000 from the master m
7. 5 enses edes eden e bin ttd lee tne dein tena anne le ene dae Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu Remote Module Status and Configuration Window Downloading New AT S73 Management Software to Remote AT CM Line Cards 60 LOOpDack KET ME cc I Sanseseumbaes 61 Dying Gasp Feature eerte re RR e RR eM E ene rr ed Rd pes 63 AT CM2 Line Cards and First RPS Failure Signal seeeene eene nennen nne 65 AT CM3 Line Cards and First RPS Failure Signal sseseeeee enne eene 66 Connecting the Management Cable to the Management Card s Console Port 72 EIC 73 URL Field in a Web Browser 5 eiue LA ei e are needle dederit 76 Chassis Vie Wisten ins a ee vl en ee ee EE Eve de oe OD E ede e 77 Save Command in the System Configuration Menu ssssesseeeeeeen eene nennen nnne enne 79 Save Command in the System Tab eene nnne enne nennen nennen nenne nennen nens 79 Configuration Pop up MWIirdOW 3 2 2 2 0 t irte teret qoem tie EEG ei IDU e eo He d ERI a dL HER Rode ie 80 Save Command for a Local AT CM Line Card Menus eene enm nennen errem 81 Save Command for a Local AT CM Line Card Web Browser Windows eee 81 DUReSENCXezIoGIRIm D M 82 All CM Line Cards Pop Up WindOw sseeeeeeneneeemn nemen nnne nne ennnr rennen entren nennen nene enne 8
8. 61 Chapter 3 OAM based Features Dying Gasp and First RPS Failure Signals 62 Dying Gasp The dying gasp and the first RPS failure are signals that the AT CM Line Cards automatically transmit on their fiber optic ports to notify you of power supply problems with the AT CV1203 Chassis They indicate either that a chassis has lost all power and has stopped functioning or if a chassis has both a primary and a redundant power supply module that just one of the modules has lost power The remote AT CM Line Cards send the signals to their local line card counterparts in the AT CV5000 at the central office where the signals are stored in the event log on the AT CV5M02 Management Card and are transmitted as SNMP traps to alert you to the events The signals are o Dying gasp The AT CM Line Cards send this signal if the AT CV 1203 Chassis loses all power O First RPS failure The line cards send this signal if the AT CV1203 Chassis has two power adapters and just one of the adapters loses power The signals along with their rules and restrictions are described in the following subsections The AT CM Line Cards send this signal if they detect that the AT CV1203 Chassis has just lost all power Just before shutting down the line cards transmit the signal from their fiber optic ports to their line card counterparts in the AT CV5000 Chassis The process is illustrated in Figure 8 When the remote AT CV1203 Chassis l
9. Indicates whether or not the local OAM client is satisfied with the OAM information it received from the remote OAM client Yes Indicates that the local OAM client is satisfied with the OAM information from the remote OAM client o No Indicates that the local OAM client has not received any OAM information or is not satisfied with the OAM information from the remote OAM client Remote Discovering Indicates the remote station can accept or reject the configuration of the peer OAM entity D Yes Remote station accepts the configuration of the peer OAM entity a No Remote station rejects the configuration of the peer OAM entity 267 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 268 Table 32 Show Local OAM Information Window Column Description Remote Stable Indicates whether or not the remote OAM client is satisfied with the OAM information it received from the local OAM client Possible values are Oo Yes Indicates that the remote OAM client is satisfied with the information it received from the local OAM client o No Indicates that the remote OAM client has not received any OAM information or is not satisfied with the information from the local OAM client Critical Event Indicates whether or note the local OAM client received a critical event notification from the remote OAM client A critical event notification indicates
10. Terminal Configuration Menu Data Rate baud rate Return to System Configuration Menu Figure 51 Terminal Configuration Menu Web Browser Converteon Management Software User s Guide 5 Select Data rate baud rate to display the Terminal Data Rate Menu shown in Figure 52 a Terminal Data Rate Menu 1N Converteon gt 115200 bps 57600 bps 19200 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps SJ Return to Terminal Configuration Menu E Figure 52 Terminal Data Rate Menu 6 From the Terminal Data Rate Menu select the desired baud rate The default is 115200 bps Note If you are managing the chassis from a local management session your session ends To resume managing the chassis change the baud rate of your terminal or terminal emulator program 7 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration menu and select Save System Configuration To set the baud rate of the Console port from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 If the System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 30 on page 103 3 Click the Edit button in the Terminal Setting section 4 In the Terminal Setting pop up window select a new baud rate from the pull down menu 5 Click the Update button 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file click the Edit button in the Configuration section of the window and sel
11. Operation Status continued O OAM Peering Remotely Rejected The local OAM client has rejected the OAM information from the remote client O Operational The OAM client is in the operational state The AT CM Line Cards have to be in this state to support the OAM based features Mux State Displays the state of the multiplexer function which governs the flow of frames from the MAC client The possible values are o Forward Multiplexer passes MAC client frames to subordinate sublayer o Discard Multiplexer discards MAC client frames 266 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 32 Show Local OAM Information Window Column Description Parser State Indicates the state of the parser function in the OAM peer as reflected in the latest OAMPDU This value is changed based on loopback actions by either the local or remote station The possible values are o Forward Parser passes received non OAMPDUs to superior sublayer O Loopback Parser passes received non OAMPDUs to Multiplexer during remote loopback test o Discard Parser discards received non OAMPDUs Local Discovering Local Stable Indicates whether the local station can accept or reject the configuration of the peer OAM entity 0 Yes Local station accepts the configuration of the peer OAM entity default C No Local station rejects the configuration of the peer OAM entity
12. 328 Saving the Configuration Settings Converteon Management Software User s Guide O The management card must have an IP address configuration For instructions refer to Assigning an IP Address Configuration on page 100 O The management card must reside on the same subnet as the TFTP server or must have access to its subnet through routers or other Layer 3 routing devices O If the management card and the TFTP server reside on a different subnets the card s IP address configuration has to include a default gateway address that identifies the IP address of the router interface of the first hop to reaching the server O The 10 100Base TX port on the card has to be connected to a device on your network such as an Ethernet switch The management card communicates with your network through that port O Downloading the master configuration file from a TFTP server to the management card causes the card to reset It will be unresponsive to commands for approximately two minutes while it writes the file to flash and initializes its management software To continue managing the device you have to start a new management session Are you planning to upload to the TFTP server the master and SNMPv3 configuration files If so then it s probably a good idea to first update the files in flash memory so that they have the most current settings This is explained in the following procedures For more information on the save commands refer
13. 38 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards sess 39 AT CM2 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards essesssseeeeeeeeeeee enne ennemi enne nennen nene 40 AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards sssssseseeeeeeneeeeneneen nennen enne rns en ers en nein enne n nennen nene nennen nennen 42 AT CV Media Converter Line GCards 1 dd de UU ee debi cete elated caesa deleto dh Line aaaea dece tende ede 44 Management Software rece iene shall iid Neel eee nude ee dete eoe ve eee 46 Maximum Frame Sio S roe oaae tcd t e EL cogat eese eaa a ea aa co dpesevatiies Ceu e euch Soiree etre sede Sig wih eee 46 Low Power Modenie inie eiin 46 Packet Isate LEimitllig zit perci oet EN id te a aa a a a a aa 47 Operating Modes acisna reece eee eee el ae ee ey eee ee 48 MI SUE elo 49 Link Testand OAM Visible Mode 5 atii oai tpe oai conde pee Dre dede b oe Co eode Heated ce Poeta dee Fede se ende dnd 49 Contents MISSINGQLINK Modei C 49 MissingLink and OAM Visible Mode ssseeeenenn emm eene nennen nnn en nennen terne nnn enters enne nnne enne 51 Smart MissingLink Mode 2 teet ertt RREERR HERE ee ERR ERE Een REESE PR prote Phe e PM e RE ener ner Red 52 Smart MissingLink and OAM Visible OAM ssssseeeeen enn een nennen nnrnen nene en nrnen nennen ne entren nennen nene 53
14. The active management card automatically updates the configuration file on the standby card so that the standby card has the same configuration settings in the event it becomes the active card For information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 Note When installing a second management card into an existing chassis you should install it while the chassis is powered on If the chassis is powered off you should install it in a higher numbered slot than the existing card If you install a second management card into a lower numbered slot than the existing card while the chassis is powered off the master configuration file of the new card which will become the active card will overwrite the configuration file on the existing card when you power on the chassis If the auto copy settings in the new master configuration file is enabled for the chassis slots the configuration settings of the line cards may change For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 29 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card 30 You can monitor the communications between the active management card and the standby card over the chassis backplane by connecting a personal computer with a terminal emulator program to the Console port on the standby card There are Update Copy and Heartbeat messages Update and Copy messages are sent by the active management card when updating the master configuration file on the standby card Hear
15. 1 Install the AT CM Line Card in a Converteon chassis that has the AT CV5M02 Management Card and start a local management session or a remote Telnet management session on the chassis 2 Wait one minute for the AT CM Line Card to initialize its management software The card s Ready RDY LED turns on when it has finished initializing the software 3 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration 4 Converteon Management Software User s Guide In the OpMode column of the Module Status and Configuration Menu examine the operating mode of the line card you want to configure For the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards the operating mode has to be the OAM Visible mode OAM V For the AT CM3 Line Cards the operating mode can be any one of the following D Link Test and OAM Visible mode OAM LT D MissingLink and OAM Visible mode OAM ML O Smart MissingLink and OAM Visible mode OAM SML Line card operating modes Mod Name CardTypever 1 AT CV5M02 2 Regll AT CM302 3 Reg20 AT CM302 4 Reg21 AT CM302 5 Area2a AT CM302 6 Area2b AT CM302 7 al21 AT CM3KOS 8 Reg12 AT CM202 v2 9 AT CM202 v2 10 AT CM202 v2 11 AT CV102 12 AT CV102 13 AT CV102 14 AT CV102 15 AT CV102 More Gears to Main Menu Converteon 2l 2 FIBER PORT COPPER PORT 4 ST OperMod IPC FrmSz LPM AC VER ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL AN Active 800
16. Chassis View Menu View Setting Line Card Configuration Port Port ort Status Configuration Statistics Slot Number 7 Card Type CM302 Port Status Port State Enable Flow Control Enable Link Status Online Negotiation Auto Speed 100M Duplex Full Crossover Auto Ingress Rate Limit No Limit Egrees Rate Limit No Limit Figure 66 Port Configuration Window 5 To adjust the settings click the Edit button to display the Port Configuration pop up window 6 Adjust the parameters as needed The parameters are defined in Table 21 on page 171 7 Click the Update button The new parameter settings take affect immediately on the port 8 To save your changes in the master configuration file click the Line Card Configuration tab the Current Configuration tab and the Save Current Configuration button 175 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Setting the Operating Mode 176 Menus This procedure is used to change the operating modes on the AT CM and AT CV Line Cards For background information refer to Operating Modes on page 48 A Caution Changing the operating mode of a line card causes the card to reset possibly resulting in the loss of network traffic An AT CM Line Card immediately resumes forwarding network traffic using the default values for its parameter settings while it initializes the management software a process that takes approximately on
17. ON v400 100 OAM LT o o 10240 0N N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 MN OAM LT o o 10240 0N N V400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 Y OAM LT o o 10240 0N N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 Xx OAM ML o o 10240 ON N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 Y ERE o o 10240 ON N V400 100 Y 0 0 100 Y 0 0 Y OAM LT o 10240 ON N v400 1G Y 0 0 oo 1G Y 0 0 Y OAM V o o N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 Y OAM V o o N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 v 0 0 Y OAM V o o N v400 100 y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 Y IT 0 100 100 LT 0 100 100 LT 0 100 100 IT 0 100 100 IT 0 100 100 L2 02111121 Module Status and Configuration B MODWLE INFO b Figure 24 Module Status and Configuration Menu For information about the Module Status and Configuration Menu refer to Displaying the Status of the Line Cards on page 158 If you are configuring an AT CM2 or AT CM70S Line Card and want to use the OAM based dying gasp feature examine the card s model name in the CardTypeVer column To support dying gasp the card must have the suffix v2 or v3 designating it as a newer version of the card If the model name does not ha
18. Parameter Description Single Remote CM Line Card Select this option to use the remote peer management Bootloader feature to upgrade the bootloader on a single remote AT CM Line Card After selecting this option you are prompted for a slot number Enter the slot number of the local line card connected to the remote line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number 4 After selecting a download option and responding to the prompts begin the file transfer with your terminal program Note The management card or a line card may be damaged if you power off the chassis or remove it from the chassis while it is writing a file to flash memory 327 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files Transferring Configuration Files Requirements The AT CV5MO2 Management Card has two configuration file One of the files is the master configuration file This file contains nearly all of the parameter settings of the management card itself and all of the parameter settings of the local and remote AT CM Line Cards The second file is the SNMPv3 configuration file which contains the SNMPv3 settings on the management card For information on these files refer to Configuration Files on page 32 You can upload and download these files to a TFTP server You might do this to maintain a history of the configuration settings of the chassis or to transfer the files to another management card in a different chassis Of c
19. Upload SNMPv3 File Name Destination Download SNMPv3 File Name Source TFTP File Upload Download Configuration N ecu to System Configuration Menu D Figure 142 TFTP File Upload Download Configuration Menu 5 Configure the fields as necessary The fields are described in Table 43 Table 43 TFTP File Upload Download Configuration Field Description TFTP Server IP Address Enter in this field the IP address of the TFTP server on your network Upload Configuration File Name Destination To upload the master configuration file from the management card to a TFTP server enter in this field a name for the file The file will be given this name on the TFTP server The extension should be cfg Download Configuration File Name Source To download a master configuration file from a TFTP server to the management card enter in this field the name of the configuration file you want to download The extension should be cfg Upload SNMPv3 File Name Destination To upload the SNMPv3 configuration file from the management card to a TFTP server enter in this field a name for the file The file will be given this name on the TFTP server The extension should be cfg Download SNMPv3 File Name Source To download an SNMPv3 configuration file from a TFTP server to the management card enter in this field the name of the file you want to download The extension should be
20. ultric ge 15 Where to Find Web based Guides intenti tee aa EX Le Fere Tet den tee dee Poe ed eene da Inde o dde ede eode n dene cu 16 Product Name Conwventiohs 1 1 tede AIR esq He equi tense bete ote tenth ru de eoe ouf oo tegi Side dates 17 Contacting Pe ME RM 18 Online SUPPOM e o 18 Email and Telephone Support eiie iieri reed dee teme Eea Eii Ede e dete ed dede stre td acte ended e caused denen de eee 18 Returning Products m 18 Sales and Corporate Information essssssssssssssssesssssssse cess nnne ene nennr sss e then nets ite nnnr ss snnt nnne ennt en innen 18 Warranty EEEE EAE ces ia Seer ae ao sate ERU UM 18 Management Software Updates n iris i pedro caged enei i cedere Eee cde lites shone tush ceeds said due d ae EN deaa 19 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card ooo cece cence cence eeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeseaeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeseaeesseaeeesneeeeeeneeeeeas 21 ppp aaaeei 22 AT S99 Management Software ict ene t eL erae a ed rie p e redo eee ode eoe Lope aeaaaee 23 Console cor M alien eh atin aed tian ee ie ete st Niece 23 LEID Me EE 23 IP Address Gonfiguratlori 5 n c iore ea cast ient oii quis pce esee EORR pode ea a Pe ERU edi entia ce Ee one aes 23 EVent doro eR TANE HCM LEE EM 24 T Ve DIN Do d to de
21. ype turn to Image Download menu P Figure 141 Image Download via XMODEM Menu 3 Select the desired upgrade You can select only one option The options are described in Table 42 Table 42 Image Download via XMODEM Menu Parameter Description Management Card Image Download Select this option to upgrade the AT 899 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card Single Local CM Line Card Image Select this option to upgrade the management software on a single local AT CM Line Card After selecting the option you are prompted for the slot number of the line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number Single Local CM Line Card Bootloader Select this option to upgrade the bootloader file on a single local AT CM Line Card in the chassis After selecting this option you are prompted for the slot number of the line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number Single Remote CM Line Card Image Select this option to use the remote peer management feature to upgrade the AT S73 or AT S102 Management Software on a single remote AT CM Line Card After selecting this option you are prompted for a slot number Enter the slot number of the local line card connected to the remote line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number 326 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 42 Image Download via XMODEM Menu
22. Dying Gasp and First RPS Failure Signals on page 62 The AT CM and the AT CV Media Converter Line Cards can be installed in any of the chassis The only exception is the double slot AT CM70S Line Card which is not supported in the AT CV 1000 Chassis Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards The sections in this chapter are AT CM2 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards on page 40 AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards on page 42 AT CV Media Converter Line Cards on page 44 Management Software on page 46 Maximum Frame Sizes on page 46 Low Power Mode on page 46 Packet Rate Limiting on page 47 uuuuuuiuiu Operating Modes on page 48 39 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards AT CM2 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards Table 1 lists the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Converteon Line Cards Table 1 AT CM2 and AT CM7 Media Converter Line Cards Model Type Port Slot Connector Cable Maximum Distance AT CM201 Fast Ethernet 100Base FX fiber Duplex ST 50 125 or 2 kilometers 1 24 optic 62 5 125 micron miles multi mode 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet AT CM202 Fast Ethernet 100Base FX fiber Duplex SC 50 125 or 2 kilometers 1 24 optic 62 5 125 micron miles multi mode 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet AT CM202 1 Fast Ethernet 100Base FX
23. Saving the the Local AT CM 80 Line Cards Figure 17 Configuration Pop up Window When should you use the Save System Configuration command Whenever you want to permanently save the changes you ve made to the parameter settings on the management card You aren t however required to enter the command after every change That s because the command copies all of the management card s settings to permanent storage not just your last change Instead you might make it a practice to enter the command at the end of your management sessions just before logging off How do you save your changes to the parameter settings on the AT CM Line Cards Actually you don t have to because the line cards do it for you automatically Each line card maintains in its flash memory a configuration file that it updates whenever you enter a new value for a parameter setting Since the file is in flash memory the contents are retained even when the line card is reset or is not operating For example if you were to disable a port on a line card or change a port s speed and immediately afterwards were to remove the line card or power off the chassis the card would still retain your new setting You can however save the configuration settings of the AT CM Line Cards in the master configuration file on the AT CV5M02 Management Card from where they can be restored to the line cards should that ever prove necessary For example if you replaced a line car
24. Storage Type Nonvolatile Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Group Name Operators Security Model SNMPv3 Security Level Authentication Read View Name internet Write View Name Notify View Name Converteon Management Software User s Guide SNMPv3 Worksheet This section provides a table that you can use as a worksheet when configuring SNMPv3 Each SNMPv3 Table is listed with its associated parameters SNMPv3 Parameters SNMPv3 User Table User Security Name Authentication Protocol Authentication Password Privacy Protocol Privacy Password Storage Type SNMPv3 View Table Menu View Name View Subtree OID format Text Name Subtree Mask Hex format View Type Storage Type SNMPv3 Access Table Menu Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name Storage Type SNMPv3 Group Table Menu Security Name Security Model Group Name 349 Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples 350 SNMPv3 Parameters Continued Storage Type SNMPv3 Notify Table Menu Notify Name Notify Tag Notify Type Storage Type SNMPv3 Target Address Table Menu Target Address Name Ip Address UDP Port Timeout 10ms Retries Tag List Target Parameters Storage Type SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Menu Target Paramet
25. a directory 1 mgmt 2 experimental 3 private 4 mib 2 1 system 1 at 3 icmp 5 udp 7 cmot 9 snmp 11 host 25 interfaces 2 ip 4 tcp 6 egp 8 transmission 10 dot1 dBridge 117 282 Figure 121 MIB Tree The management software supports the MIB tree starting with the Internet MIBs as defined by 1 3 6 1 There are two ways to specify a MIB view You can enter the OID number of the MIB view or its equivalent text name For example to specify MIBs in the Internet view you can enter the OID format 1 3 6 1 or the text name internet In addition you can define a MIB view that the user can access or a MIB view that the user cannot access When you want to permit a user to access a MIB view you include a particular view When you want to deny a user access to a MIB view you exclude a particular view After you specify a MIB subtree view you have the option of further restricting a view by defining a subtree mask The relationship between a MIB subtree view and a subtree mask is analogous to the relationship between an IP address and a subnet mask The switch uses the subnet mask to determine which portion of an IP address represents the network SNMPv3 Storage Types SNMPv3 Message Notification
26. a The management card examines its master configuration file in flash memory for the auto copy setting for the line card s slot b Ifthe auto copy feature for the slot is enabled the management card copies the settings of the line card for that slot from its master configuration file in flash memory and sends them to the line card over the backplane When the line card receives the settings it examines them to determine whether or not they are from the same line card model If they are it implements the settings If they are not it discards the settings and instead uses the settings in its own configuration file in flash memory to configure its parameters c If auto copy for the slot is disabled the line card uses the settings in its own configuration file in flash memory to configure its operating parameters The settings for the auto copy parameters for the slots in a chassis are stored in the master configuration file on the management card They are not stored in the configuration files on the line cards Consequently the line cards do not carry this setting with them when they are moved to different slots or different chassis The discussions so far have concerned the configuration files found on the local AT CM Line Cards These are the line cards that reside in the same chassis as the management card But most of this information also happens to apply to remote AT CM Line Cards These are line cards that are managed through the
27. cfg 331 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files 6 To save this information in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration menu and select Save System Configuration To transfer a configuration file go to the next procedure Transferring a Configuration File To transfer a master or SNMPv3 configuration file from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the menu in Figure 26 on page 100 2 From the Configuration Menu select Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP to display the menu in Figure 143 i Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP V Upload Configuration File from Management Card Download Configuration File from Management Card Upload SNMPv3 Configuration File from Management Card Download SNMPv3 Configuration File from Management Card CCP to Configuration E Figure 143 Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP 3 Select the desired transfer from the menu The options are described in Table 44 Table 44 Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP Menu Selection Description Management Card Upload Configuration File from Select this option to upload the master configuration file from the management card to the TFTP server After uploading the file the management card displays the Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP Menu again 332 Converteon Management Software User s Guide
28. 1 3 188 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu in Figure 26 on page 100 From the Configuration menu select All CM Line Card Configurations to display the menu in Figure 76 a All CM Line Card Configuration Menu E Save all CM Line Card Configuration Return All CM Line Cards to Default Configuration CM301 CM302 CM3K0S LPM gees to Confirmation E Figure 76 All CM Line Card Configurations Menu Select CM301 CM302 CM3KOS LPM to display the menu in Figure 77 a C301 CM302 CM3K0s LPM Menu UN Display Low Power Mode for All CM Line Cards Set All CM Line Cards to Low Power Mode Return All CM Line Cards to Normal Mode Metu to All CM Line Card Configuration Menu J Figure 77 CM301 CM302 CMCM3K0S LPM Menu Web Browser System Configuration ALL CM Line Cards Configuration Setting Edit Low Power Mode All CM Line Cards LPM Setting Converteon Management Software User s Guide 4 To activate the low power mode on all the AT CM3 Line Cards and to turn off the LEDs select Set All CM Line Cards to Low Power Mode To disable the mode and turn on the LEDs select Return All CM Line Cards to Normal Mode To view the current low power mode settings of the line cards select Display Low Power Mode for All CM Line Cards An example of the window is shown in Figure 78 If the LPM setting for a line card is ON than the low power mode is active and
29. 2149 through 2164 2164 2165 through 2181 2181 2182 through 2197 2197 2198 through 2214 2214 2215 through 2232 2232 2233 through 2249 2249 2250 through 2267 2267 2268 through 2285 2285 2286 through 2304 2304 2305 through 2322 2322 2323 through 2341 2341 2342 through 2361 2361 2362 through 2380 2380 2381 through 2400 2400 2401 through 2421 2421 2422 through 2442 2442 2443 through 2463 2463 2464 through 2484 2484 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 2485 through 2506 2506 2507 through 2528 2528 2529 through 2551 2551 2552 through 2574 2574 2575 through 2597 2597 2598 through 2621 2621 2622 through 2645 2645 2646 through 2670 2670 2671 through 2695 2695 2696 through 2721 2721 2722 through 2747 2747 2748 through 2773 2773 2774 through 2801 2801 2802 through 2828 2828 2829 through 2857 2857 2858 through 2886 2886 2887 through 2915 2915 2916 through 2945 2945 2946 through 2976 2976 2977 through 3007 3007 3008 through 3039 3039 3040 through 3072 3072 3073 through 3105 3105 3106 through 3139 3139 3140 through 3174 3174 3175 through 3210 3210 3211 through 3246 3246 3247 through 3284 3284 365 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 366 Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate L
30. AT CM70S and AT CV Line Cards The only difference between this mode and the Smart Missing Link mode is the addition of support for the OAM based features on the fiber optic port of the line card You might choose this mode if your network would benefit from the operating characteristics of the Smart MissingLink mode and if the fiber optic port is connected to an OAM compatible device such as another Converteon line card Even though the OAM based features are present only on the fiber optic port in this operating mode they are dependent on the state of the twisted pair port just as in the MissingLink and OAM visible mode For OAM to work there have to be links on both ports not just the fiber optic port on the line card For more information refer to MissingLink and OAM Visible Mode on page 51 If you want the availability of the OAM based features to be independent of the state of the twisted pair port on the line card use the Link Test with OAM mode This operating mode is supported on the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards Use this mode to add support for the OAM based features on the fiber optic ports of these line cards When a line card is set to this operating mode the Link LEDs for the ports operate the same as in the Link Test mode A port s Link LED will be on when the port has a link to a network device and it will be off when the port does not have a link As with the other operating modes this mode does not interfere wi
31. Downloading New Management Software Using TFTP sssssssssseeeeneeneenen enne enne enne en nnne ener nennen 320 Downloading New Management Software Using XMODEM ssesseee emen nennen nnnm enne n nere nennen nns 325 Transferring Configuration Files 1i ener re toten ntes tie a Ire a ESAE EUR de e Bde uet Eee XA Ene Eee Rit Edu tee deed ped 328 Requirements 3 2 3 E E ERU TERME RC PUERRE E T T REN RE Rer PRUEBA 328 Saving the Config ration Settings 2 7 nin iie dte ptite cite cue ec fure ieu e ier Ser xti dtat ates 329 Transferring the Master and SNMPv3 Configuration Files with the Menus eeeeem 330 Transferring the Master Configuration File with the Web Browser Windows eee m 334 Appendix A Default Settings for the Management Card and the Line Cards see 337 AT CV5M02 Management Card E AA 338 AT CM2 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards sssssssseee eene eene nnne takuna enne 340 AT CM3 Media Converter Line CardScan eerie cedit tou susenuscucuddncesovendensouedebecedsrcbdecsiedvendeneseceae 342 AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 1 eene te Ee rete Eee eco rere Rn ep edge ee deo ce eee go tod dense exeo dcus 343 Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples ssssssssssssssssseeneeenene nennen en nent sn stenn nsns nennen nnne nnne 34
32. Full No Limit No Lirnit Displaying the Current Configuration Figure 94 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Page Your changes to the settings on a remote line card are automatically saved in the card s configuration file in flash memory where they are retained even if the remote chassis is powered off or the card is removed from the unit For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 For instructions on how to save your changes in the master configuration file in the AT CV5M02 Management Card refer to Saving the Parameter Settings on page 233 3 When you finish configuring a remote line card select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 4 Youcan either select another remote line card to configure or continue managing the local chassis To view the current parameter settings of a remote card Select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar to display the Remote Module Status amp Configuration tab 2 Click the model name of the line card you want to configure 3 Click the Line Card Configuration tab 229 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Naming a Remote Line Card Configuring the Remote Ports Configuring the Low Power Mode on AT CM3 Line 230 Cards Click the Current Configuration tab An example of the window is shown in Figure 62 on page 168 The port parameters are described
33. J C om A This toggles to when the management card is sending a message to the line card in the slot een B This toggles to when the management card is waiting to transmit a message to the line card C This displays the status of a line card s response to the last transmitted message from the management card A successful response is indicated by while a bad response or no response is signalled with o This column does not apply to AT CV Line Cards 160 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 19 Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description FrmSz This column displays the maximum frame size supported by the AT CM301 AT CM302 and AT CM3KOS Line Cards which is 10240 bytes This value is not adjustable This column will be blank for the AT CM2 AT CM70S and AT CV Line Cards Here are their maximum frame sizes O The AT CM2 Line Cards except for the AT CM2KOS Line Card and the AT CM70S Line Card have a maximum frame size of 1522 bytes o The AT CM2KOS Line Card can have a maximum frame size of either 1522 bytes or 1632 bytes To set this parameter refer to Configuring the Maximum Frame Size on the AT CM2KO0S Line Card on page 182 o The AT CV Line Cards have a maximum frame size of 9000 bytes LPM This column displays the states of the low power modes LPM on the AT CM301 AT CM302 and AT CM3KOS Line Cards The low power mode lets you con
34. To view the remote media converter line cards from the web browser windows 1 Select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar to display the Remote Module Status amp Configuration tab shown in Figure 93 RegiiR Reg20R Reg21R Area2aR Area2bR a121R Regi2R o X o 0 A wn H AT CM302 V400__ OAM LT 10240 ON 2 xi 9 Wm f 0 wi a 108 X0 0 Y AT CM302 v400 OAM LT 10240 ON 0 N e pnm n oos 108 Yi 0 Y AT CM302 v4d OAM LT 10240 ON 0 N 400 Y 0 ens p fll p 0 ar AT CM302 va OAM LT 10240 ON 2 Nf pe o e fa panja D 0 af AT CM302 v400 LT 10240 ON 0 N ES TOD en ID oom PROS EDD YS LOT 0 Y AT CM3K0S v4 0 OAM_LT 10240 ON 0 N si dc fm 0 e e pafe po 0 M AT CM202 V2 V400__ OAM v HI qms f Do fi llr TO 0 N 228 Figure 93 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Tab The columns in the tab are described in Table 26 on page 219 Converteon Management Software User s Guide 2 To configure a remote line card click its model name in the CardTypeVer column to display the Remote Module Status amp Configuration page in Figure 94 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Menu View Port B Port Port Status Configuration Setting Line Card Configuration OAM Configuration Slot Number 14 Card Type CM202 Remote Port Status Flow Control Link Status Speed Duplex Mode Ingress Rate Limit Egrees Rate Lirnit Enable Online 100M
35. configure the settings on OAM clients on remote line cards 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select Port A the fiber optic port on the line card From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configuration to display the OAM Configuration submenu in Figure 106 on page 255 Configure the settings as needed They are defined in Table 31 on page 255 Note If you disable the OAM Admin State on a remote line card the card will continue to forward network traffic but it will stop supporting remote peer management You will not be able to remotely manage the device and if the remote chassis does not have a management card you ll have to visit the remote site to configure the card s parameters For background information refer to Operating Modes on page 48 Before changing the operating mode on a remote line card review the following information o The AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards must be set to the OAM Visible mode to support remote peer management The other operating modes do not support remote peer management The AT CM3 Line Cards have three operating modes that support remote peer management Link Test with OAM MissingLink with OAM and Smart MissingLink with OAM A Caution A line card will reset when its operating mode is changed possibly resulting in the loss of some network traffic When reset the AT CM Line Cards immediately resume forwarding network traffic using the default values for thei
36. on page 246 0 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the Console Port on the Line Card on page 249 241 Chapter 8 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card Selecting the Management Method for the AT CM70S Line Card 242 Unlike the other Converteon line cards the AT CM70S Line Card comes with a Console port for local management without the AT CV5M02 Management Card You can use the Console port to configure the T1 E1 ports when the line card is installed in a chassis that doesn t have a management card During the initial configuration of the AT CM70S Line Card you must specify whether you intend to configure the line card with the Console port or the management card This is referred to as setting the card s UART universal asynchronous receiver transmitter setting The card has two settings UART local console mode and UART backplane mode The UART local console mode lets you configure the card s parameters from the Console port on the card This setting the default setting is the appropriate setting if the AT CM70S Line Card is installed in a chassis that doesn t have a management card If the chassis has a management card you should change the management method to the UART backplane mode This settings lets you configure the line card using the menus in the management software of the management card The term backplane refers to the backplane in the AT CV5000 Chassis Here are factors
37. on page 254 93 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session 94 9 10 The line card is now configured for the OAM based features If there are no other parameters you want to configure such as port speed or the card s name and if the card will be deployed at a remote site in an unmanaged chassis you can remove it from the chassis Entering a save command is unnecessary because the card automatically saves your changes in its configuration file If however the line card will remain in the chassis with the management card you should add the card s configuration to the master configuration file on the management card To accomplish this do the following a Return to the card s Module Configuration Menu b Select Line Card Configuration c From the Line Card Configuration menu select Save Line Card Configuration to add the card s configuration to the master configuration file For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 Return to the Main Menu The line card is now configured for the OAM based features If there are other AT CM Line Cards you want to support the features repeat this procedure starting with Setting the Operating Mode on page 90 If you have a large number of AT CM Line Cards to configure you can speed up the process with the auto copy feature To use the feature you configure one line card with the necessary settings and then activate the auto copy feature on the slot L
38. speed of the devices The Manual negotiate setting deactivates Auto Negotiation on a port so that you can set the parameters manually When you select this option additional settings are displayed in the menu The Full and Half settings control the duplex mode of the port which can be either full duplex or half duplex The Hundred Base and Ten Base selections set a port s speed to 100 or 10 Mbps respectively Observe the following guideline when configuring this port HD Ifthe network device connected to a line card port does not use Auto Negotiation and has a fixed duplex mode of full duplex disable Auto Negotiation on the port and set the speed and duplex mode manually to avoid a duplex mode mismatch 5 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Main Menu and select Configuration System Configuration and Save System Configuration 135 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Web Browser To configure the 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status and Configuration from the menu bar 2 In the Chassis View click the 10 100Base TX port on the management card Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the management card The Port A tab for the management card is shown in Figure 45 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View General Port Port St
39. values in the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway address fields Here are the guidelines for assigning a static IP address configuration u uuu The values have to be entered in this format xxx xxx XXX XXX The DHCP client has to be disabled To delete a value without assigning a new value enter 0 0 0 0 The IP address configuration has to include a default gateway address if the management card will be communicating with network devices like a TFTP server or syslog server that are located on a different subnet This address should specify the first hop to reaching the remote subnet It has to be a member of the same subnet as the card s IP address The default values are 10 0 0 1 for the IP address 255 255 255 0 for the subnet mask and 0 0 0 0 for the default gateway address 6 If you want the card to obtain its IP address from a DHCP server on the network select Enable DHCP to activate the DHCP client Or to deactivate the client to assign the IP address manually select Disable DHCP The default setting for the client is disabled Here are the guidelines to the DHCP client o The 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card has to be connected to a network device such as a Fast Ethernet switch because the card transmits the DHCP requests from that port If the card already has a static IP address the address is overwritten by the address from the DHCP server When the client is activated the managem
40. 110000 120000 etc The AT CM3 Line Cards do not support ingress rate limiting above 200 Mbps C For egress rate limiting from 100 Mbps to 1 Gbps the value has to be an increment of 10 000 kbps in the range of 100 000 to 1 000 000 kbps e g 110000 120000 etc 0 To disable ingress or egress filtering enter the value O Port Statistics For information on this menu option refer to Displaying Port Statistics on page 203 Web Browser 174 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Module Configuration Menu and select Line Card Configuration and Save Line Card Configuration To configure the parameter settings of the ports on the AT CM Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the left menu bar In the Chassis View click the line card port you want to configure Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time Click the Port A tab to configure the fiber optic port on the media converter line card or the Port B tab to configure the twisted pair port You can configure only one port at a time Converteon Management Software User s Guide 4 Click the Port Configuration tab to display the current settings of the port The example in Figure 66 is from Port B the twisted pair port on a line card Module Status amp Configuration
41. 171 The OAM settings described in Table 31 on page 255 are displayed if the line card is set to an OAM operating mode For an explanation of the Save Current Configuration button refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 168 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring the Port Parameters on the AT CM Line Cards Note The port settings on the AT CV Line Cards are not adjustable Menus Toconfigure the parameter settings on the ports on the AT CM Line Cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the AT CM Line Card you want to configure You can configure only one line card at a time The current states of the line card s two ports are displayed in the Module Configuration Menu An example of the menu is shown Figure 63 The example is from an AT CM3 Line Card The AT CM2 and AT CV Line Cards have fewer menu selections a Module Configuration Menu S Converteon Module 4 Module AT CM302 Port Link Speed Mode A 100BaseFX online 100M Full B 100BaseTX online 100M Full Module Name Maximum Frame Size 10240 bytes Configure Low Power Mode Configure Operating Mode Line Card Configuration Reset Line Card Figure 63 Module Configuration Menu Media Converter Line Card c Return t
42. 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 neut cq E 38 AT CM2 and AT CM7 Media Converter Line Cards essem ee nnne nere enne 40 Features of the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards sese 41 AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards censes eene kde ce ended dece nine dte esee dae e 42 Features of the AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards sse eem eene ener 42 AT CV Media Converter Line Cards s cccccecescecesceceeteseedeneececseseeebdeeseeetedendedendedandeseedensbendecdedesdecesdeneedeseddeesedes 44 Features of the AT CV Media Converter Line Cards ssesssseeeeeee enm eene mener 45 Versions of the AT CM2 Line Cards that Support Dying Gasp see eem nennen 64 Versions of the Management Software that Support Dying Gasp ssssssssseeenen ennt 64 OAM Parameter Settings for the OAM based Features ssssssseeeen eee meer enn 69 Menu Selection Options a tero te OH emer pete mr tee 74 Omega Optioris Menu encre erneute tee omy ipe ined a eere nee Feed ra kun ede ai pee dire Ea ue Eel ne t diera pO due 112 Event Eog Forrilat cn eer Uem iM EN RM 123 Genera
43. AT CM302 v4 0 0 UT 6 AT CM302 v4 0 0 v1 7 0 7 AT CM302 v4 0 0 v1 7 0 Figure 86 Image Version Window 209 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Displaying the MAC Addresses and Serial Numbers 210 This section has the procedures for displaying the MAC addresses and serial numbers of the cards in the chassis You may be asked to provide this information if you contact Allied Telesis for technical assistance Menus To view the information from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Diagnostics The Diagnostics Menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 148 2 To view the MAC addresses and serial numbers of the local line cards select Local CM Line Card Diagnostics to display the menu in Figure 83 on page 199 3 Select MAC Address and Serial Number to display the window shown in Figure 87 A Line Card Module Information UON Converteon Module MAC Address Serial Number 1 AT CV5M02 A02803L05060001s C 2 Regll AT CM3KO0S 00 0C 46 CE D9 60 A03572L061100040 B 3 Reg20 AT CM301 00 0C 46 CE D9 72 A03572L061100170 B 4 Reg21 AT CM301 00 0C 46 CE D9 02 A03572L061100014 B 5 Area2a AT CM301 00 0C 46 CE DA 12 A03572L061100111 B 6 Area2b AT CM302 00 15 77 52 5C 6F A03578G071400012 A 7 a121 AT CM202 v2 00 15 77 52 5C A1 A03578G071400225 B 8 Regl12 AT CM202 v2 00 15 77 52 52 44 A03713G070500081 B 9 AT CM202 v2 00 15 77 52 24 12 A03713G070500120 B 10 AT CM212A 1 00 15 77 52 11 22 A03713
44. AT CV5000 Chassis If the active card fails is reset or is removed from the chassis the standby card automatically transitions to the active state usually within twenty seconds If a second management card is installed while the chassis is powered on the new management card is placed in the standby mode even if it occupies a lower numbered slot than the active management card However if the chassis is later power cycled or the active card is reset the management card in the lower numbered slot becomes the active card The management software has an option to force the two management cards to change states You might choose to use this option if the active card is experiencing difficulties and you want to use the standby card to perform your management tasks The switchover however is not permanent The active and standby states are again determined according to their slot numbers the next time the chassis is power cycled For instructions refer to Activating a Standby AT CV5M02 Management Card on page 144 The requirements and guidelines for redundant AT CV5M02 Management Cards are Oo There can be only one standby management card in the AT CV5000 Chassis o You can install the active and standby management cards in any of the slots in the AT CV5000 Chassis Converteon Management Software User s Guide All of your local and remote management sessions have to be conducted through the active management card The RDY
45. AT CV5M02 Management Card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration For the description and an example of the Module Status and Configuration window refer to Displaying the Status of the Line Cards on page 158 2 Select the AT CV5M02 Management Card If the chassis has two management cards select the active card This displays the Module Configuration Menu in Figure 35 on page 120 The columns in the Module Configuration Menu are described in Table 15 Table 15 Module Configuration Menu for a Management Card Column Description Port The port type is 10 100Base TX Link The status of the link on the port Possible values are O Online The port has established a link to a network device O Offline The port is not connected to a network device or has not established a link to a device Speed The operating speed of the port Possible values are 10M or 100M Mode The duplex mode of the port o Full The port is operating in full duplex mode o Half The port is operating in half duplex mode 133 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 134 3 Select 1 A 100Base TX to display the Port Configuration Menu shown in Figure 43 i Port Configuration Menu Module 1 Port A 100Base TX Link State online gt Auto negotiate Manual negotiate iar Return to Module Management Menu ES P Figure 43 Port Co
46. Card or to the AT CV Line Cards 163 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Table 19 Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description AN This column displays the status of Auto Negotiation on the twisted pair ports on the AT CM Line Cards The possible states are o Y Auto Negotiation is enabled on the port The speed and duplex mode are set automatically This is the default setting o N Auto Negotiation is disabled on the port The speed and duplex mode were set manually Web Browser To view the states of the ports on the line cards from the web browser windows click Module Status amp Configuration in the menu bar The web browser windows have a Chassis View and a Menu View The Chassis View is an illustration of the front panel of the chassis The information is static To refresh the view simply click Module Status amp Configuration again To view or configure the parameters of the AT CM Line Cards or the AT CV5M02 Management Card click a port on a card You can configure only one card at a time Sene Status amp onfiguration Remote Module Administration Diagnostics Configuration Management Card Redundancy Log Out lt 164 ATZ Alied Telesis AT S99 Converteon Web Management is 16 26 s6 6 s6 6 7v0 60 6 9 6 Module Status amp Configuration Menu View AT ui M302 gore a
47. Card Configuration 257 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 258 Web Browser To configure the OAM clients on the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 From the Chassis View click Port A the fiber optic port on the AT CM Line Card you want to configure The OAM client is only supported on Port A Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line Card 3 If the Port A tab is not selected select it 4 Select the OAM Configuration tab to display the OAM Configuration window shown in Figure 107 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Setting Line Card Configuration Port Port Port OAM OAM OAM OAM OAM Variable Status Configuration Statistics Configuration Information Statistics Loopback Test Request Slot Number 3 Card Type AT CM302 OAM Configuration Admin State Enabled Mode Active Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 Unidirectional Support Yes Loopback Support Yes Link Event Support No Variable Retrieval Support Yes Figure 107 OAM Configuration Tab If the OAM Configuration tab is not included in the window either you did not select Port A or the line card is not set to an OAM operating mode 5 To change the OAM settings click Edit to display the OAM Configuration pop up window and adjust the settings as needed The
48. Displaying the MAC Addresses and Serial Numbers of the Remote AT CM Line Cards 238 These procedures are used to view the MAC addresses and the serial numbers of the remote AT CM Line Cards through the OAM based remote peer management feature You may be asked to provide this information if you contact Allied Telesis for technical support Menus To view this information from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Diagnostics to display the Diagnostics Menu shown in Figure 53 on page 148 2 Select Remote CM Line Card Diagnostics 3 From the Remote CM Line Card Diagnostics Menu select MAC Address and Serial Number An example of the Remote Line Card Module Information window is shown in Figure 97 The information in this window is for viewing purposes only i Remote Line Card Module Information UN Converteon Module MAC Address Serial Number 1 AT CV5M02 A02803L05060001s C 2 Regll AT CM3KOS 00 0C 46 CE D9 60 A03572L061100040 B 3 Reg20 AT CM301 00 0C 46 CE D9 72 A03572L061100170 B 4 Reg21 AT CM301 00 0C 46 CE D9 02 A03572L061100014 B 5 Area2a AT CM301 00 0C 46 CE DA 12 A03572L061100111 B 6 Area2b AT CM302 00 15 77 52 5C 6F A03578G071400012 A 7 al21 AT CM202 v2 00 15 77 52 5C A1 A03578G071400225 B 8 Regl12 AT CM202 v2 00 15 77 52 52 44 A03713G070500081 B 9 AT CM202 v2 00 15 77 52 24 12 A03713G070500120 B 10 AT CM212A 1 00 15 77 52 11 22 A03713G070500120 B 11 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF
49. Displaying the Status of the Remote Line Cards next D Naming a Remote Line Card on page 223 D Displaying the Parameter Settings of a Remote Line Card on page 223 o Configuring Remote Ports on page 223 D Configuring the Low Power Mode on the AT CM3 Line Cards on page 224 D Configuring the OAM Clients on page 224 D Changing the Operating Mode on page 224 o Restoring the Default Settings on page 225 o Restoring the Last Saved Configuration on page 226 D Saving the Parameter Settings on page 227 0 Resetting the Remote AT CM3 Line Cards on page 227 Displaying the To view the status of the remote line cards from the menus Status of the i 1 From the Main Menu select Remote Module Status and Remote Line Configuration to display the Remote Module Status and Cards Configuration Menu shown in Figure 91 The menu contains the status of those remote line cards that have remote peer connections to their local counterparts in the managed chassis The columns are described in Table 26 AT CV Line Cards are not included in this menu because they do not support remote peer management Remote Module Status and Configuration Converteon m L LllcI ll REMOTE MODULE ll FIBER PORT COPPER PORT Mod Name cCardTypever VER OperMode FrmSz LPM Slot CPM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL 1 cer teas inn a edd prc enn uk Kem o a
50. FF FF A03713G070500012 B 12 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A03713G070500087 B 13 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A03713G070500055 B 14 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A02765G070500146 D 15 Unequi pped 16 Unequi pped 17 Unequi pped 18 Unequi pped k Hit any key to continue E Figure 97 Remote Line Card Module Information Window Converteon Management Software User s Guide The columns in the window are described in Table 29 Table 29 Remote Line Card Module Information Window Row Description Module This column displays the slot numbers the names and the model names of the local cards in the managed chassis MAC This column displays the MAC addresses of the remote Address AT CM Line Cards Serial This column displays the serial numbers of the remote Number line cards Web Browser To use the web browser windows to view the MAC addresses and serial numbers of the remote line cards 1 2 Select Diagnostics from the menu bar Select the Remote CM Line Card tab Select the MAC Address amp Serial Number tab The columns in the window are described in Table 29 239 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Displaying SFP Module Information from the Remote AT CM Line Cards 240 Menus Web Browser The procedures in this section are used to view the manufacturer s specifi
51. Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Management Card Redundancy Tab esee cie nennen nannten i etn i eitia 145 Terminal Configuration Menu incessere reinen nnd nne donnent ENE n ed ee Enim Ea ted eade nuit ns 146 Terminal Data Rate MNU eae e E a E eene nne en nnn a p ean Eae Eao pai aasa aisit iiaa enne 147 DiaGnOsticS Men s neissen een e iraa E r ER E reaa 148 Chassis Diagnostics MenuU a a eee n EUER D a DEO ii 148 Chassis Information Mernu 2e entren atre rt nee qu ku PER Ka aae NTEN eu Ku AAN EEE xard ea EARO ce nine dd etas 149 Chassis Diagnoslics TaD HERE ERREUR SEN CHEER ERE HU PRI MUERE SERES REPEAT Me 151 Realtime IPC Message eee eiue IUe Tende tecto a eode e e ERE ate 153 Module Status and Configuration Menu ssssseseee ene nne nennen nnne nennen nnne nne nen nnne 158 CASSIS VIGQW EC 164 DCHNIAMI S aieiai 165 Display Current Configuration Window iseesseeneeneeem eem mener nere nennen nnne nennen nnne 166 Current Configuration Tab 12 1rd idee reete D Hd esee ee Ee Ere de edge tet ee Ede dee erede eroe gere ee 168 Module Con
52. L or P the fiber optic port has established a link with the other line card and the OAM client is attempting to negotiate with the other client If the character does not transition to an asterisk it probably means that the OAM settings on one or both of the cards is incorrect To verify their settings repeat the procedures Setting the Operating Mode on page 90 and Configuring the OAM Settings on page 93 8 To test the dying gasp feature do the following a Power off the AT CV1203 Chassis If the chassis has two power supplies disconnect one of the supplies wait a second or two and power off the second supply 97 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session 98 b C From the Main Menu select Administration From the Administration Menu select Event Log and Display Event Log If the AT CV1203 Chassis has just one power supply or if ithas two power supplies but not a management card you should see this message in the event log Dying Gasp has occurred on remote linecard number Number is the slot number of the line card in the AT CV5000 Chassis that received the dying gasp signal from its remote counterpart line card in the AT CV1203 Chassis If the remote AT CV1203 Chassis has two power supplies and the AT CV5M02 Management Card the event log should also contain this message logged when the first power supply on the remote chassis lost power CV1203 RPS Failure on Remote Line Card number The number va
53. Line Cards and on the newer versions of the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards listed in Table 7 Determining the version levels of the AT CM2 Line Cards requires the management card because the version levels are not included on the faceplates on the cards When viewed with the management software the newer AT CM2 Line Cards display their version levels as extensions to the model names like AT CM201 v2 AT CM2 Line Cards that do not display a version level do not support this feature 63 Chapter 3 OAM based Features First RPS Failure 64 Table 7 Versions of the AT CM2 Line Cards that Support Dying Gasp Media Converter Line Card Hardware Version AT CM201 Version 2 AT CM202 Version 2 AT CM202 1 Version 2 AT CM202 2 Version 2 AT CM212A 1 Version 2 AT CM212B 1 Version 2 AT CM70S Version 2 AT CM2K0S Version 3 O Refer to Table 8 for the required version levels of the management software Table 8 Versions of the Management Software that Support Dying Gasp Management and Media Converter Line Cards Management Software Versions AT CV5M01 Management Card Version 2 0 2 or later of the AT S70 Management Software AT CV5M02 Management Card Version 3 0 0 or later of the AT S99 Management Software AT CM2 Line Cards Version 2 0 2 or later of the AT S73 Line Card Management Software AT CM3 Line Cards Version 3 0 0 or later of the AT S102 Line Card Managem
54. MD5 authentication protocol Users SNMP entities are authenticated with the MD5 authentication protocol after a message is received This algorithm generates the message digest The user is authenticated when the authentication protocol checks the message digest With the MD5 selection you can configure a Privacy Protocol S SHA This value represents the SHA authentication protocol With this selection users are authenticated with the SHA authentication protocol after a message is received This algorithm generates the message digest The user is authenticated when the authentication protocol checks the message digest With the SHA selection you can configure a Privacy Protocol 291 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Table 33 SNMPv3 User Table Parameters Parameter Description Authentication Protocol continued N None This value represents no authentication protocol When messages are received users are not authenticated This selection does not support a Privacy Protocol Note You may want to assign NONE to a super user Authentication Password An authentication password of 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters Applies only to MD5 and SHA authentication protocols Privacy Protocol Privacy Password Applies only to MD5 and SHA authentication protocols The possible values are D DES This value makes the DES privacy or encryption protocol the privacy protocol for this User Table
55. Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration System Parameters Configuration SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 Access Table The Configure SNMPv3 Access Table menu is shown in Figure 128 a Configure SNMPv3 Access Table D Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry Return to SNMPv3 Configurations P Figure 128 Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Menu 296 System SNMPv1 amp SNMP User View Access Table Table Table Converteon Management Software User s Guide To manage the SNMPv3 View Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the Access Table tab The SNMPv3 Access Table tab is shown in Figure 129 v2c Grow Table Notif Table Configuration SNMPv3 Files Help Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Group Name n weird Security Level pesas Read View Write View Notify View Storage Type grpmanager usm AuthNoPriv Prefix viewUSMmanager viewUSMmanager viewUSMmanager Permanent grpcommpublic any NoAuthNoPriv Prefix viewCommpublic none none Permanent grpcommprivate any NoAuthNoPriv Prefix viewCommprivate viewCommprivate viewCommprivate Permanent Add More Figure 129 SNMPv3 Access Table Tab The parameters for SNMPv3 Access Table entries are defined in Table 35 Table 35 SNMPv3 Access Table Para
56. Management Cable to the Management Card s Console Port 2 Connect the other end of the cable to an RS 232 port on a terminal or a PC with a terminal emulator program 3 Configure the terminal or the terminal emulation program as follows Bits per second 115200 default range 2400 to 115200 bps Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None u uuu 0 Converteon Management Software User s Guide 4 When prompted enter the username and password of the manager or operator account on the management card The manager account has the username manager and the default password friend The operator account has the username operator and the default password of operator Usernames and passwords are case sensitive For further information refer to Manager and Operator Accounts on page 25 For instructions on how to change a password refer to Configuring the Management Security on page 111 After you log on the Main Menu in Figure 12 is displayed on your screen i Allied Telesis AT CV5M02 Management Module Software E AT CV5000 AC Main Menu Module Status and Configuration Remote Module Status and Configuration Administration Image Download Diagnostics Configuration Management Card Redundancy oan ui Figure 12 Main Menu Note The Main Menu for the AT CV1200 or AT CV1203 Chassis does not include the Management Card Redundancy option That menu option applies only to the AT CV5
57. Management Software User s Guide Configuration System SNMPvi amp SNMPv2c SNMPv3 All CM Line Cards Files 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 public private public California USA Allied Telesis Figure 31 SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c Tab To change the contact and location information click the Edit button to display a pop up window To enter the location of the chassis select the Location field and enter a new location of up to 20 alphanumeric characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current location without entering a new location press the space bar once To enter the name phone number or other information that identifies the person responsible for managing the system select the Contact field and enter a value of up to 20 alphanumeric characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current location without entering a new location press the space bar once Click the Update button to close the pop up window To save your changes in the master configuration file refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 107 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Configuring the SNMP Community Strings 108 Menus Web Browser The procedures in this section are used to set the three SNMP community strings Get Set and Trap on the management card The strings are used to manage the media converter with an SNMP application and for trap verifi
58. Menu Management Card Select Reset Management and Restart System Software At the confirmation prompt select Yes to reset the card or No to cancel the procedure To resume managing the chassis wait approximately one minute for the management card to initialize its management software and then start a new management session Web Browser To reset the AT CV5M02 Management Card from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Module Status and Configuration from the menu bar From the Chassis View click the 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the management card Converteon Management Software User s Guide 3 Click the General tab shown in Figure 36 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Port A Slot Number 2 Card Type CV5M02 Module Name Module Name Reset Management Card amp Restart System S Return Management Card Port Configuration t Figure 36 General Tab 4 Click Reset Management Card and Restart System Software 5 At the confirmation prompt click OK to reset the management card or Cancel to cancel the procedure 6 Toresume managing the chassis wait one minute for the management card to initialize its management software and then start a new management session 121 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Viewing the Event Log For background information r
59. Mode on the AT CM3 Line Cards on page 186 Setting the Low Power Mode on all the AT CM3 Line Cards on page 188 Restoring the Default Settings on page 191 Restoring the Last Saved Configurations to the AT CM3 Line Cards on page 195 Resetting an AT CM3 Line Card on page 198 Resetting All of the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards on page 199 Resetting All of the AT CM AT CM70S and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards on page 201 Displaying Port Statistics on page 203 Displaying the Version Numbers of the Management Software on page 207 Displaying the MAC Addresses and Serial Numbers on page 210 Displaying SFP Module Information on page 213 157 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Displaying the Status of the Line Cards Menus To view the states of the ports on the AT CM and AT CV Line Cards in the chassis select Module Status and Configuration from the Main Menu The Module Status and Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 58 im to Main Menu Converteon MODULE INFO FIBER PORT COPPER PORT 4 Mod Name CardTypever ST OperMod IPC FrmSz LPM AC VER ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL AN 1 AT CV5M02 Active 800 ON v400 Zo pL ST 00 i 2 Regll AT CM302 OAM LT o o 10240 ON N V400 100 Y 0 0 oo 00 Y 0 0 Y 3 R
60. OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration Menu An example of the menu is shown in Figure 105 on page 254 From the OAM Configuration Menu select the Show Local OAM Information window to display the Show Local OAM Information Menu shown in Figure 112 on page 265 Converteon Management Software User s Guide a Show Local OAM Information TN Module 4 Port A Line Card Operation Mode OAM Visible Mode Operation Status Operational Mux State Forward Parser State Forward Local Discovering Yes Local Stable NO Remote Discovering NO Remote Stable NO Critical Event NO Dying Gasp NO Link Fault NO OAM Version 0x01 Config Revision 0x0003 vendor Information 0x00160001 Vendor OUI 00 30 84 Loopback State None In Loopback Test No V Return to OAM Configurations ff Figure 112 Show Local OAM Information Window This window is for viewing purposes only The items in the window are defined in Table 32 Table 32 Show Local OAM Information Window Column Description Line Card Displays the OAM operating mode of the line card The Operation possible values are Mode C OAM Bypass Mode In this mode the line card does not process any OAMPDU packets it receives Rather it handles them like normal network traffic forwarding them onto the other port This allows the line card to be used in a network where the Converteon chassis is not part of the IEEE802 3ah end points In this mode the OAM fu
61. OAM even when there is no link on a twisted pair port on the line card you should use the Link Test and OAM operating mode instead This mode which is supported on all of the media converter line cards is nearly identical to the MissingLink mode It too lets the two ports on a media converter line card share the link status of their network connections The difference is that this mode does not completely shut off the transmitter of a port when a companion port on the line card loses or cannot establish a link to a network device Rather it pulses the port s transmitter and flashes the port s Link LED once a second to signal that the port can still establish a link to its network device and that the link loss originated on the companion port on the line card When the connection is reestablished on a port the companion port automatically resumes normal operations to permit the two ports to forward traffic again The advantage of the Smart MissingLink mode over the MissingLink mode is that troubleshooting network problems is easier because you can use the Link LEDs For example assume that the fiber optic port on a media converter line card set to the Missing Link mode did not have a link to its network device The mode s response would be to disable the transmitter on the companion port the twisted pair port The result would be that the Link LEDs for both ports would be off making it difficult for you to determine which port experienced
62. OAM_LT o o 10240 ON_ N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 Y OAM ML o o 10240 0N N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 Y Tim o o 10240 ON N v400 100 Y 0 0 100 Y 0 0 Y OAM LT o 10240 ON N v400 1G Y 0 0 oo 1G Y 0 0 NG OAM_V o o N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 Y OAM V o o N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 v 0 0 Y OAM V o o N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 Y ET 100 100 ET 100 100 Eie 100 100 ET 100 100 ET A 100 100 XO ROB ROO ORO OR OR GR ORO OR GR OR T Figure 25 Viewing the OAM Client Status If the third character is a o the fiber optic port has not established a connection to the port on the other line card Try the following O Check that the fiber optic cable is firmly connected to the ports on the two cards O Check that the other Converteon chassis is powered on and that the line card is fully inserted in the slot in the enclosure O If the cards are AT CM3 Line Cards set to the MissingLink and OAM mode or the Smart MissingLink and OAM mode check to be sure that their twisted pair ports are connected to live network equipment If the third character is a letter such as an
63. Omega Enable Timeout 10 Edit Terminal Setting Baudrate 115200 Edit Temperature Threshold Maximum Temperature Threshold 60 C IP Parameters IP Address 10 4 8 22 Gateway Address 10 4 8 1 Configuration System Configuration Setting Subnet Mask DHCP Edit 255 255 255 0 Enable Edit Figure 30 System Tab The IP Parameters section of the window displays the IP address configuration of the management card 103 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Assigning a Name 104 Menus Web Browser You can assign a name to the management card to make the card and the chassis easier to identify The name is displayed at the top of the menus of the management software during your local management sessions and remote Telnet sessions The web browser windows do not display the name You can assign a name to the management card from the System Configuration Menu or the Omega Options Menu This procedure uses the System Configuration Menu To assign a name to the management card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 26 on page 100 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 4 Select System Name and enter a new name of up to 40 charac
64. Redundancy menu and tab shown in Figure 22 and Figure 23 respectively Management Card Redundancy Menu Switch Over Management cards Copy Active Card Configuration to Standby Card Save Current Configuration of Standby Card Return to Administration Menu Figure 22 Management Card Redundancy Menu 83 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session 84 Management Card Redundancy Help Switch over management cards Copy active card configuration to standby card Save current configuration of standby card Figure 23 Management Card Redundancy Tab The functions of these commands are described here C Copy Active Card Configuration to Standby Card This command is used to copy the temporary master configuration file from DRAM in the active management card to DRAM in the standby card C Save Current Configuration of Standby Card This command instructs the standby card to copy its master configuration file from DRAM to flash memory for permanent storage To use the commands select the Copy command and wait for the active card to send its file to the standby card Then select the Save command In all likelihood you ll probably never use these commands because the active and standby management cards perform these functions automatically as part of their normal operations About the only situation where you might feel inclined to use them is if you suspect that the active management card is failing an
65. SNMPv3 User Table from the menus O From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration System Parameters Configuration SNMPv3 Configurations Configure SNMPv3 User Table The Configure SNMPv3 User Table menu is shown in Figure 124 E Configure SNMPv3 User Table ON Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry NReturn to SNMPv3 Configurations E Figure 124 Configure SNMPv3 User Table Menu To manage the SNMPv3 User Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the User Table tab The SNMPv3 User Table tab is shown in Figure 125 290 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuration System SNMPvi amp SNMPv2c SNMPv3 All CM Line Cards Files Help User View Access Group Notify Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Table Table Table Table Table User Name Authentication Privacy Protocol Storage Type Row Status Protocol Parameter Figure 125 SNMPv3 User Table Tab The parameters for SNMPv3 User Table entries are defined in Table 33 Table 33 SNMPv3 User Table Parameters Description User Security Name Authentication Protocol A descriptive name for the user of up to 32 alphanumeric characters The user s authentication protocol The possible values are M MD5 This value represents the
66. Table 44 Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP Menu Selection Description Download Configuration File Select this option to download the master configuration file to from Management Card the management card from the TFTP server After receiving the master configuration file from the TFTP server the card writes the file to flash memory and resets Afterwards it initializes its management software and configures its parameters according to the settings in the downloaded configuration file To resume managing the card you have to start a new management session If the auto copy settings for the chassis slots is activated in the downloaded configuration file the settings on the line cards may change This may disrupt network operations and may result in the loss of network traffic For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 Upload SNMPv3 Configuration Select this option to upload the SNMPv3 configuration file File from Management Card from the management card to the TFTP server After uploading the file the management card displays the Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP Menu again Download SNMPv3 Select this option to download the SNMPv3 configuration file Configuration File from to the management card from the TFTP server After Management Card receiving the master configuration file from the TFTP server the card writes the file to flash memory and resets Afterwards it initializes
67. Telesis products are available for viewing in portable document format PDF from our web site at www alliedtelesis com Converteon Management Software User s Guide Product Name Conventions This manual uses the following product name conventions m m AT CM Line Cards This name is used to refer to all of the line cards in the AT CM2 Line Card series and the AT CM3 Line Card series AT CM2 Line Cards This name is used to refer to all of the line cards in the AT CM2 Line Card series such as the AT CM201 AT CM2KO0S and AT CM212A 1 Line Cards For a complete list of the line cards refer to Table 1 on page 40 AT CM3 Line Cards This product name is used to refer to the three line cards in the AT CM3 Line Card series the AT CM301 AT CM302 and AT CM3KOS Line Cards AT CV Line Cards This product name is used to refer to all of the line cards in the AT CV Line Card series such as the AT CV101 AT CV102 2 and AT CV1KSS Line Cards The complete list of the AT CV Line Cards is provided in Table 5 on page 44 Preface Contacting Allied Telesis Online Support Email and Telephone Support Returning Products Sales and Corporate Information Warranty This section provides Allied Telesis contact information for technical support and for sales and corporate information You can request technical support online from the Allied Telesis Knowledge Base at www alliedtelesis com support kb aspx You can submit
68. Tis ria i Mena S oi Mk diei cade RA Mif da adis im id Rt 2 Regll r AT CM3KOS v400 OAM_LT 10240 ON 1 Y Be 1G Y 0 0 oo 1G Y 0 0 3 Reg20_r AT CM301 v400 OAM LT 10240 ON 1 Y 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 4 Reg21_r AT CM301 v400 OAM LT 10240 ON 1 Y x 100 Y 0 0 00 100 Y 0 0 5 Area2a r AT CM301 v400 OAM LT 10240 ON 1 y 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 v 0 0 Figure 91 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu 218 Table 26 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description Unlabeled Managed Chassis Slot Numbers This column lists the slots numbers in the managed chassis You use this column to determine the local line cards to which the remote line cards are connected REMOTE MODULE Mod Name This column displays the names of the remote line cards CardTypeVer This column displays the model names of the remote line cards Actually this column displays the model names of the local line cards But since in most cases a local line card will be connected to a remote line card of the same model it s easier to consider this column as showing you the model names of the remote cards VER This column displays the version numbers of the management software on the remote line cards OperMod This column displays the operating modes of the remote line cards Since remote peer management requires an OAM mode remote line cards have to
69. You modify a key only by modifying the user password In addition you have the option of assigning no user authentication In this case no authentication is performed for this user You may want to make this configuration for someone with super user capabilities Note The keys generated by the MD5 and SHA protocols are specific to the SNMPv3 protocol They have no relation to the SSL and SSH keys for encryption After you have configured an authentication protocol you have the option of assigning a privacy protocol In SNMPv3 protocol terminology privacy is equivalent to encryption Currently the DES protocol is the only encryption protocol supported The DES privacy protocol requires the authentication protocol to be configured as either MD5 or SHA If you assign a DES privacy protocol to a user then you are also required to assign a privacy password If you choose to not assign a privacy value then SNMPv3 messages are sent in plain text format The SNMPv3 protocol allows you to configure MIB views for users and groups The MIB tree is defined by RFC 1155 Structure of Management Information as illustrated in Figure 121 on page 282 281 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 root ccitt 0 iso 1 joint iso ccitt 2 standard 0 registration authority 1 member body 2 identified organization 3 dod 6 l internet 1
70. a network problem that may be rooted in a link problem The MissingLink mode will not allow you to use the port s Link LEDs or the management software to diagnose the problem since neither port will show a link Rather the Link Test and the Smart MissingLink modes are more useful when troubleshooting a link problem MissingLink and OAM Visible Mode Converteon Management Software User s Guide This operating mode for the AT CM3 Line Cards combines the MissingLink mode and OAM The ports of a line card in this mode function exactly as they do in the MissingLink mode with the additional of the OAM based features on Port A the fiber optic port As explained in the previous section the two ports on a line card set to the MissingLink mode operate in tandem If one of the ports does not have or loses its link to its network device the companion port on the card is disabled to prevent it from forming a link with its network device For OAM to work in this combined operating mode there has to be a link not only on the fiber optic port on a card but on the twisted pair port too If the twisted pair does not have a link the fiber optic port is disabled and OAM will not work even if the fiber optic port is connected to an active device This principal is illustrated in Figure 1 It Shows two AT CM Line Cards one in the AT CV5000 Chassis and another in the remote AT CV1000 Chassis connected over fiber optic cable If the line cards are set t
71. as to SNMPv3 Configurations J Figure 134 Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table Menu 306 Converteon Management Software User s Guide To access the Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the Target Address Table tab The Target Address Table tab is shown in Figure 135 Configuration System SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c SNMPv3 Files User View Access Group Notify Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Target Address Name TDomain TAddress UDP Port Timeout Retries Tag List Parameters Storage Type Figure 135 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Tab Table 38 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Parameters Parameter Description Target Address Name The name of the SNMP manager or host that manages the SNMP activity on your switch The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters IP Address TAddress The IP address of the host The IP address is entered in this format XXX XXX XXX XXX UDP Port The UDP port The range is 0 to 65 535 The default port is 162 Timeout 10mS The timeout value in milliseconds When an Inform message is generated a response from the device is required The timeout value determines how long SNMPv3 considers the Inform message as an active message This parameter applies to Inform messages only The range is from 0 to 2 147 483 64
72. back panel of the chassis This message only appears if the AT CV1203 Chassis has two power supplies and just one of the power supplies fails Clear A power supply connected to the AT CV1203 Chassis resumed normal operations or was replaced CV1203 RPS Failure on Remote Line Card n AT CV1203 AT CV5000 Report Clear The media converter line card in slot n of the AT CV5000 Chassis received a report from its line card counterpart in a remote AT CV1203 Chassis that one of the two power supplies connected to the remote chassis lost power This message requires remote peer management For background information refer to Dying Gasp and First RPS Failure Signals on page 62 For instructions on how to configure the line cards for this feature refer to Configuring the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM70S Line Cards for the OAM based Features on page 90 If a remote AT CV1203 Chassis loses all power and has at least one AT CM Media Converter Line Card it sends the dying gasp signal instead of this signal The media converter line card in slot n of the AT CV5000 Chassis received a clear signal from its line card counterpart in a remote AT CV1203 Chassis indicating that power has been restored This message requires remote peer management 125 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Table 13 General Event Messages Classi Message Chassis d De
73. before performing this procedure O If the default operating mode of a line card is not an OAM mode the line card will not support remote peer management after it is returned to its default values A Caution If the card s current operating mode is not the default mode the card will reset possibly resulting in the loss of some network traffic The line card will immediately resume forwarding traffic but it will be unresponsive to management commands for one minute while it initializes its management software To return the parameter settings on a remote line card to their default values from the menus 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select Configure Operating Mode 225 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management 226 Restoring the Last Saved Configuration 2 To view the default settings of the line card prior to activating them select Display Default Configuration An example of the Display Default Configuration window is shown in Figure 80 on page 192 3 Toreturn the parameter settings on the line card to the default values return to the Line Card Configuration Menu and select Return Line Card to Default Configuration 4 Atthe confirmation prompt select Yes to return the parameter settings on the line card to the default values or No to cancel the procedure 5 If the card changes its operating mode it resets To continue managing the line card return t
74. card You can view the statistics of only one line card at a time 3 Select the Port A tab to view the statistics for the fiber optic port or the Port B tab to view the statistics for the twisted pair port 4 Click the Port Statistics tab to display the Port Statistics window for the port you selected The port statistics for the AT CM3 Line Cards are described in Table 22 on page 203 The port statistics for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards are described in Table 23 on page 206 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Displaying the Version Numbers of the Management Software Menus The procedures in this section are used to view the version numbers of the management software programs for the local or remote AT CM Media Converter Line Cards and the AT CV5M02 Management Card You may find this information useful if you obtain new versions of the programs and want to ascertain which line cards need the new releases Also you might be asked to provide this information if you contact Allied Telesis technical support for assistance The management software programs are listed here 0 The AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards use the AT S73 Management Software 0 The AT CM3 Line Cards use the AT S102 Management Software o The AT CV5MO2 Management Card uses the AT S99 Management Software Note There is no management software program for the AT CV Media Converter Line Cards To view the information from the menus 1 From th
75. client received back The measurements are given in frames bytes octets and bits Test frames are sixty octets in length To clear the counters click Clear Loopback Statistics To stop the test change the OAM Loopback Test field to Stop by clicking Edit and selecting Stop from the pull down menu The line card stops transmitting test packets To resume normal network operations on the local and remote line cards change the Remote Loopback field to Disable by clicking Edit and selecting Disable from the pull down menu The line cards resume forwarding network traffic 263 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client Displaying OAM Information on Local OAM Clients 264 Menus The procedures in this section explain how to view the OAM status information on the OAM clients on the local line cards To display status information on the local OAM clients from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu An example of the menu is shown in Figure 58 on page 158 Select the local line card whose OAM information you want to view This displays the Module Configuration Menu for the line card An example is shown in Figure 63 on page 169 Select Port A to display the Port Management Menu shown in Figure 64 on page 170 OAM is only supported on port A of the line cards From the Port Management Menu select
76. current operating mode is different from the last saved configuration Web Browser To restore the last saved configuration to an AT CM3 Line Card from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar In the Chassis View click either of the ports on the line card you want to configure Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the model name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time Select the Line Card Configuration tab To restore the previous configuration to the line card select the Last Saved Configuration tab shown in Figure 82 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Port amp Port B Setting Line Card Configuration E t Last Saved Default Auto cepy unfer aen Configuration Configure Slot Number 14 Card Type AT CM302 Operation Mode Link Test OAM Visible Mode Restore to Last Saved Configuratio Last Saved Configuration Port A 100Base FX Port B 100Base TX Port Enable Enabled Enabled Negotiation Auto negotiate Duplex MDI MDIX Flow Control Enable Enable Ingress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit OAM Configuration Admin State Enabled Mode Active Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 Unidirectional Supprt Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support No Variable Retrieval Support Yes Figure 82
77. end tede da nnna ce dee 303 SNMPv3 Notify Table Tab eiecti tenens ee tide Lee He eoe Fedele e et de ede Dae dade eee ede 304 Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table Menu seen enm eene eren enne 306 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Tab ciii ed Heredia deed aoei aau dae adi eeina 307 Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Menu esssseeeeneen mener ener 310 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Tab ssssssssssseeeeee enemies 310 TFTP Image Download Configuration essesesseeeeeneeeenn emen menm nenne ennemi 317 Image Download Menu eiie Ee cei ted eed eene tnodo ud te ced en reed te etd eee re doe daitan 321 Image Download via TFTP Menu sssssssee ee eene nennen ennemi innen nnns eter en enne ern enn rne 321 Image Download via XMODEM Menu eene ene enne enrren nennen nne nennen nennen nennen nes 326 TFTP File Upload Download Configuration Menu enne emm 331 Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP essen emen eee nre 332 glo 334 Rate Limit Input vs Hardware Configured Values essen eee emen 351 11 Figures Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table
78. entry With this selection messages transmitted between the host and the device are encrypted with the DES protocol N None Select this value if you do not want a privacy protocol for this User Table entry With this selection messages transmitted between the host and the switch are not encrypted A privacy password of 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters Applies only to DES privacy protocol Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Row Status This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 User Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 292 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring the SNMPv3 View Table This section describes the parameters for SNMPv3 View Table entries The parameters are View Name Subtree OID Subtree Mask o o o o MIB OID Table View To access the SNMPv3 View Table from the menus O From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration System Parameters Configuration SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 View Table The Configure SNMPv3 View Table menu is shown in Figure 126 fe Configure SNMPv3
79. fiber Duplex SC 9 125 micron 15 kilometers 9 4 optic single mode miles 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet AT CM202 2 Fast Ethernet 100Base FX fiber Duplex SC 9 125 micron 40 kilometers optic single mode 24 8 miles 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet AT CM2K0S Gigabit Ethernet SFP slot for Varies by SFP Varies by SFP 1000Base X transceiver transceiver transceiver 10 100 1000Base RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters T twisted pair 328 feet AT CM212A 1 Fast Ethernet 100Base FX fiber Simplex SC 9 125 micron 15 kilometers 9 4 AT CM212B 1 optic single mode miles 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet AT CM70S Fast Ethernet and SFP slot for Varies by SFP x Varies by SFP T1 E1 100Base FX transceiver transceiver transceiver 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet T1 E12 RJ 48 Twisted pair n a RS 232 Console Mini DIN RS 232 Serial n a 1 SFP transceiver sold separately 2 Four T1 E1 ports 40 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Note The maximum operating distances of the fiber optic ports assume full duplex operation The distances will be significantly less for half duplex mode Table 2 lists the features of the line cards Table 2 Features of the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards Twisted Pair Port Operating Modes uuuuuiaa u uua u ui uiu IEEE 80
80. for communicating with your network This port has to be connected to a network device such as a Fast Ethernet switch if the management card will be performing any of these management functions Supporting remote Telnet web browser or SNMP management Sending event messages to a syslog server Setting the date and time from a Network Time Protocol server Sending SNMP traps to trap receivers Uploading or downloading files to a TFTP server o2 uuuuiu Pinging remote devices IP Address Configuration The management card must have an IP address configuration to perform the functions listed in 10 100Base TX Port The configuration consists of an IP address a subnet mask and possibly a default gateway address The management card can have only one IP address configuration The configuration can be assigned manually or supplied by a DHCP or BOOTP server on your network For instructions refer to Assigning an IP Address Configuration on page 100 23 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Event Log Activity Monitor The management card has a log for recording operational events like the removal of line cards from the chassis or the loss of links on the ports on the media converter cards The events are composed of descriptions of the events and the dates and times of when they occurred If your network encounters a problem you may be able to more readily identify its cause by reviewing the history of the events in the
81. in Table 21 on page 171 and the OAM parameters in Table 31 on page 255 To assign a name to a remote line card 1 Select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar to display the Remote Module Status amp Configuration tab Click the model name of the line card you want to configure Click the Setting tab Click the Edit button in the Module Name section of the window In the Module Name pop up window enter a new name of up to eight alphanumeric characters for the card Spaces and special characters are not allowed Click the Update button to close the pop up window To configure the parameter settings of a remote port 1 Select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar to display the Remote Module Status amp Configuration tab Click the model name of the line card you want to configure Click the Port A tab or the Port B tab You can configure only one port at a time Click the Port Configuration tab Configure the parameters as necessary The parameters are described in Table 21 on page 171 Setting the low power mode does not affect the network operations of the remote line cards For background information refer to Low Power Mode on page 46 To activate or deactivate the low power mode on remote AT CM3 Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 Select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar to display the Remote Module Status amp Confi
82. in length and has a valid FCS InFragments The number of fragments received by a port A fragment is less than 64 octets in length and has an invalid FCS InOversize The number of oversize frames received by a port An oversize frame is larger than 10 240 bytes and has a valid FCS InJabber InRxErr The number of jabber frames received by a port A jabber frame is larger than 10 240 bytes and has an invalid FCS The number of ingress frames that have an RxErr signal from the PHY InFCSErr The number of ingress frames with CRC errors Frames with this error are not counted in the InFragments InJabber or InRxErr counter OutOctetsLo The length in octets of all the frames sent by a port The length is given in two counters This is the lower 32 bits of the counter OutOctetsHi The length in octets of all the frames sent by a port The length is given in two counters This is the upper 32 bits of the counter OutUnicast The number of unicast frames sent by a port OutBroadcasts The number of broadcast frames sent by a port OutMulticasts The number of multicast frames sent by a port OutPause The number of pause frames sent by a port Deferred The number of frames that were successfully transmitted without collisions after being delayed one time because the medium was busy This counter applies only to half duplex mode Collisions The number of fram
83. in Figure 26 on page 100 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 4 Select Omega Options to display the menu in Figure 32 o Omega Options Menu B System Name Manager Password Operator Password Timeout 10 gt Local Omega Enabled Disable Local Omega gt Remote Omega Enabled No Remote Omega V Return to System Parameters Configuration Menu J Figure 32 Omega Options Menu 111 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 5 Configure the parameters as needed The options are described in Table 11 Table 11 Omega Options Menu Parameter Description System Name This parameter assigns a name to the management card The name can have up to 40 characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete an existing name without entering a new name press the space bar once Manager Password Operator Password These parameters are used to set the manager and operator passwords Passwords can have 0 to 16 alphanumeric characters of the letters A to Z in uppercase and lowercase as well as the numbers 1 to 9 Passwords are case sensitive and should not contain special characters such as spaces asterisks or exclamation points The default passwords are friend for
84. is from the AT CV5000 Chassis The windows for the AT CV1200 Chassis and the AT CV1203 Chassis do not include the power supply information The information in this window is for viewing purposes only 4 Chassis Information Menu CX Serial Number A02736 MAC Address 00 0C 46 98 22 5F CONVERTEON Chassis AT CV5000 AC Revision 4 0 1 Running O days 1 hours 10 minutes 9 seconds Current Time 12 08 07 01 10 47 Diagnostic Results Flash PROM Good Serial Interface Good RPSA Good Temperature 25 C 3 3V Power 3 2 V 5V Power 4 9 V 12V Power 0 0 v Fan Status Good Fanl Speed 3924 RPM Fan2 Speed 3994 RPM RPSB Not Present Temperature 25 C 3 3V Power 0 v 5V Power 0 v 12V Power 0 0 v Fan Status Not Present Fanl Speed Off Fan2 Speed Off Hit any key to continue P Figure 55 Chassis Information Menu The information in the Chassis Information Menu is defined in Table 17 Table 17 Chassis Information Menu Row Description Serial This field displays the serial number and hardware Number revision level of the chassis MAC This field displays the MAC address of the backplane in Address the chassis This is the MAC address that the management card uses when it communicates with your network through the 10 100Base TX port Converteon This field displays the chassis model name and revision Chassis level such as AT CV5000 Revision 1 7 149 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 M
85. is off and the LEDs are on Converteon Management Software User s Guide Restoring the Default Settings Menus The procedures in this section are used to restore the default settings on the AT CM Line Cards The default settings for the line cards can be found in Chapter A Default Settings for the Management Card and the Line Cards on page 337 A Caution If the card s current operating mode is not the default mode the card will reset possibly resulting in the loss of some network traffic The line card will immediately resume forwarding traffic but it will be unresponsive to management commands for one minute while it initializes its management software These procedures are not supported on the AT CM70S Line Card or the AT CV Line Cards To restore the default parameter settings on a line card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 2 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the AT CM Line Card you want to return to the default settings You can configure only one line card at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 63 on page 169 is displayed 3 Select Line Card Configuration to display the Line Card Configuration Menu in Figure 72 on page 183 191 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 192 4 To view the default settings of the line card prior
86. its management software and configures its parameters according to the settings in the downloaded configuration file To resume managing the card you have to start a new management session After you ve made a selection a confirmation prompt is displayed 4 Enter Y to proceed with the upload or download or N to cancel the procedure 333 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files Transferring the Master Configuration File with the Web Browser Windows System TFTP Server IP Address Configuration File Name TFTP Server IP Address Configuration File Name SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c Configuration File Upload Configuration File Download To upload or download the master configuration file with the web browser windows Note You cannot use the web browser windows to transfer the SNMPv3 configuration file You have to use the menus 1 Click the Configuration button in the menus bar 2 Click the Files tab shown in Figure 144 Configuration SNMPv3 All CM Line Cards Files Figure 144 Files Tab 3 To upload the master configuration file from the management card to a TFTP server a In the Configuration File Upload section select the TFTP Server IP Address field and enter the IP address of the TFTP server on your network b Select the Configuration File Name field and enter a filename for the configuration file The file will be given this name on the TFTP server The ext
87. its master configuration file in DRAM the next time it polls the line card which it does every few seconds 4 The next time you issue a save command the management card copies the master configuration file from DRAM to flash memory Note Unless stated otherwise all future references to the master configuration file in this guide refer to the permanent file in flash memory on the management card As just explained the parameter settings of the AT CM Line Cards are stored in two locations the configuration files on the line cards themselves and the master configuration file on the management card The purpose of this redundancy is to make it easier for you to replace the line cards In the event you need to replace a line card you can assign the new card the same configuration as its predecessor by restoring to the new card the previous configuration from the master configuration file on the management card This relieves you from having to manually configure new line cards With the AT CM3 Line Cards you can restore previous configurations either automatically or manually The former is referred to as auto copy 33 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card 34 This is set on a per slot basis A line card in a slot where auto copy is enabled always obtains its parameter settings from the master configuration file on the management card Thus a replacement AT CM3 Line Card is automatically assigned the same settings as its pre
88. link with a network device When a link is reestablished on a port the MissingLink mode automatically reactivates the transmitter on the other port so that the two network devices can again forward traffic to each other through the two ports of the media converter line card 49 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 50 The value to this type of fault notification is that some network devices such as managed Fast Ethernet switches can respond to the loss of a link by performing a specific action For example the network device might send a trap to a network management station and so alert the network administrator of the problem Or if the device is running a spanning tree protocol it might seek a redundant path to a disconnected node Here is an example of how the MissingLink mode works Assume that two Fast Ethernet switches one local and one remote are connected to the two ports on a media converter line card Switch A the remote switch is connected to port A on the line card while Switch B the local device is connected to port B If the link to Switch A cannot be established or is lost the line card disables the transmitter on port B to signal Switch B of the lack of the link to Switch A This notifies Switch B of the problem so it too along with Switch A can take remedial action such as activating a redundant path if it is running a spanning tree protocol or sending an SNMP trap to a management workstat
89. log For more information refer to Viewing the Event Log on page 122 Syslog Client The activity monitor displays the same event messages stored in the event log but in real time When you open the activity monitor you can watch the event messages as they occur For more information refer to Viewing the Activity Monitor on page 130 The management card has a syslog client for sending the event messages to a syslog server on your network For instructions refer to Configuring the Syslog Client on page 131 Network Time Protocol Client 24 The management card has a Network Time Protocol NTP client for setting its date and time from an NTP server on your network or the Internet The card adds the date and time to the event messages stored in the event log and to the SNMP traps sent to SNMP trap receivers Although the date and time can be set manually the NTP client is the recommended method for setting this information because the card cannot maintain the date and time when it is reset or when the chassis is powered off For instructions refer to Configuring the Network Time Protocol Client on page 117 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Manager and Operator Accounts The management software has two accounts There is a manager account for viewing and configuring the parameter settings and an operator account for just viewing the settings The manager account has the username manager and the d
90. mode on a remote line card review the following information o The AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards must be set to the OAM Visible mode to support remote peer management The other operating modes do not support remote peer management The AT CM3 Line Cards have three operating modes that support remote peer management Link Test with OAM MissingLink with OAM and Smart MissingLink with OAM A Caution A line card will reset when its operating mode is changed This may result in the loss of some network traffic When reset the AT CM Line Cards immediately resume forwarding network traffic using the default values for their parameter settings while they initialize the management software a process that takes approximately one minute Afterwards the cards use the settings in their configuration files to configure the operating parameters 231 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management 232 Restoring the Default Parameter Settings To configure the operating mode of a line card from the web browser windows 1 Select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar to display the Remote Module Status amp Configuration tab 2 Click the model name of the line card you want to configure 3 Click the Setting tab 4 Click the Edit button in the Operation Mode section of the window 5 From the pop up window select the new operating mode for the line card from the pu
91. of the OAM visible mode To correct the problem perform the procedure Setting the Operating Mode on page 176 and select the OAM visible mode from the Operating Mode Config Menu If you select Enable Remote Loopback and after several seconds it remains deselected it probably means that support for the loopback test is disabled on the remote line card To begin the test select Start Loopback Test from the OAM Loopback Test Menu The test starts immediately 8 10 11 Converteon Management Software User s Guide To view test statistics select Show Loopback Test Statistics The Show Loopback Test Statistics window is shown in Figure 109 ud Show Loopback Test Statistics E Module 5 Port 1 Number of Seconds 71 Number of Tx Frames 71 Number of Rx Frames 71 Number of Rx Errored Frames 0 Number of Tx Bytes 4260 Number of Rx Bytes 4260 Number of Rx Errored Bytes 0 Number of Tx Bits 34080 Number of Rx Bits 34080 Number of Rx Errored Bits 0 Rerun to OAM Loopback Test E Figure 109 Show Loopback Test Statistics Window The first line displays the duration of the test in seconds The counters display the number of test packets the local OAM client has transmitted to its remote counterpart over the fiber optic connection and the number of packets the local client has received back The measurements are given in frames bytes octets and bits The local client should receive the same number of test fram
92. process its status changes from Resetting to On 201 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Web Browser Toreset all of the media converter line cards in the chassis from the web browser windows 1 Select Diagnostics from the menu bar 2 If the Chassis tab isn t selected select it 3 Select the Reset Chassis tab shown in Figure 84 Chassis Local CM Line Card Remote CM Line Card sis Reset Information Chassis Reset Chassis and Restart All CV amp CM Line Cards eet Figure 84 General tab 4 Inthe Reset Chassis and Line Cards section of the window select Yes from the pull down menu and click Apply 5 To monitor the states of the line cards select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar and the Menu View tab A card has completed the reset process when the value in the CardTypeVer field changes from Resetting to the model name 202 Displaying Port Statistics Converteon Management Software User s Guide Menus To display the traffic statistics for the ports on the AT CM Line Cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration The Module Status and Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 58 on page 158 2 Select the AT CM Line Card whose statistics you want to view An example of the Module Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 63 on page 169 3 Select a port You can select only o
93. questions to our technical support staff from the Knowledge Base and review answers to previously asked questions For Technical Support via email or telephone refer to the Allied Telesis web site at www alliedtelesis com Select your country from the list on the web site and then select the appropriate tab Products for return or repair must have Return Materials Authorization RMA numbers A product sent to Allied Telesis without an RMA number will be returned to the sender at the sender s expense To obtain an RMA number contact the Allied Telesis Technical Support group at www alliedtelesis com support rma as px You can contact Allied Telesis for sales or corporate information at our web site at www alliedtelesis com The Converteon products listed here have a Lifetime Warranty Two Years Fan and PSU AT CM Media Converter Line Cards AT CV Media Converter Line Cards AT CV1000 One slot Chassis AT CV1200 Two slot Chassis AT CV1203 Two slot Chassis u uuu iau These Converteon products have a Five Year Warranty o AT CV5MO1 Management Card 0 AT CV5MO2 Management Card This Converteon product has a Lifetime Warranty Five Years Fan and PSU CO AT CV5000 Eighteen slot Chassis Management Software Updates Converteon Management Software User s Guide Go to www alliedtelesis com warranty for the terms and conditions of the warranty and for warranty registration New releases of the management software for o
94. remote AT CM Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 Select Diagnostics from the menu bar 2 Select the Remote CM Line Card tab 3 Ifitis not already selected select the Image Version tab An example of the tab is shown in Figure 96 Chassis Local CM Line Card Version amp Serial pedi ll infertaation Local Module Remote Module 1 Not Inserted 2 AT CV5MO02 Mo Support 3 AT CM302 AT CM302 4 AT CM302 AT CM302 5 AT CM302 AT CM302 6 AT CM302 AT CM302 Remote CM Line Card Application Version Bootloader Version Mo Support No Support v4 0 0 v4 0 0 v4 0 0 v4 0 0 v4 0 0 v4 0 0 v4 0 0 v4 0 0 236 Figure 96 Remote Image Version Page Converteon Management Software User s Guide The columns in this window which is for viewing purposes only are described in Table 28 Table 28 Remote Image Version Window Row Description Local This column displays the slot numbers and the model Module names of the local AT CM Line Cards in the chassis that has the management card Remote This column displays the model names of the remote Module AT CM Line Cards Application This column displays the version numbers of the Version management software on the remote AT CM Line Cards Bootloader This column displays the version numbers of the Version bootloader files on the remote AT CM Line Cards 237 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management
95. remote peer management feature This feature which is explained in Remote Peer Management on page 56 lets you manage remote line cards through their local AT CM Line Card counterparts When the management card polls a local line card for its parameter settings it checks to see if the local line card has a remote peer connection to a remote line card If there is a remote peer connection the management card also polls the remote line card for its configuration as well and stores the configuration in its master configuration file This makes it possible for you to restore the configurations to the remote line cards just as you can to the local line cards For instance if you install a new line card in a remote chassis you can download the last saved configuration to the line card from the management card to give the new card the same configuration as the previous card in the remote chassis 35 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card 36 Active and Standby Management Cards Here are two items of importance to restoring configurations to remote AT CM Line Cards O There is no auto copy for remote line cards To restore a previous configuration to a remote line card you have to do it manually The instructions can be found in Restoring the Last Saved Configuration on page 226 C You have to configure a remote line card for remote peer management before you can remotely restore a previous configuration For instructions refer
96. selected select it Converteon Management Software User s Guide Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Line Card Configuration Port amp Port B Setting copy Current Saved Default Auto copy Configuration ae aS Configuration Slot Number 4 Module AT CM302 Auto copy Auto copy Line Card Configuration Yes Figure 74 Auto copy Tab 5 Click the Edit button 6 In the pop up window select the new setting for the auto copy feature Selecting Yes enables auto copy on the slot and No disables the feature 7 Click the Update button 8 To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Current Configuration tab and click Save Current Configuration 185 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Setting the Low Power Mode on the AT CM3 Line Cards Menus 186 The AT CM301 AT CM302 and AT CM3KOS Line Cards have a low power mode that lets you conserve power by turning off their LEDs when you are not using them to monitor the cards The mode which can also be set with the recessed ECO Friendly button on the front panels of the line cards does not affect the network operations of the cards or control the RDY LED The procedures in this section explain on to set the mode on the line cards individually If you want to set the mode on all the line cards in the chassis go to Setting the Low Power Mode on all the AT
97. the AT CM Line Cards sse mene nennen nenne 166 MenUS viv EE 166 lacri f P 167 Configuring the Port Parameters on the AT CM Line Cards sssssee eene eene nennen nnnm nennen 169 Men s etie edo eod eiue ee dios ipae tette nda eite iet ee ees euet ife ts 169 Web BrowSer E 174 Setting the Operating MOde irit epit sxe etn ERE ERU E at apap ela Eins Eau suechesdessbuedeevescmesawiesdslocivhgbessesatneves 176 M nUS 5 eire t re oae RO ee itp eoe E idee dert lees ecd a oet doa ted ise eee ete peer re dez Pe Feeder dedi ces 176 Web BroWSet unm een mA 179 Contents Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management 217 Configuring the Remote Line Cards with the Menus sssseseeeeeneeene enne nnnm nennen eene en nene nene 218 Displaying the Status of the Remote Line Cards sss ene eene enne rn ennemis 218 Naming Remote Line Gard 1 eere aret tiene eir epe thee erp Eterno net eere Tang iden 223 Displaying the Parameter Settings of a Remote Line Card eene 223 Configuririg Rermiote Ports re reme SO Re HEC PED iir 223 Configuring the Low Power Mode on the AT CM3 Line Cards esssseeeene nennen eene errem 224 Configuring the OAM Clients ceeeeeeeee eene nennen nnne entr thn erret rnnt tenes entren dte tenete irren
98. the LEDs are off If the setting is off the default setting the low power mode is off and the LEDs are on d Line Card Low Power Mode Information UN Module LPM 1 AT CV5M02 2 Regll AT CM301 ON 3 Reg20 AT CM301 ON 4 Reg20 AT CM301 ON II Reg20 AT CM301 ON E Figure 78 Line Card Low Power Mode Information To save your changes in the master configuration file on the management card return to the All CM Line Card Configurations Menu and select Save All CM Line Card Configurations To set the local power mode on all of the AT CM3 Line Cards from the web browser windows Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 Select the All CM Line Cards tab Configuration SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c SNMPv3 All CM Line Cards Files Figure 79 All CM Line Card Tab 189 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 190 3 Click the Edit button in the Low Power Mode section of the window 4 To activate the low power mode on all the AT CM3 Line Cards and to turn off the LEDs select Set All CM Line Cards to Low Power Mode in the pop up window To disable the mode and turn on the LEDs select Return All CM Line Cards to Normal Mode 5 To view the current low power mode settings on the line cards click the Display LPM for all line cards button If the LPM setting for a line card is ON than the low power mode is active and the LEDs are off If the setting is off the default setting the low power mode
99. the original link loss In contrast the Smart MissingLink mode would respond by pulsing the transmitter on the twisted pair port and flashing the port s Link LED about once a second to signal that the failure originated on the fiber optic port The behavior of the operating mode is the same regardless of which port does not have a link In the previous example the loss was on the fiber optic port But if the loss happened on the twisted pair port the mode pulses the transmitter and the Link LED for the fiber optic port As with the other operating modes this mode does not interfere with the flow of network traffic through the ports of a line card during normal network operations of a media converter line card However Allied Telesis recommends limiting its use to diagnosing link failures particularly if the network devices connected to the ports are managed devices The pulsing Smart MissingLink and OAM Visible OAM OAM Visible Mode OAM Bypass Mode Converteon Management Software User s Guide of the transmitter on a port and the constantly changing state of a link could prove problematic for some managed devices For example the device might send a constant stream of SNMP traps or if the device is running a spanning tree protocol the protocol might become confused as the status of the device s link to the media converter constantly changes This mode is supported on the AT CM3 Line Cards It is not supported on the AT CM2
100. the ports are at their default values As you configure the ports it automatically changes to Customized in EEPROM If at a later time you want to discard all of your changes and return the ports to the default values type a lowercase and respond to the confirmation prompt The second selection b LIU Mode toggles the line card between T1 or E1 support as explained in step 4 The main part of the menu is a table that displays the current settings of the T1 E1 ports channels To change a setting of a port refer to step 5 4 To toggle the line card between T1 or E1 support Note Changing the T1 E1 mode of the line card returns the port settings to the default values Any changes to the port settings are discarded a Type b lowercase to select LIU Mode and press Return Converteon Management Software User s Guide b Atthe confirmation prompt type Y and press Return to implement the change or N and Return to cancel it 5 To configure the settings of a T1 E1 port enter the number of the setting you want to change followed by the port channel number separated by a space For example to change the remote loopback setting for port 2 you enter 52 Table 30 on page 248 lists the possible settings 6 When you finish managing the line card simply disconnect the management cable from the Console port There is no logout command The card automatically updates its configuration file in flash memory with your c
101. to Configuring the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM708 Line Cards for the OAM based Features on page 90 When there are two management cards in the AT CV5000 Chassis the active card automatically copies its master configuration file over the backplane to the standby card in response to specific events In this manner the active and standby cards always have the same master configuration file Thus if the active card is removed from the chassis or fails the standby card after completing the transition to the active state will operate with the same master configuration file Here are the events that cause an active management card to copy its master configuration file to a standby card C When you issue one of the save commands the active card updates its master configuration file in flash memory and then transmits the changes to the standby card O When the AT CV5000 Chassis is powered on the two management cards initialize their AT S99 Management Software programs and afterwards share their slot numbers to ascertain which is the active card The card in the lowered numbered slot than transitions to the active state and automatically transmits its master configuration file to the standby card O If you install a second management card in an operating chassis the active management card waits for the new card to initialize its management software and enter the standby state Afterwards it transmits its master configuration file to the new c
102. to variable retrieval requests 69 Chapter 3 OAM based Features 70 Chapter 4 starting a Management Session This chapter has the following sections Starting a Local Management Session on page 72 Starting a Telnet Management Session on page 75 Starting a Web Browser Management Session on page 76 Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 What to Configure First on the AT CV5M02 Management Card on page 85 0 Configuring the AT CM2 AT CMS3 and AT CM70S Line Cards for the OAM based Features on page 90 u uuu 0 71 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session Starting a Local Management Session 72 This procedure explains how to start a local out of band management session using the RS 232 Console port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card The management card does not need an IP address for local management Your initial management session has to be a local session The Console port on the management card requires a DEC VT100 or ANSI terminal or an equivalent terminal emulator program capable of displaying up to 125 characters per line To start a local management session 1 Connect one end of the management cable included with the management card to the Console port on the management card as shown in Figure 11 If the chassis has two AT CV5M02 Management Cards start the session on the active management card identified by its green RDY LED Figure 11 Connecting the
103. to activating them select Display Default Configuration An example of the window is shown in Figure 80 7 Slot 11 Module Operational Mode OAM Visible Display Default Configuration Port Enable Negotiation Duplex Speed MDI MDIX Flow Control Ingress Rate Limit Egress Rate Limit OAM Configuration Admin State Mode Maximum OAMPDU Size AT CM302 Port A 100BaseFX Enabled Enable No Limit No Limit Enabled Passive 1518 Unidirectional Support Yes Loopback Support Event Support Yes NO Port B 100Base TX Enabled Auto negotiate Enable No Limit No Limit ES variable Retrieval Support Yes ee to Line Card Configuration 2 5 6 Figure 80 Display Default Configuration Window To return the parameter settings on the line card to the default values select Return Line Card to Default Configuration from the Line Card Configuration Menu At the confirmation prompt select Yes to return the parameter settings on the line card to the default values or No to cancel the procedure If you select Yes the parameter settings on the card are returned to the default settings The line card will reset if its current operating mode is different from the default setting During this process this message is displayed on the screen Setting operation mode and resetting line card To save your changes in the master configuration file wait for the card to initialize its ma
104. to consider when choosing the UART setting for this card O Setting the UART setting requires the AT CV5M02 Management Card You cannot set the UART setting from the Console port on the AT CM708S Line Card O When the line card is set to the UART local console mode you have to use the Console port and you can only adjust the T1 E1 settings You cannot use the management card to change any of the settings on the card O When the card is set to the UART backplane mode you can use the management card to change all of the card s settings including the T1 E1 settings O To download new management software to the line card the card must be set to the UART backplane mode The AT CM70S Line Card must be used in pairs with the fiber optic port on the SFP module in one line card connected to an identical SFP module in another AT CM70S Line Card However the local and remote cards do not have to use the same UART settings In fact they re likely to have different settings because one of the cards will probably reside in the AT CV5000 Chassis with a management card and the other at a remote site in a chassis that does not have a management card Converteon Management Software User s Guide Figure 98 illustrates the idea of the UART setting It shows a deployment of two AT CM70S Line Cards and their UART settings The UART setting of the line card in the AT CV5000 Chassis is set to UART backplane mode so that the T1 E1 ports on the card ca
105. uu uauluu 8 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Module Configuration Menu and select Line Card Configuration and Save Line Card Configuration 248 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the Console Port on the Line Card This procedure explains how to configure the settings on the T1 E1 ports on the AT CM70S Line Card from the card s Console port This is the appropriate procedure for configuring the ports when the card s UART setting is set to UART local console mode and the chassis containing the line card does not have a management card A Caution There are no security features like a logon username or a password on the Console port on the AT CM70S Line Card Anyone with physical access to the location of the card can alter the configuration settings of the T1 E1 ports To prevent unauthorized changes to its operating parameters install the card and its chassis in a secure location such as a locked wiring closet Note The parameter settings of the SFP slot and the 10 100 1000Base T port on the line card cannot be set through the Console port To configure the T1 E1 ports from the Console port on the AT CM70S Line Card 1 Configure the settings on your terminal or terminal emulator program as follows o Bits per second 115200 o Data bits 8 o Parity None O Stop bits 1 Oo Flow control None 0 Echo typed characters locally E
106. value for the parameter After entering a value press Return Unless stated otherwise all changes are immediately implement by the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Line Cards 74 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Starting a Telnet Management Session Note The requirements for remote Telnet management are described in Accessing Your Network on page 31 The large windows in the management software require a Telnet client that can support up to 125 characters per line To start a remote Telnet management session on the AT CV5M02 Management Card 1 Specify the IP address of the management card in the Telnet client at your workstation If the chassis has two management cards enter the IP address of the active card When prompted enter the username and password of the manager or operator account of the management card The manager account has the username manager and the default password friend The operator account has the username operator and the default password operator Usernames and passwords are case sensitive After you log on the Main Menu in Figure 12 on page 73 is displayed For instructions on how to use the menus refer to Table 10 on page 74 A Telnet management session gives you the same management capability as a local management session You can perform all of the same management functions and configure all of the same line card parameters 3 To end a m
107. you set the operating mode through the software the DIP switches on the card remain deactivated even if you move the card to a different slot or a different chassis To reactivate the switches you have to install the card in a chassis that has the management card and select Line Card DIP Switch Mode from the Operating Mode Configuration Menu The following prompt is displayed Warning Changing the Operation Mode will reset the line card Change Operation Mode now Yes or No Type Y to continue or N to cancel the procedure This prompt is displayed If auto copy is enable operation mode change need to be saved to take affect Save line card configuration before rebooting Yes or No Type Y for yes to update the master configuration file on the management card with the new setting for the card s operating mode This step is especially important if the auto copy feature is activated on the card s slot If the card s operating mode isn t saved in the master configuration file the new setting will not take affect because the card after resetting will simply revert to its previous operating mode If you are not sure whether or not the auto copy feature is enabled on the slot select Yes anyway There is little likelinood you would ever respond with No to this prompt This step isn t applicable to the AT CM708 Line Card because it doesn t support the auto copy feature At this point the line card resets Before
108. 0 06 Chassis Dianostics Flash PROM Good Serial Interface Good RPSA Good Temperature 26C 3 3V Power 3 2 V 5V Power 4 9v 12V Power 0 0 V Fan Status Not Present Fan 1 Speed Off Fan2 Speed Off RPSB Not Present Temperature ul ces 3 3V Power ov 5V Power ov 12V Power ov Fan Status Not Present Fan 1 Speed Off Fan2 Speed Off Figure 56 Chassis Diagnostics Tab 151 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Pinging Network Devices 152 Menus Web Browser The procedure in this section is used to test for live connections between the 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5MO2 Management Card and other network devices The management card transmits Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo requests from the 10 100Base TX port and reports the results of the ping on the screen You might perform this procedure if the management card is experiencing a problem communicating with another network device such as a syslog server or a TFTP server The system requirements for this test are described in Accessing Your Network on page 31 To ping a network device from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration to display the menu in Figure 37 on page 122 2 Select Ping a Remote System The following message is displayed Please enter Station IP Address to ping 3 Enter the IP address of the network device you want the management card to ping The management card sends three ping echo requests and displa
109. 00 AT SPLX10 A A03236R075100037 07122301 Digital Diagnostics Monitoring Information 55 2500 100 0000 40 0000 95 0000 30 0000 3 2024 3 4650 3 1350 3 4000 3 2000 31 7600 80 9280 10 4640 70 9280 20 4640 0 2388 0 4784 0 1202 0 3800 0 1513 0 0000 1 0000 0 0079 0 7943 0 0126 Figure 89 SFP Information Window 214 Web Browser Converteon Management Software User s Guide To view SFP information from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Diagnostics from the menu bar Select the Local CM Line Card tab Select the SFP Information tab Select the Slot Number field and enter the slot number of the line card with the SFP module You can specify only one slot number Click Apply to display the window in Figure 90 on page 216 215 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards SFP Information Serial ID Information Vender name OUI Vendor IEEE company ID Vendor part number Vendor revision number Vendor serial number Vendor date code ATI Model Temperature Celcius Real Time Alarm Range High Low Warning Range High Low Supply Voltage V Real Time Alarm Range High Low Warning Range High Low Tx Bias Current m Real Time Alarm Range High Low Warning Range High Low Tx Optical Power mW Real Time Alarm Range High Low Warning Range High Low Rx Received Power mw Real Time Alarm Rang
110. 000 Chassis Note You should always remember to select Quit from the Main Menu when you are finished managing the chassis with the manager account If you close your terminal emulator program without logging out the management session remains active and the management card rejects any further attempts to log on until the console timer has timed out 73 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session The instructions in Table 10 explain how to move through the menus and select menu options Table 10 Menu Selection Options When directed to You must Select an option Highlight the option by pressing the Up 7 or Down 4 arrow key and then pressing Return or Type the first character of the option at the prompt and press Return If two or more options have matching initial characters type the initial characters until the option you want is highlighted and press Return Enter information for Type the information and press Return example the IP address of a management card Return to the previous Press Esc or select the Return to option screen at the bottom of the menu Activated options are preceded with the symbol in a menu In the following example the first option is activated Enable this port Disable this port When you select a field that accepts a value the gt symbol is displayed For example System name gt When you see the gt symbol enter a new
111. 0240 ON N Vv400 i00 Y 0 pot PE HOO OON B Y Diagnostics p 5 Area2a AT CM302 OAM LT oo 10240 ON N Vv400 i00Y 0 pasos s 100 Sr 1G Y 3 z 6 Area2b AT CM302 200 UST oo 10240 ON N V400__ 100Y 0 got Hg Y B M Configuration 7 alzi AT CM3K0S OAM LT oo 10240 ON N Vv4o00 1G Y 0 sb fi peer Ae Hn w 8 Regi2 AT CM202 V2 OAM V oo N v400 100Y 0 o ooo 100 Y 0 0 x Management Card Redundancy 9 AT CM202 v2 OAM v oo N v400__ 100Y O0 oo 3007y D 0 Y 10 AT CM202 V2 OAM vy oo N v400__ 100 Y O0 co HOD yY 0 w Log Out HH AT CV102 gt ER C pam gt 100 iz AT CV102 ITY 100 100 13 AT CV102 s IST 100 100 14 AT CV102 ek ET 100 100 K 8M Y 15 AT CV102 wr ur c pem i100 Pi 16 AT CV102 SET 100 100 m UnEquipped 18 UnEquipped 19 LED 20 RPSA W 21 RPSB o Figure 60 Menu View 165 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Displaying the Parameter Settings of the AT CM Line Cards 166 Menus To view the current parameter settings of the AT CM Line Cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the AT CM Line Card you want to view You can view only one line card at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 63 on page 169 is displayed Select Line Card Config
112. 1651 1651 1652 through 1661 1661 1662 through 1670 1670 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1671 through 1680 1680 1681 through 1690 1690 1691 through 1700 1700 1701 through 1710 1710 1711 through 1721 1721 1722 through 1731 1731 1732 through 1742 1742 1743 through 1752 1752 1753 through 1763 1763 1764 through 1774 1774 1775 through 1785 1785 1786 through 1796 1796 1797 through 1808 1808 1809 through 1819 1819 1820 through 1831 1831 1832 through 1843 1843 1844 through 1855 1855 1856 through 1867 1867 1868 through 1879 1879 1880 through 1892 1892 1893 through 1904 1904 1905 through 1917 1917 1918 through 1930 1930 1931 through 1943 1943 1944 through 1956 1956 1957 through 1970 1970 1971 through 1984 1984 1985 through 1998 1998 363 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 364 Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1999 through 2012 2012 2013 through 2026 2026 2027 through 2040 2040 2041 through 2055 2055 2056 through 2070 2070 2071 through 2085 2085 2086 through 2100 2100 2101 through 2116 2116 2117 through 2132 2132 2133 through 2148 2148
113. 2 Management Card Redundancy Menu ssssssssseeeeee enne nennen nennen inneren ennt nennen nnne 83 Management Card Redundancy Tab sssssssssssseeeee enne enne ensem nnne nennen tenere en 84 Module Status and Configuration Menu ssssessssseeeeeeeen eene enne ennemis nennen anA nenna eannan nna 91 Viewing the OAM Client Status conterere tee uence set ieee dei Bede dde ene aane eine dece e dob Naa dece 97 Configuration MON c 100 System Configuration Men sssini iiin iieiea dnte reet eea Se dene ded ie ee bae dete Ide dde venerem dudes 100 System Parameters Configuration Menu eee nennen nennen entere enne nes 101 IP Parameters M nuU erento t Ere t eee a Foo p dece eine e eder ee deese dope 101 Syst m WA p 103 SNMPv1 amp SNMPV26 Tab nee ER dette ee cedere a ded canibus Hee de edi A d Deed ooce d dudes 107 Omega Options Ment 3er tne eres P DDR Eie ate 111 Web Server Configuration Menu eiiis eeisec tete ette nennen ntn it nnne EEE ket d ea tinm dd stade rd nnns 114 System Clock Mer eme ee uhr RERCEPREN RENE scones RUE TETT 115 Module Configuration Menu Management Card enne enne nennen 120 General Tab acts n eue detenta 121 Administration MOMs 2 50 3 2 ceo tec obs M ides tei fot Ecke ce De desta roue ur oe Pede tL Pe doge Cede Iu exe eee irse a aai 122 Ev nt Eog Menu vorir
114. 2 3u Auto Negotiation Half or full duplex mode Auto MDI MDI X RJ 45 connector Back pressure in half duplex mode IEEE 802 3x flow control in full duplex mode Link Test MissingLink Smart MissingLink OAM Visible OAM Bypass Operations Administration and Maintenance OAM QO au 0 Loopback test Remote Converteon line card management Remote management software downloads Dying gasp Variable requests Other Features 1 Requires the AT CV5M02 Management Card u uuu n Q m Standard Ethernet frames up to 1522 bytes Ingress and egress packet rate limiting LEDs for unit and port status Cyclical redundancy check Suitable for managed and unmanaged network environments Management available with the AT CV5M02 Management Card AT S73 Management Software 2 Require one AT CV5M02 Management Card in the upstream AT CV5000 Chassis 3 The maximum frame size of the AT CM2K0S Line Card is 1632 bytes 41 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards Table 3 lists the AT CM3 Line Cards Table 3 AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards Model Type Port Slot Connector Cable Maximum Distance AT CM301 Fast Ethernet 100Base FX fiber Duplex ST 50 125 or 2 kilometers 1 24 optic 62 5 125 micron miles multi mode 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet AT CM302 Fast Eth
115. 237 Remote Line Card Module Information Window essseseeeneene nenne enne nnne 239 THET Port Settihgs 5 nete rere egt etse stages eta Sei ee desta tees cede spe Fede zug Pace tute Ced dg rt e suec nee puse iiin 248 OAM Client Parameters 1i pide rete te edu E best fedi cese sauces Doec bee e ded deditus i ae naai 255 Show Local OAM Information WindOW sseseneenee enm nennen nennen entren eren nene enne nnns 265 SNMPv3 User Table Parameters eese esee nter dinner diera d na innen ANE spe deeds 291 SNMPv3 View Table Parameters ssesssssseeeeeeeeneeen nennen nennen ennnrn retener EEES nennen nene enne nnns 294 SNMPv3 Access Table Parameters seen een nennen nrnen nenne erre n terree nene enne nnns 297 SNMPv3 Group Table Parameters sse een nee nenee nennen asenda ianea neret nene nnne 301 SNMPv3 Notify Table Parameters sssssssssesseeeeeenee nennen nene nne nennen mener nnne nennen nene enne nnns 304 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Parameters sse enne errem nene enne nnns 307 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Parameters ssssssssseeeeen enne enne eren nene enne 311 TFTP Image Download Configuration Menu seen ene eene nemen nere enne en nnne nne 318 Image Download via TATP MENU 1cenc reote ierra tri nre ltd nba eines de Rene Rad inten a denne diede en 322 Image Download via XMODEM Menu
116. 4 The menu lists those remote line cards with remote peer connections to their local line card counterparts To manage a remote AT CM Line Card you select it from the menu This redirects the session to the remote line card For more information on this menu refer to Configuring the Remote Line Cards with the Menus on page 218 57 Chapter 3 OAM based Features Remote line card and port information 2 Regllr AT CM3K0S 3 Reg20_r AT CM301 4 Reg21_r AT CM301 5 Area2a r AT CM301 Remote Module Status and Configuration Converteon REMOTE MODULE FIBER PORT COPPER PORT VER OperMode FrmSz LPM Slot CPM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL v400 OAM LT 10240 ON 1 Y 1G 0 0 00 1G Y 0 0 v400 OAM LT 10240 ON 1 Y 100v O 0 oo 100 v 0 0 v400 OAM LT 10240 ON 1 Y 100 y O 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 v400 OAM_LT 10240 ON 1 Y 100 0 0 oo 100 v 0 0 Figure 4 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu The corresponding window in the web browser windows has the same name as its menus peer and is used in much the same manner To redirect the session to a remote line card you select its local counterpart in the window For more information on this window refer to Configuring the Remote AT CM Line Cards with the Web Browser Windows on page 228 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Remote line card and port information Me
117. 5 SNMPv3 Manager Configuration aan ae e E Ere aaa aae Aaea E aeaaea Ea R Eaa annae a ee aa a aaa A EE nennen entren nns 346 SNMPv3 Operator Configuration seoaren inaina eienn iEn an nnne e A et ET emt a nean naa ern anra ne Eiaa a ELE dra nes dora inns 348 SNMPv3 Worksheet nece ETEDRERPAEEAA ERU EA ny usdeuscdeas AREER RO DU ER TED tera 349 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card sse 351 PI e 371 Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Updating the Master Configuration File on a Standby Card enne 37 MissingLink and OAM Operating Mode essen enne nennen entren nre enne errem Remote Peer Management Example 1 1st iesu ie aaien ternera denne sn tnra deme edes Remote Peer Management Example 2
118. 7 milliseconds The default value is 1500 milliseconds Retries The number of times the switch retrles or resends an Inform message When an Inform message is generated a response from the switch is required This parameter determines how many times the switch resends an Inform message The Retries parameter applies to Inform messages only The range is O to 255 retries The default is 3 retries 307 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Table 38 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Parameters Parameter Description Tag List The tag or list of tags defined by the Notify Tag parameter in the corresponding entry in the SNMPv3 Notify Table The tag list can be up to 256 alphanumeric characters Separate entries with a space for example hwengtag swengtag testengtag Target Parameters The corresponding Target Parameters name This value has to match the name of the corresponding entry in the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Row Status This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Target Address Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediat
119. 73 Management Software See also AT CM Line Cards default settings 340 displaying remote version numbers 235 displaying version numbers 207 downloading with TFTP 320 downloading with XMODEM 325 AT S99 Management Software See also AT CV5M02 Management Card default settings 338 described 23 downloading with TFTP 320 downloading with XMODEM 325 restoring to default settings 140 auto copy described 33 displaying status of 158 setting 183 Auto Negotiation AT CM Line Cards 158 169 218 228 AT CV5M02 Management Card 133 setting on line cards 169 setting on remote line cards 223 C configuration files See also master configuration files AT CM Line Cards 32 AT CV5MO02 Management Card 32 Console port default settings 72 339 described 23 setting baud rate of 146 console timeout 111 contact 106 Converteon chassis 38 D date and time setting 87 115 default settings AT CM2 Line Cards 340 AT CM3 Line Cards 342 AT CV5M02 Management Card 338 restoring line card to 191 restoring to remote line cards 225 232 digital diagnostic monitoring DDM viewing event messages 122 viewing threshold levels on SFP modules 213 disabling a port 169 dying gasp configuring AT CM Line Cards for 90 testing 95 372 E E1 ports See T1 E1 ports egress rate limiting displaying status of on line cards 158 displaying status of on remote line cards 218 228 setting on line cards 169 setting on remote line cards 223 enabling a port 169 eve
120. 75 1276 through 1281 1281 1282 through 1287 1287 1288 through 1292 1292 1293 through 1298 1298 1299 through 1304 1304 1305 through 1310 1310 1311 through 1316 1316 1317 through 1322 1322 1323 through 1328 1328 1329 through 1335 1335 1336 through 1341 1341 1342 through 1347 1347 1348 through 1354 1354 1355 through 1360 1360 1361 through 1367 1367 1368 through 1373 1373 1374 through 1380 1380 1381 through 1386 1386 1387 through 1393 1393 1394 through 1400 1400 1401 through 1407 1407 1408 through 1414 1414 1415 through 1421 1421 1422 through 1428 1428 1429 through 1435 1435 361 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 362 Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1436 through 1443 1443 1444 through 1450 1450 1451 through 1457 1457 1458 through 1465 1465 1466 through 1472 1472 1473 through 1480 1480 1481 through 1488 1488 1489 through 1495 1495 1496 through 1503 1503 1504 through 1511 1511 1512 through 1519 1519 1520 through 1527 1527 1528 through 1536 1536 1537 through 1544 1544 1545 through 1552 1552 1553 through 1561 1561 1562 through 1569 1569 1570 through 1578 1578 1579 through 1587 1587 1588 through 1596 1596 1597 through 1605 1605 1606 through 1614 1614 1615 through 1623 1623 1624 through 1632 1632 1633 through 1642 1642 1643 through
121. 8 Pinging Network Devices on page 152 Displaying the Inter process Communication Monitor on page 153 Displaying Information about the Management Card on page 155 99 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Assigning an IP Address Configuration This section explains how to assign an IP address subnet mask and default gateway to the management card A management card can have only one IP address configuration which can be assigned manually or by a DHCP server on your network For background information refer to IP Address Configuration on page 23 You have to use the menus from a local management session or a Telnet management session to change the IP address configuration The web browser windows allow you to view but not change this information Changing the IP address configuration of the management card from a Telnet client ends your management session To resume managing the card you have to start a new management session Menus To assign an IP address configuration to the card from the menus 100 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 26 Fo Configuration Menu System Configuration All Line Cards Configurations Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP ee to Main Menu Figure 26 Configuration Menu 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 2 System Con
122. AM based features configuring AT CM Line Cards for 90 described 55 settings 69 OAMPDUS setting maximum size of 256 operating modes described 48 displaying for line cards 158 displaying for remote line cards 218 228 methods of setting 54 selecting on line cards 176 selecting on remote line cards 224 231 operator account changing password 85 111 described 25 P passwords setting 85 111 pinging network devices performing 152 requirements for 31 ports configuring parameters 169 displaying statistics 203 R redundant management card See standby AT CV5M02 Management Card remote management software updates configuring AT CM Line Cards for 90 described 60 with TFTP 320 with XMODEM 325 remote peer management configuring AT CM Line Cards for 90 described 56 using menus 218 using web browser windows 228 resetting all AT CM and AT CV Line Cards 201 all AT CM Line Cards 199 AT CV5M02 Management Card 119 one AT CM3 Line Card 198 373 Index S serial numbers 210 238 SFP information 213 240 Smart MissingLink operating mode described 52 selecting on line cards 176 selecting on remote line cards 224 231 Smart MissingLink with OAM operating mode described 53 selecting on line cards 176 selecting on remote line cards 224 231 SNMP community strings configuring 86 108 default settings 338 SNMP management 27 described 27 requirements for 31 SNMP traps adding IP addresses of receivers 110 requirements for send
123. All CM Line Card Tab D E 189 Display Default Configuration Window 000 ee cceeeeeeeceeeeeenneeeceaeeceneeeeseeeseaaeeeeneeeeeaeeseeaesnneeeesiaeeeeenaeeenieeeenaa 192 Default Configuration Tab icc 2 112 cedri eterne tides keen ite piraadid adi esdan indegni 193 Last Saved Configuration Tab 2 cde eredi eere Ie db eite det CI exe dee de dde dee HE deve e iine co 197 Local CM Line Card Diagnostics Menu ssseseeeeeeen enne ener nnne a nennen nnne 199 Irc E Bend ee eed Ae ee end ie Ae ee 202 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window eessseeeennemm mener 208 Image Version Window rcieereriee cet rre detecte ee dne eee deed etn ede pe nece d cet nested a aee Edd dece dne eru 209 Line Gard Module Inforrmiation 3 ertet te Pret rtt Re LO PE Rent e ERE De errare ke tp 210 MAC Address amp Serial Number Window seessseseeeeeeen nennen enne nnne nne nennen nnne 212 SFP Information WIDdOW rrr ettet EEG RE ERE PARERE Sir ERE R ERRARE LU e deiei idei 214 SEP Information Tab iiie gere edo eter p are ge eo Ue Teo peat cedant d eiae ede e a dte d quoe deos 216 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu esses enne nennen 218 Remote Module Configuration Menu c ccccceeeeeeneceeeeeeceece eee ceeaaeaeeeeeeaaaaeeeececeeaeceeeesecaeceeeesecaeaeeeesesesaeeeeess 222 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Tab es
124. Browser This management function is not supported in the web browser windows Converteon Management Software User s Guide Displaying Information about the Management Card If you re interested in seeing information about the AT CV5M02 Management Card here are places to go to O For general operational information about the card and its 10 100Base TX port refer to Displaying the Status of the Line Cards on page 158 O For the version number of the AT S99 Management Software on the card refer to Displaying the Version Numbers of the Management Software on page 207 D For the card s MAC address refer to Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis on page 148 o For the card s serial number refer to Displaying the MAC Addresses and Serial Numbers on page 210 155 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 156 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards This chapter has the following sections QO n Q Q Displaying the Status of the Line Cards on page 158 Displaying the Parameter Settings of the AT CM Line Cards on page 166 Configuring the Port Parameters on the AT CM Line Cards on page 169 Setting the Operating Mode on page 176 Assigning Names to the AT CM Line Cards on page 181 Configuring the Maximum Frame Size on the AT CM2KO0S Line Card on page 182 Setting the Auto copy Feature on page 183 Setting the Low Power
125. CM3 Line Cards on page 188 The AT CM2 AT CM70S and AT CV Line Cards do not support the low power mode Note Activating or deactivating the low power mode does not affect the network operations of the AT CM3 Line Cards To set the low power mode on the AT CM3 Line Cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 2 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the AT CM3 Line Card you want to configure You can configure only one line card at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 63 on page 169 is displayed 3 Select Configure Low Power Mode to display the following prompt Low Power Mode Configuration Menu is Module 14 Configure Line Card to Low Power Mode ON gt Configure Line Card to Normal Mode OFF Nee Return to Line Card Confirmation E Figure 75 Low Power Mode Configuration Prompt Web Browser 4 5 Converteon Management Software User s Guide To activate the low power mode on the line card and turn off the LEDs select Configure Line Card to Low Power Mode On To disable the low power mode and turn on the LEDs select Configure Line Card to Normal Mode Off To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Module Configuration Menu and select Line Card Configuration and select Save Line Card Configuration To set the l
126. Card 358 Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 916 through 918 918 919 through 921 921 922 through 924 924 925 through 927 927 928 through 930 930 931 through 933 933 934 through 936 936 937 through 939 939 940 through 942 942 943 through 946 946 947 through 949 949 950 through 952 952 953 through 955 955 956 through 958 958 959 through 962 962 963 through 965 965 966 through 968 968 969 through 971 971 972 through 975 975 976 through 978 978 979 through 981 981 982 through 985 985 986 through 988 988 989 through 992 992 993 through 995 995 996 through 999 999 1000 through 1002 1002 1003 through 1006 1006 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1007 through 1009 1009 1010 through 1013 1013 1014 through 1016 1016 1017 through 1020 1020 1021 through 1024 1024 1025 through 1027 1027 1028 through 1031 1031 1032 through 1035 1035 1036 through 1038 1038 1039 through 1042 1042 1043 through 1046 1046 1047 through 1050 1050 1051 through 1054 1054 1055 through 1058 1058 1059 through 1062 1062 1063 through 1066 1066 1067 through 1070 1070 1071 through 1074 1074 1075 throug
127. Converteon Management Software AT S73 AT S99 and AT S102 User s Guide Converteon Family of Media Converter Products AT S73 Version 4 0 1 Management Software for the AT CM2XX and AT CM70S Media Converter Cards AT S99 Version 4 0 1 Management Software for the AT CV5M02 Management Card AT S102 Version 4 0 1 Management Software for the AT CM3XX Media Converter Cards Allied Telesis 613 001017 Rev B Copyright 2008 Allied Telesis Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced without prior written permission from Allied Telesis Inc Allied Telesis is a trademark of Allied Telesis Inc Microsoft and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other product names company names logos or other designations mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Allied Telesis Inc reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior written notice The information provided herein is subject to change without notice In no event shall Allied Telesis Inc be liable for any incidental special indirect or consequential damages whatsoever including but not limited to lost profits arising out of or related to this manual or the information contained herein even if Allied Telesis Inc has been advised of known or should have known the possibility of such damages Contents
128. Converteon Management Software User s Guide address and which portion represents the node address In a similar way the subtree mask further refines the subtree view and enables you to restrict a MIB view to a specific row of the OID MIB table You need a thorough understanding of the OID MIB table to define a subtree mask Each SNMPv3 table entry has its own storage type You can choose between nonvolatile storage which allows you to save the table entry or volatile storage which does not allow you to save an entry If you select the volatile storage type when you power off the switch your SNMPv3 configuration is lost and cannot be recovered At each SNMPv3 menu you are prompted to configure a storage type You do not have to configure the same storage type value for each table entry When you generate an SNMPv3 message from the switch there are three basic pieces of information included in the message Oo The type of message 0 The destination of the message O SNMP security information To configure the type of message you need to define if you are sending a Trap or Inform message Basically the switch expects a response to an Inform message and the switch does not expect a response to a Trap message These two message types are defined in the SNMPv3 RFC 2571 6 To determine the destination of the message you configure the IP address of the host This configuration is similar to the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c configuration The
129. EE 802 3ah standard The AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM70S Line Cards support five OAM based features on their fiber optic ports Some of the features are part of the IEEE 802 3ah standard while others are specific to this product The sections in this chapter describe the features and the appropriate line card settings The sections are o Remote Peer Management on page 56 o Remote Updates of the AT S73 or AT S102 Management Software on page 60 OAM Loopback Tests on page 61 Dying Gasp and First RPS Failure Signals on page 62 OAM Variable Requests on page 68 OAM Client Settings on page 69 u uuu 55 Chapter 3 OAM based Features Remote Peer Management 56 This feature lets you configure remote line cards through their local line card counterparts This saves you from having to travel to the remote sites to configure the cards or from having to install AT CV5M02 Management Cards in all the remote Converteon enclosures The remote management sessions which are conducted over the fiber optic cables that link the local and remote line cards do not interfere with the network operations of the line cards To manage a remote card you start a local or remote management session on the AT CV5M02 Management Card and then redirect the session to the remote card by selecting its local counterpart This feature is illustrated in Figure 2 on page 56 At a central location is the AT CV5000 Chassis with the AT CV5M02 Manage
130. From the Remote Module Status amp Configuration window select the Line Card Configuration tab 2 Select the Last Saved Configuration tab 3 To return the line card to its last saved configuration click the Restore to Last Saved Configuration button When you change a parameter setting on a remote line card the card automatically saves your change in its configuration file in flash memory which retains your changes even when the chassis is powered off or the card is removed from the enclosure The configuration settings of the remote line cards can also be saved in the master configuration file on the management card from where you can restore them to the remote cards should that ever be necessary To update the master configuration file on the management card click the Line Card Configuration tab the Current Configuration tab and the Save Current Configuration button To restore the setting to the line card or to a replacement card perform Restoring the Last Saved Configuration on page 233 233 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Resetting the Remote AT CM3 234 Line Cards This procedure is not supported on the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards Caution This procedure will disrupt the network operations of the line card Some network traffic may be lost To reset a remote AT CM3 Line Card from the web browser windows 1 Select Remote Module Status amp Confi
131. G070500120 B 11 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A03713G070500012 B 12 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A03713G070500087 B 13 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A03713G070500055 B 14 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A02765G070500146 D 15 Unequi pped 16 Unequi pped 17 Unequi pped 18 Unequi pped Me Hit any key to continue Figure 87 Line Card Module Information Converteon Management Software User s Guide The columns in the window which is for viewing purposes only are described in Table 25 Table 25 Line Card Module Information Window Row Description Module This column displays the slot numbers the names and the model names of the cards For instructions on how to assign a name to a line card refer to Assigning Names to the AT CM Line Cards on page 181 MAC This column displays the MAC addresses of the AT CM Address Line Cards in the chassis The AT CV5M02 Management Card does not have a MAC address To communicate with your network it adopts the MAC address of its chassis To view the MAC address of a chassis refer to Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis on page 148 The AT CV Line Cards have the MAC address FF FF FF FF FF FF Serial This column displays the serial numbers of the cards Number Web Browser To view the MAC addresses and serial numbers of the cards from the web browser windows 1 2
132. Group Table on page 300 Configuring the SNMPv3 Notify Table on page 303 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Address Table on page 306 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table on page 309 uuuuuuiuiu 279 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Overview 280 The SNMPv3 protocol builds on the existing SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c protocol implementation In SNMPv3 User based Security Model USM authentication is implemented along with encryption allowing you to configure a secure SNMP environment In addition SNMP terminology changes in the SNMPv3 protocol In the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c protocols the terms agent and manager are used An agent is an SNMP user while a manager is an SNMP host In the SNMPv3 protocol agents and managers are called entities In any SNMPv3 communication there is an authoritative entity and a non authoritative entity The authoritative entity checks the authenticity of the non authoritative entity And the non authoritative entity checks the authenticity of the authoritative entity With the SNMPv3 protocol you create users determine the protocol used for message authentication as well as determine if data transmitted between two SNMP entities is encrypted In addition you can restrict user privileges by determining the user s view of the Management Information Bases MIB In this way you restrict which MIBs the user can display and modify In addition you can restrict the types of m
133. LED on the active card will be on This LED on the standby card will be off The standby management card automatically transitions to the active state in about 20 seconds if the active card fails or is removed from the chassis or reset The network operations of the media converter line cards in the chassis are not affected when the management cards change states If the standby card transitions to the active state it uses the same IP address configuration as the previously active card because the standby card and the active card have the same configuration files For further information refer to the Configuration Files on page 32 The receiver on the 10 100Base TX port is blocked on the standby card to prevent the card from communicating with your network and to prevent an IP address conflict with the active card However the standby card automatically activates the port if it becomes the active card Even though the 10 100Base TX port on the standby card is disabled you should connect it to your network so that those management functions that rely on the card s access to network will be immediately available in the event the card becomes the active card The Console port is also blocked on the standby card to prevent you from using the card to manage the chassis However by connecting a terminal to the port you can view the status messages between the standby card and the active card that are sent over the backplane in the chassis
134. Last Saved Configuration Tab This tab displays the last saved configuration settings for this card The settings are obtained from the master configuration file on the management card If the card is new to the slot the settings are from the previous card installed in the slot If the fields are empty the master configuration file does not have a previous configuration for this slot or the previous and current line cards of the slot are different models 5 To restore the line card to the last saved configuration click the Restore to Last Saved Configuration button The line card will reset if its current operating mode is different from the last saved configuration 197 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Resetting an AT CM3 Line Card 198 Menus Web Browser The procedures in this section explain how to reset individual AT CM301 AT CM302 and AT CM3KOS Line Cards in a Converteon chassis You might reset a line card if you believe it is experiencing a problem You cannot reset individual AT CM2 and AT CV Line Cards through the management software To reset one of these cards you should remove it from its enclosure wait a few seconds and then reinstall it A Caution Resetting an AT CM3 Line Card disrupts its normal operations Some network traffic may be lost When an AT CM3 Line Card is reset it has to initialize its management software During the initialization process which takes approximate
135. M2KOS Line Card 354 Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 673 673 674 and 675 675 676 and 677 677 678 678 679 and 680 680 681 681 682 and 683 683 684 and 685 685 686 686 687 and 688 688 689 and 690 690 691 691 692 and 693 693 694 and 695 695 696 696 697 and 698 698 699 and 700 700 710 and 702 702 703 703 705 and 705 705 706 and 707 707 708 708 709 and 710 710 711 and 712 712 713 and 714 714 715 and 716 716 718 and 719 719 720 and 721 721 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 722 and 723 723 724 and 725 725 726 and 727 727 728 728 729 and 730 730 731 and 732 732 733 and 734 734 735 and 736 736 737 and 738 738 739 and 740 740 741 and 742 742 743 and 744 744 745 745 746 and 747 747 748 and 749 749 750 and 751 751 752 and 753 753 754 and 755 755 756 and 757 757 758 and 759 759 760 and 761 761 762 and 763 763 764 and 765 765 766 and 767 767 768 through 768 768 769 and 770 770 771 and 772 772 773 and 774 774 355 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 356 Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Ave
136. Menu E Figure 83 Local CM Line Card Diagnostics Menu 3 Select Reset All CM Line Cards 199 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 200 Web Browser 4 Atthe confirmation prompt select Yes to reset all of the media converter line cards or No to cancel the procedure 5 To monitor the status of the line cards return to the Main Menu and select Module Status and Configuration After a line card has completed the reset process its status changes from Resetting to On To reset all of the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM7068S Line Cards in the chassis from the web browser windows 1 Select Diagnostics from the menu bar 2 Select the Local CM Line Card tab 3 Select the Reset All CM Line Cards tab 4 Click the Reset All CM Line Cards button There is no confirmation prompt 5 To monitor the states of the line cards select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar and the Menu View tab A card has completed the reset process when the value in the CardTypeVer field changes from Resetting to the model name Converteon Management Software User s Guide Resetting All of the AT CM AT CM70S and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Menus The procedures in this section explain how to reset all of the AT CM2 AT CM3 AT CM70S and AT CV Line Cards in a chassis A Caution Resetting a media converter line card disrupts its normal operations Some network traffic may be lost When an AT CM Lin
137. NMP Trap Receivers sssssseeeeen eene eene enn enne nnne nnn rennes 110 MCa E e P E 110 WEB O EEEE EE 110 Configuring the Management Security c 2 0 2 c cccccceeceececeteesenseeenecsenesdenevesacedeneneesuceebenscneetben dueceneserensecendendbeeeuedenescenee inee 111 MeTnUs netter HIE Un MER REDE 111 laf zie a 113 Enabling or Disabling the Web Server sse nennen mene nnne enin nennen enne entren nne erre 114 MID 114 Web Browser niniin e ee UE ee EH REL e e ep MEER ER e e ee TE YID i ee oo S 114 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Manually Se tting the Date and Time iiti tede oi lese i a ae aieiaiei aiias 115 VIA rep ECT 115 Web BIOWSEF oreet eme be He EE E e IR E IM ries e trips 116 Configuring the Network Time Protocol Client eese enne een nemen en nennen nere enne EEEE enne 117 IMEEM AT 117 Web Browser AT 117 Resetting the Management Card sse nnne deiae dder poeri intense enne inerte nenne terret nene enne nnns 119 Menus oigo o e te Ag ies Seite as e Se cet etu Aa Ete teet utei chs 119 Web cgo i deep EE 120 Viewing the Event OG em 122 MOTUS c seeders eee fe ates eae hid ieee Ti oa ated late eee ede ta tn eet hove eee EE Oe levee ten ieee vated event 122 Web BtOWS6E iu SL i ennai body bioin aah Gata el ea ee eis poste foe Loeb side 129 brise quendam E
138. NMPv3 Access Table menu defines which MIB views this User can read write modify and send traps from For each User Name you can assign D A Security Model SNMPv1 SNMPv2c SNMPv3 Oo A Group Name o A Storage Type To access the SNBMPv3 Group Table from the menus O From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration System Parameters Configuration SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 Group Table The Configure SNMPv3 Group Table menu is shown in Figure 130 a Configure SNMPv3 Group Table N Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry irem to SNMPv3 Configurations E Figure 130 Configure SNMPv3 Group Table Menu To access the SNMPv3 Group Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the Group Table tab The tab is shown in Figure 131 System SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c SNMPv3 Files Help User View Access Group Notify Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Security Name Security Model Group Name Storage Type commpublic vi grpcommpublic Permanent commprivate vi grpcommprivate Permanent commwpublic v2c grpcommpublic Permanent commprivate v2c grpcommprivate Permanent manager usm grpmanager Permanent Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuration Figure 131 SNMPv3 G
139. OAM Config tiration Tabia iieiea roni De c cepe a eae Dec e dde set Hose cR Edad eu re mie iden 258 OAM Loopback Test Menu eerie rtt dente deret ier dese bdo de cp Ud a daddario diada dne tenus 259 Show Loopback Test Statistics Window sese nennen enne nnn nenne 261 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Converteon Management Software User s Guide OAM Loopback Test Tab tite sette cipe ees od tedio t else doe cede eite 262 QAM NE Statistics siz DEEP 263 Show Local OAM Information WindOw esee emere nennen nennen nene enne 265 OAM Local Information Tab iori teen recited cedere ed secado n ende Hd amete pee EEE 270 Show Remote OAM Information Window sese nennen nnns 271 Remote OAM Information Tab xen teer natnra rEn re rires ore eek seed ne deme xig ea inten 272 Show OAM Statistics Window ssssesseenenenn nennen nennen nn rnen nennen nnne nennen enne nes 273 OAM Statistics Tab net tete ed te etu eee diede Supe t puteis quite 274 Enter B
140. OAM Configuration submenu are defined in Table 31 The line card immediately implements your changes to the parameters Table 31 OAM Client Parameters Parameter Description Admin State This parameter controls the state of the OAM client on the line card and has the following possible values O Enabled This enables the OAM client The line card can participate in the OAM Discovery process and perform other OAM functions This is the appropriate setting for the OAM based features on the AT CM Line Cards This is the default setting Disabled This disables the OAM client The line card cannot participate in the OAM Discovery process because it will not generate or respond to OAMPDUs 255 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 256 Table 31 OAM Client Parameters Parameter Description Mode Maximum OAMPDU Size This parameter specifies the mode of the OAM client on the line card The possible values are Passive This sets the client s mode to Passive Clients in the Passive mode can not initiate the Discovery process or send Loopback Control OAMPDUS or Variable Request OAMPDUS This is the default setting O Active This setting sets the client s mode to Active Clients in this mode can initiate the Discovery process This is the appropriate setting for the OAM based features on the AT CM Line Cards This parameter specifies the max
141. OAM Visible MOGe rre reto e Di DP RB sun RE RE QD ERO QN nri 53 OAM INEIECHDe 53 Setting the Operating MOde oreet re rer HETEORMEEET Re ET REM Apaapa HE PUPA iaaa iid REE 54 Chapter 3 OAM based Features enint edente seen ene eei ne aee nep a eee Ee e rye oe ede tainei 55 Remote Peer Managemen 0h ccccccccecceceeeeeceeeeeeeee eee eee ca eaaaeeeecaaaaeceeeeeseaaeeeegsaaeceeeesaaaeaeceeeqaeeeeeceeaeeeeeesaaaeaeeeesaeeeaeeeeeneaea 56 Remote Updates of the AT S73 or AT S102 Management Software sssssssssseeeeeee eene eren 60 OAM LEoopback Tests ertet eem maie ER eO E etidm re ened rtis 61 Dying Gasp and First RPS Failure Signals enne nennen NNE nrnen nennen nene eere 62 DYING GASP MEE E 62 First RPS Fall re 3 1 2 et Eee elei do E docte eee op t ee edite 64 OAM Variable Requssls 1 ripetere nied E doe eae ete ed ee te aspe ed de reeled RU e dod POR D ne go 68 OAM Client Stein Sic tes cegesiees ecnes sedis aai 69 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session 0 0 0 2 elec sse nennen nnne en nennen neret 71 Starting a Local Management Session sssssssssseeeeeeeen eene nennen entree enn en nens ernst nennen nenne nennen nenas 72 Starting a Telnet Management Session ssssssssssssssssssssseseee en ennere netten nisi enn tenrl isse nne rel sss
142. Pv2c SNMPv3 All CM Line Cards Files Configuration ALL CM Line Cards Configuration Setting Edit Low Power Mode All CM Line Cards LPM Setting Edit Figure 20 All CM Line Cards Tab Click the Edit button for the All CM Line Cards Configuration Setting option to display the pop window where the command resides System Configuration All CM Line Cards CLOSE Configuration Save All CM Line Card Configuration Return All CM Line Card to Default Configuration Apply Figure 21 All CM Line Cards Pop up Window 82 Saving the Configurations of the Remote AT CM Line Cards Updating the Master Configuration File on a Standby Management Card Converteon Management Software User s Guide The Converteon product has a series of OAM based features One of them is remote peer management This feature lets you manage remote AT CM Line Cards from their local line card counterparts that are installed in a chassis that has the AT CV5M02 Management Card The value to this feature is that it can save you from having to travel to the remote sites when you need to configure the remote cards Remote line cards function exactly the same as local line cards when it comes to saving their configuration changes When you configure the parameter settings on the remote line cards through remote peer management they immediately save their changes in their configuration files in flash memory for p
143. S fed by User Linked by View Name Name esum i MEC d Name i Linked by Group Name 284 Figure 122 SNMPv3 User Configuration Process In general you focus on configuring security groups and then add and delete users from the groups as needed For example you may want to have two groups one for manager privileges and a second one for operator privileges Refer to Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples on page 345 for an example of manager and operator configurations Converteon Management Software User s Guide After you configure an SNMPv3 user you need to configure SNMPv3 message notification This configuration is accomplished with the following tables 0 Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table 0 Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table D Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table You start the message notification configuration by defining the type of message you want to send with the SNMPv3 Notify Table Then you define a IP address that is used for notification in the Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table This is the IP address of the SNMPv3 host Finally you associate the trap information with a user by configuring the Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Figure 123 illustrates of how the message notification tables are linked SNMPv3 Notify Table SNMPv3 Target Address Table SNMPv3 Target Parameter Table SNMPv3 User Table SNMPv3 View Table SNMPv3 Access Table SNMPv3 Securi
144. SNMP security information consists of information about the following User View of the MIB Tree Security Level Security Model Authentication Level Privacy Protocol uuuuuiu uiu Group To configure the SNMP security information you associate a user and its related information View Security Level Security Model Authentication Level Privacy Protocol and Group with the type of message and the host IP address 283 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Tables The SNMPv3 configuration is neatly divided into configuring SNMPv3 user information and configuring the message notification You must configure all seven tables to successfully configure the SNMPv3 protocol You use the following tables for user configuration Configure SNMPv3 User Table Configure SNMPv3 View Table Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Configure SNMPv3 Group Table u uuu First you create a user in the Configure SNMPv3 User Table Then you define the MIB view this user has access to in the Configure SNMPv3 View Table To configure a security group and associate a MIB view to a security group you configure the Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Finally configure the Configure SNMPv3 Group menu to associate a user to a security group Figure 122 illustrates of how the user configuration tables are linked SNMPv3 User Table SNMPv3 View Table SNMPv3 Access Table SNMPv3 Security To Group Table SNMPV3 Auth Table ETRA
145. Security Model parameter with the SNMPv3 protocol P AuthPriv This option provides authentication and the privacy protocol This security level encrypts messages using a privacy protocol and authenticate SNMP entities This level provides the greatest level of security You can select this value if you configured the Security Model parameter with the SNMPv3 protocol N NoauthNoPriv This option provides no authentication and no privacy protocol This security level is appropriate if you do not want authentication of SNMP entities or encryption This security level provides the least security Note The only security level for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c is N NoauthNoPriv Storage Type V Volatile N NonVolatile The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Row Status This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 312 Converteon Management Software User s Guide In an SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table entry the Security Name parameter is linked to the User Name parameter on the SNMPv3 User Table In an SNMPv3 User Table entry the User Name p
146. Select Diagnostics from the menu bar Select the Local CM Line Card tab Select the MAC Address amp Serial Number tab shown in Figure 88 on page 212 This window is for viewing purposes only The columns in the window are described in Table 25 on page 211 211 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Local CM Line Card Remote CM Line Card Help MAC Address P All amp Serial Number Information CM Line Cards Local Module Mac Address Serial Number 1 AT CV5M02 402803L050600019 C 2 AT CM302 00 0C 46 CE D8 72 A03572L061100040 B 3 AT CM302 00 00 46 CE D9 02 A03572L0611000708 4 AT CM302 00 0C 46 CE DA12 A03572L061100014 B 5 AT CM302 00 15 77 52 5C 6F A03572L061100111 B 6 AT CM302 00 15 77 52 5C A1 A03578G071400012 A Figure 88 MAC Address amp Serial Number Window 212 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Displaying SFP Module Information Menus The procedures in this section are used to view the manufacturer s specifications for the SFP modules in the AT CM2KO0S AT CM70S and AT CM3KOS Line Cards For SFP modules that support DDM in AT CM3KOS Line Cards the windows are also used to display the alarm thresholds that generate the event messages listed in Table 14 on page 127 To view the SFP information from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Diagnostics The Diagnostics Menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 148 2 Select Local CM Line Card Diagnostics to display the men
147. Specific OAMPDUS Rx Unsupported OAMPDUS eo OcOOOococococcoccocococoo Ner Return to OAM Configurations Figure 116 Show OAM Statistics Window Refer to the IEEE 802 3ah standard for the definitions of the different types of OAMPDUs 273 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client Web Browser To display OAM statistics for local OAM clients from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 From the Chassis View click Port A on the AT CM Line Card whose OAM statistics you want to view Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line Card 3 If the Port A tab is not selected select it The OAM client is only supported on Port A 4 Click the OAM Statistics tab to display the window in Figure 117 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Setting Line Card Configuration OAM Variable Port Port Port OAM OAM OAM OAM Status Configuration Statistics Configuration Information Statistics Loopback Test Request Slot Number 3 Card Type AT CM302 OAM Statistics Tx OAMPDUs 3175 Rx OAMPDUs 3504 Tx Information OAMPDUS 3172 Rx Information OAMPDUS 3504 Tx Event OAMPDUs Rx Unique Event OAMPDUs Rx Duplicated Event OAMPDUs Tx Loopback Control OAMPDUs Rx Loopback Control OAMPDUs Tx Variable Request OAMPDUs Rx Variable Req
148. System Date mm dd yy and enter a new value in the format mm dd yy format For example here is April 5 2008 4 5 08 To set the system time select System Time hh mm ss and enter a new value in 24 hour hh mm ss format The seconds are optional Each part requires two digits For example 8 15 a m would be 8 15 115 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 116 Web Browser To manually set the date and time from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Configuration from the menu bar If the System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 30 on page 103 To manually set the date and time click the Edit button in the System Information section of the tab In the pop up window select System Date and enter the date in the format mm dd yy format For example here is April 5 2008 04 05 08 Select System Time and enter the time in 24 hour hh mm ss format For example 8 15 am would be 8 15 00 Click the Update button Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring the Network Time Protocol Client Menus Web Browser The AT CV5MO2 Management Card has an NTP client for setting the date and time from a Network Time Protocol NTP server on your network or the Internet The date and time are added to event messages and SNMP traps Refer to Accessing Your Network on page 31 for the NTP client requirements To configure the NTP client from th
149. T CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards enter in this field the name of the new bootloader file stored on the TFTP server All of the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards use the same bootloader file Be sure to include the bin extension 6 After entering the appropriate information in the fields click Update 7 To save this information in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration Menu and select Save System Configuration To perform the actual upgrade go to Downloading New Management Software Using TFTP on page 320 319 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files Downloading New Management Software Using TFTP The procedure in this section explains how to use TFTP to download new versions of the management software programs to the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Line Cards The procedure has the following requirements o You can perform this procedure from the menus from a local management session or a remote Telnet session You cannot perform this procedure from the web browser windows If you are updating both the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Line Cards Allied Telesis recommends updating the line cards first You have to configure the TFTP client on the management card before performing this procedure For instructions refer to Configuring the TFTP Client to Download New Management Software Programs on page 317 The new management software files have to be stored on
150. Table the Security Name parameter is the equivalent to the User Name parameter in the SNMPv3 User Table The parameters for the entries in the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table are Target Parameters Name Security Name User Name Security Model Security Level uuu iau Storage Type 309 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 To access the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table from the menus O From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration System Parameters Configuration SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table The Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table menu is shown in Figure 136 g Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table UN Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry etam to SNMPv3 Configurations P Figure 136 Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Menu To access the Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the Target Parameters Table tab The Target Address Table tab is shown in Figure 137 Configuration System SNMPvi amp SNMPv2c SNMPv3 Files Help User View Access Group Notify Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Target Parameters Message Processing n s Table Model Security Model Security Name Security Lev
151. Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Notify Name Notify Tag Notify Type Storage Type Figure 133 SNMPv3 Notify Table Tab The parameters for SNMPv3 Notify Table entries are defined in Table 37 Table 37 SNMPv3 Notify Table Parameters Parameter Description Notify Name The name to be associated with this trap message The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters For example you might define a trap message for hardware engineering and enter a value of hardwareengineeringtrap for the Notify Name Notify Tag The name of a Notify Tag The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters This parameter is added to the Tag List parameter in the SNMPv3 Target Address Table which defines the IP addresses of the devices to receive the traps or inform messages Notify Type The possible values are T Trap This option sends traps SNMPv3 does not expect hosts to respond to traps Inform This option sends inform messages SNMPv3 expects hosts to respond to inform messages Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file 304 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 37 SNMPv3 Notify Table Parameters Parameter Description Storage Type Continued N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the en
152. Terminal mode VT 100 compatible ANSI Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Flow control None 339 Appendix A Default Settings for the Management Card and the Line Cards AT CM2 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards 340 This table lists the factory default settings for the AT S73 Management Software on the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards Table 46 Default Settings for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards and the AT S73 Management Software Parameter Default Setting Default Operating Mode OAM Visible Name None Port A Fiber Optic Port State Enabled Flow Control Enabled Ingress Rate Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit Port B Twisted Pair Port State Enabled Flow Control Enabled Speed and Duplex Mode Auto Negotiation Ingress Rate Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit OAM Admin State Enabled Mode Passive Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 octets Unidirectional Support Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support No Variable Retrieval Support Yes T1 E1 Ports AT CM70S Line Card Carrier Type T1 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 46 Default Settings for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards and the AT S73 Management Software Parameter Default Setting Receiver Sensitivity Long Haul Line Build Out DSX 1 0 to 133ft OdB CSU Test or Normal Transmission Norm
153. Type AT CM302 OAM Loopback Test Remote Loopback OAM Loopback Test Disable Figure 110 OAM Loopback Test Tab 5 To activate the loopback test on the local line card click Edit in the Remote Loopback field to display a pop up window and select Enable from the pull down menu A Caution At this point the local media converter line card and its remote counterpart stop forwarding network traffic Some network traffic may be lost 6 7 OAM Test Statistics Number of Seconds Number of Tx Frames Number of Rx Frames Number of Rx Errored Frames Number of Tx Bytes Number of Rx Bytes Number of Erroed Bytes Number of Tx Bits Number of Rx Bits Number of Rx Errored Bits Converteon Management Software User s Guide To start the test click Edit in the OAM Loopback Test field to display a pop up window and select Start from the pull down menu The local line card begins to transmit test packets to the remote line card To view test statistics click Show OAM Test Statistics An example of the counters is shown in Figure 111 Module Status amp Configuration CLOSE O O O O O O O O O O Clear Loopback Statistics Figure 111 OAM Test Statistics The first line displays the duration of the test in seconds The counters display the number of test packets the local OAM client transmitted to its remote counterpart over the fiber optic connection and the number of packets the local
154. Ver This column displays the model names of the management cards and the line cards in the chassis The model names of newer versions of the AT CM2 Line Cards have suffixes like v2 ST This column displays the states of the management cards and the line cards The possible states are D The line card is operating normally 0 Resetting This state which only applies to AT CM Line Cards indicates that the line cards are initializing their management software 158 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 19 Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description OperMode This column displays the operating modes of the AT CM and AT CV Line Cards It also displays the status of the AT CV5M02 Management Card The possible operating modes and the line cards that support them are listed here LT Link Test All media converter line cards ML MissingLink All media converter line cards SML Smart MissingLink All media converter line cards OAM V OAM Visible AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards OAM B OAM Bypass AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards OAM LT Link Test and OAM Visible AT CM3 Line Cards OAM ML MissingLink and OAM Visible AT CM3 Line Cards OAM SML Smart MissingLink and OAM Visible AT CM3 Line Cards o LC MGMT The operating mode is controlled by the card s DIP switches All media converter line cards o2 uuuuuiuiu o Resetting The line card
155. View Table os Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry Aeturn to SNMPv3 Configurations E Figure 126 Configure SNMPv3 View Table Menu To manage the SNMPv3 View Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the View Table tab The SNMPv3 View Table tab is shown in Figure 127 293 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 System SNMP User View Table Table View Name viewCommpublic viewUSMmanager viewCommoprivate vi amp SNMPv2c SNMPv3 Files Access Group Notify Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Table Table Table Subtree OID Subtree Mask View Type Storage Type a FF Included Permanent a FF Included Permanent al FF Included Permanent Configuration Parameter Figure 127 SNMPv3 View Table Tab A knowledge of the OID table is required to create view entities You can be very specific about the view a user can or cannot access down to a column or row of the table The AT S99 Management Software program of the AT CV5MO2 Management Card supports the Internet subtree of the OID table The parameters for SNMPv3 View Table entries are defined in Table 34 Table 34 SNMPv3 View Table Parameters Description View Name A descriptive name for this view of up to 32 alphanumeric characters Note The defaultViewAll value is
156. X RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet AT CV1KSS Gigabit Ethernet SFP2 slot for a Varies by SFP Varies by SFP transceiver Varies by SFP transceiver 1 The maximum operating distances of the fiber optic ports assume full duplex operation The distances will be significantly less for half duplex mode 2 SFP transceivers sold separately 44 Converteon Management Software User s Guide The features of the cards are listed in Table 6 Table 6 Features of the AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 100Base TX Twisted Pair Port Operating Modes IEEE 802 3u Auto Negotiation Half or full duplex mode Auto MDI MDI X RJ 45 connector Back pressure in half duplex mode IEEE 802 3x flow control in full duplex mode Link Test MissingLink Smart MissingLink Other Features 022 02 02 0 0 02 02 02 0028 02000 Jumbo Ethernet frames up to 9000 bytes LEDs for unit and port status Cyclical redundancy check 45 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Management Software The line cards use the following management programs o AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards AT S73 Management Software o AT CM3 Line Cards AT S102 Management Software The devices come with the programs preinstalled The default settings for the parameters can be found in Appendix A Default Settings for the Management Card and the Line Cards on page 337 Allied Telesis may periodically make avail
157. a severe error condition that does not result in a complete reset or reboot by the remote client go Yes The local OAM client received a critical event notification from the remote OAM client o No The local OAM client has not received a critical event notification Dying Gasp Indicates whether or not the local OAM client received a dying gasp notification from the remote OAM client A dying gasp notification indicates that the remote chassis with the remote OAM client experienced a power failure 0 Yes The local OAM client received a dying gasp notification D No The local OAM client has not received a dying gasp notification For background information refer to Dying Gasp and First RPS Failure Signals on page 62 Link Fault Indicates whether or not the receiver connector on the fiber optic port on port A is receiving a signal CD Yes The receiver connector is receiving a signal D No received connector is not receiving a signal OAM Version Indicates the version supported by the media converter line card This field contains the value 0x01 to indicate compliance with Version 1 of this protocol Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 32 Show Local OAM Information Window Column Description Config Revision Indicates the current revision of the Information TLV The value of this field starts at zero and be incremented each time somethin
158. able on our web site new versions of the management programs Installing the new programs requires the AT CV5M02 Management Card For instructions refer to Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files on page 315 The AT CV Line Cards do not have management software Maximum Frame Sizes Low Power Mode The line cards have the following maximum frame sizes o AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards 1522 bytes 0 AT CM3Line Cards 10240 bytes o AT CV Line Cards 9000 bytes With one exception the maximum frame sizes are not adjustable on the line cards The sole exception is the maximum frame size for the AT CM2KOS Line Card which can be increased to 1632 bytes For instructions refer to Configuring the Maximum Frame Size on the AT CM2KOS Line Card on page 182 46 The AT CM3 Line Cards have a low power mode that lets you conserve power by turning off the LEDs when you are not monitoring them The feature can be controlled either through the AT CV5M02 Management Card or with the recessed ECO Friendly button on the front panels of the line cards Activating or deactivating the low power mode does not interfere with the network operations of the cards Additionally this mode does not control the RDY LEDs on the line cards The low power mode is not available on the AT CM2 AT CM70S and AT CV Line Cards Converteon Management Software User s Guide Packet Rate Limiting You can set packet rate limits on the network traffi
159. al PRBS Disabled Remote Loopback Disabled 341 Appendix A Default Settings for the Management Card and the Line Cards AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards 342 This table lists the factory default settings for the AT S102 Management Software on the AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards Table 47 Default Settings for the AT CM3 Line Cards and the AT S102 Management Software Parameter Default Setting Default Operating Mode Link Test and OAM Visible Name None Maximum Frame Size 10240 bytes Low Power Mode Disabled Port A Fiber Optic Port State Enabled Flow Control Enabled Ingress Rate Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit Port B Twisted Pair Port State Enabled Flow Control Enabled Speed and Duplex Mode Auto Negotiation Ingress Rate Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit OAM Admin State Enabled Mode Passive Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 octets Unidirectional Support Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support No Variable Retrieval Support Yes AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Converteon Management Software User s Guide This table lists the factory default settings for the AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Table 48 Default Settings for the AT CV Line Cards Parameter Default Setting Default Operating Mode Link Test Auto MDI X Enabled Maximum Frame Size 9000 bytes 343 Appendi
160. ameter Settings eco eei eerie snae in unio rh d gre gor HER gauge kal ACAR ENEE ena densior nud 233 Resetting the Remote AT CM3 Line Cards sesssseseeeeeeeeene eene nnne enr en nere erret erret nene enne nnns 234 Displaying the Version Numbers of the Remote AT CM Line Cards seseeeneenm emen 235 Chapter 8 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card sessssss 241 Selecting the Management Method for the AT CM70S Line Card ssssssseseeeenm nennen 242 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the AT CV5MO02 Management Card sse eene 246 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the Console Port on the Line Card enn 249 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client essesessssss 253 Configuring the QAM Client m 254 Iac 254 Web Browser 3 2 ie DE Ee Leite etti lone rte ed aede Vd sas A vu taba deed ga ocean Soe ente Pe espe rode i n Ense den 258 Performing the OAM Loopback Test nre ioo tte dede eei ede d dede eode oe se odere oed se ede a iEneas 259 MOTUS ssid sees 259 Web BrowSet seniii n ead eect iste etes th fee haley onset daag er a edia oe detente Ro ia 262 Displaying OAM Information on Local OAM Clients ssssseeeeeee
161. ample 8 15 am would be 08 15 6 To configure the NTP client do the following a Select NTP Server and enter the IP address of the NTP server b Select the NTP UTC Offset field and enter the time difference in hours between the Universal Time Coordinated UTC and your local time The range is between 12 and 12 hours The default is 0 hours c To enable the client select Enable NTP 7 Return to the Main Menu The management card will be easier to identify if you assign it a name The name is displayed at the top of the menus in the management software To assign a name to the management card 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration 4 Select System Name and enter a new name of up to 39 characters for the card Spaces and special characters are permitted 5 Return to the Main Menu The new name does not appear in the menus until you return to the Main Menu Saving Your Changes Converteon Management Software User s Guide This completes the initial configuration of the management card To save your changes in the permanent master configuration file in flash memory on the card 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration 3 From the System Configuration menu select Save System Configuration The followin
162. an AT CM Line Card can return to normal network operations it has to initialize its management software and configure its operating parameters This process takes approximately one minute In contrast AT CV Line Cards immediately return to normal operations because they do not have management software Converteon Management Software User s Guide Web Browser To set the operating mode of a line card from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 In the Chassis View click one of the ports on the line card you want to configure Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time 3 Click the Setting tab shown in Figure 70 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Port A Port B Line Card Configuration Slot Number 2 Card Type AT CM302 Module Name Module Name Regii Edit Maximum Frame Size Maximum Frame Size 10240 Edit Low Power Mode o Low Power Mode FF Edit Operation Mode Operation Mode OAM Link Test Edit On Board DIP Switch On Board DIP Switch Reset Line Card Figure 70 Setting Window 4 Click the Edit button in the Operation Mode section of the window 179 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 180 5 In the Operation Mode pop up window select the new operating mode for the line card from the pul
163. anagement Card 150 Table 17 Chassis Information Menu Row Description Running This field displays the number of hours minutes and seconds since the management card was last powered on or reset Current This field displays the current date and time Time Flash This field displays the status of the Flash PROM on the PROM management card Serial This field displays the status of the Console port on the Interface management card RPSA and This field displays the status of the power supplies and RPSB fans and the temperature and power voltage in the AT CV5000 Chassis A status of Not present indicates an empty power supply slot in the AT CV5000 Chassis Neither the AT CV1200 Chassis nor the AT CV1203 Chassis display this information Web Browser To view the operational information from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Diagnostics from the menu bar If the Chassis Information tab is not selected select it This window is for viewing purposes only The information in the window is described in Table 17 on page 149 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Chassis Local CM Line Card Remote CM Line Card Chassis Information Reset Chassis Chassis Information Serial Number 402736 Mac Address 00 A0 D2 00 00 11 Converteon Chassis CV 5000 XX Running 0 days 0 hours 4 minutes 29 hours Current Time 09 17 08 12 2
164. anagement card and the master configuration file through the autocopy feature A card installed in a slot where autocopy is enabled receives its configuration automatically whenever the chassis is powered on the card is reset or a replacement card is installed n Voltage Failed AT CV5000 Report The AT PWR14 or AT PWR15 Power Supply Module in the AT CV5000 Chassis had an output voltage failure The variable n can be 3 3V 5V or 12V and signals which voltage failed Clear The AT PWR14 or AT PWR15 Power Supply Module resumed normal operations or was replaced Copper port failure on AT CV1200 Report The twisted pair port on a remote AT CM remote linecard n AT CV1203 Line Card lost its link to its network AT CV5000 device This message requires remote peer management Clear The twisted pair port on a remote AT CM Line Card established a link to its network device This messages requires remote peer management CPM Card Reboot AT CV1200 Report The AT CV5MO2 Management Card was AT CV1203 reset or powered on AT CV5000 124 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 13 General Event Messages Message Chassis Classi fication Definition CV1203 Local RPS Failure A B AT CV1203 Report One of the two external power supplies connected to the AT CV1203 Chassis failed A failed power supply has no detectable output voltages A and B designate the power connectors on the
165. anagement card with an IP address configuration is vulnerable to unauthorized access from an intruder with an SNMP program you should change the card s SNMP community strings to protect the management card and the media converter line cards If an intruder were to learn the IP address and the community strings of the management card he could use an SNMP application program to gain access to the card without having to know the password to the manager account The IP address configuration of the management card can be assigned manually or since the management card has a DHCP client by a DHCP server on your network To assign the management card an IP address configuration and to change the SNMP community strings 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration 4 From the System Parameters Configuration menu select IP Parameters to display the IP Parameters Menu 5 To manually assign an IP address configuration to the management card enter values for the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway address parameters When entering the values observe the following guidelines o The values have to be entered in this format xxx xxx xxX XXX Oo The DHCP client has to be disabled Setting the Date and Time m m Converteon Management Software User s Guide To delete a value without assignin
166. anagement session select Quit from the Main Menu Note You should always remember to select Quit from the Main Menu when you are finished managing the chassis with the manager account If you close your terminal emulator program without logging out the management session remains active and the management card rejects any further attempts to log on until the console timer has timed out 75 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session Starting a Web Browser Management Session Note The requirements for remote web browser management are described in Accessing Your Network on page 31 Note The web browser windows are supported on the AT CV5000 Chassis but not on the AT CV1200 or AT CV1203 Chassis To start a remote web browser management session 1 Enter the IP address of the management card in the URL field of your web browser as shown in Figure 13 If the AT CV5000 Chassis has two management cards enter the IP address of the active card URL Field S Home Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a m ds 3 e gt y Q 1 Search Favorites History Mail Print Hf Back Farivar Stop Refresh Home Figure 13 URL Field in a Web Browser 2 When prompted enter the username and password of the manager or operator account on the management card For the manager account the username is manager and the default password is friend For the opera
167. arameter is used as an index for the entry Because the User Name and Security Name parameters are linked the information you configure that relates to a User Table entry must match the information you configure in the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table entry In addition the values configured for the following parameters in an SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table entry must match those configured in the corresponding table entry m o g m User Name parameter in the SNMPv3 User Table View Name parameter in the SNMPv3 View Table Group Name Security Model and Security Level parameters in the SNMPv3 Access Table User Name Security Model Group Name parameters in the SNMPv3 Group Table A Caution If the values of the Security Model parameter in the SNMPv3 User Table and the SNMPv3 Target Parameter Table entry do not match notification messages are not generated on behalf of this User Security Name 313 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 314 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files The procedures in this chapter explain how to update the management software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards They also explain how to upload and download the configuration files on the management card The sections in the chapter include 0 Overview on page 316 D Configuring the TFTP Client to Download New Management Software Programs on page 317 Q Downloading New Management Sof
168. ard If you install a second management card during a local management session you ll be able to watch the process as status messages similar to those in Figure 1 are displayed on your screen Converteon Management Software User s Guide Active Management Card AT CV5MO2 founded in Slot 2 Standby Management Card AT CV5M0O2 founded in Slot 5 Waiting for Standby to be Ready Please wait Not Ready Waiting for Standby to be Ready Please wait Not Ready Waiting for Standby to be Ready Please wait Ready Ue Copy Configuration to Standby Please wait 078 Succeeded p SNMPv3 Configuration Files Figure 1 Updating the Master Configuration File on a Standby Card The incrementing number at the bottom of the screen is the ID number of the parameter setting the active card is transmitting to the standby card All parameter settings have unique ID numbers The number can be ignored After the management card has sent the entire master configuration file it displays Succeeded To resume managing the chassis press any key The status messages are somewhat different if you install a second management card while viewing the Module Configuration and Status menu or the Remote Module Configuration and Status menu but their meanings are the same If you plan to manage the chassis with SNMPv3 you should know that the settings to the SNMPv3 tables are not stored in the mast
169. ards in the following sections AT CV5M02 Management Card on page 338 AT CM2 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards on page 340 AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards on page 342 AT CV Media Converter Line Cards on page 343 u uuu 337 Appendix A Default Settings for the Management Card and the Line Cards AT CV5M02 Management Card The following table lists the factory default settings for the AT S99 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card Table 45 Default Settings for the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT S99 Management Software Parameter Default Setting IP Address 10 0 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client Disabled Name None Contact None Location None 10 100Base TX Port Auto Negotiation Activity Monitor Disabled Network Time Protocol Client Disabled Maximum Temperature Threshold 60 C Auto copy Set Per Slot Disabled Community Strings Get Community String public Set Community String private Trap Community String public Omega Manager Password friend Operator Password operator Time Out Value 10 minutes Local Access Enabled Remote Access Telnet Enabled 338 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 45 Default Settings for the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT S99 Management Software Parameter Default Setting Console Port Data Rate 115200
170. are gt The transmission was from the management card to the line card lt The transmission was from the line card to the management card This column displays the length of the packet in bytes 153 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 154 Table 18 IPC Message Column Description LI This column displays the time interval in seconds between the polling of the previous line card and the polling of the current line card by the management card CI This column displays the time interval in seconds between the end of one complete polling cycle and the start of the next cycle A cycle ends when the management card polls the line card in the highest numbered slot in the chassis and begins when it polls the card in the lowest numbered slot CY This column displays the time interval in seconds since the start of the current polling cycle A cycle starts when the management card polls the line card in the lowest numbed slot in the chassis LC This column displays the time interval in seconds since a line card was polled IPC This column displays the time interval in seconds the management card waited for the IPC response from a line card NMSG NBUF This column displays the number of messages the management card has in its queue This column displays the number of messages stored in the buffer on the management card Web
171. are User s Guide Table 26 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description FC This column displays the status of flow control on the ports of the remote line cards The possible states are o Y Flow control is enabled on the port o N Flow control is disabled on the port IngRL This column displays the settings of the ingress rate limiting filters on the ports on the remote line cards The value 0 means there is no rate limiting on the port This is the default setting EgrRL This column displays the settings of the egress rate limiting filters on the ports on the line cards The value 0 means there is no rate limiting on the port This is the default setting OAM This column displays the status of the OAM clients on Port A the fiber optic ports on the remote line cards The following OAM client information is displayed 00 i C A This alternates between and o when a remote fiber optic port is transmitting OAMPDUS Otherwise it remains o B This alternates between and o when a remote fiber optic port is receiving OAMPDUS Otherwise it remains o C This displays the operational state of the OAM client on the fiber optic port on a remote line card The possible states are Operational A Active Send Local D Disabled L Active Send Local M Peer Remote Reject P or W Passive Wait R Peer Local Reject 1 Active Send Remote 1 2 Active Se
172. ash memory for permanent storage System System Information System Mame System Date NTP Server NTP Omega Options Manager Password Operator Password Timeout Terminal Setting Baudrate IP Parameters IP Address Gateway Address 7 System Configuration Menu System Parameters Configuration save System Configuration ecru to Main Menu Return System Configuration to Default Figure 15 Save Command in the System Configuration Menu The same command can be found in the web browser windows in the System window shown Figure 16 SNMPvi amp SMMPv2 SNMPv3 Configuration All CM Line Cards Files 09 15 08 System Time 12 12 57 0 0 0 0 NTP UTC Offset 0 Disable Edit SE e OR A a Local Omega Enable HORROR ct tat dt ltd Remote Omega Enable 10 Edit 115200 Edit Temperature Threshold Maximum Temperature Threshold 60 C 10 4 8 22 10 4 8 1 Subnet Mask DHCP Edit 255 255 255 0 Enable Configuration System Configuration Setting Edit Figure 16 Save Command in the System Tab 79 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session Configurations of Clicking the Edit button in the Configuration section of the tab displays the pop up window shown in Figure 17 which has the Save System Configuration System Configuration System Configuration KI CLOSE o Save System Configuration Return System Configuration to Default
173. atus Configuration Slot Number 1 Module AT CV5MD2 Port Status Link Status Online Speed 10M Duplex Half Figure 45 Port A Tab for the Management Card 3 Click the Port Configuration tab shown in Figure 46 Chassis View Menu View General Port Port Status Configuration Slot Number 1 Module AT CV5MD2 Port Configuration Negotiation Manual Speed 10M Duplex Half Figure 46 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Card 136 Converteon Management Software User s Guide To adjust the settings of the port click the Edit button to display the Port Configuration pop up window Adjust the parameters as needed The parameters are defined in Table 16 on page 135 To save your changes in the master configuration file refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 137 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Restoring the Default Setting on the 10 100Base TX Port 138 Menus Web Browser These procedures are used to restore the default setting of Auto Negotiation on the 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card Of course you can achieve the same result by manually configuring the port to Auto Negotiation by performing either of the procedures in the previous section The procedures do not interrupt the network operations of the media converter line cards in the chassis Note The wiring configuration of MDI on th
174. ave to start a new management session A Caution Updating the management software on the AT CM Line Cards interrupts the cards network operations Some network traffic may be lost The line cards stop forwarding network traffic for approximately two minutes while they store and initialize the new software This procedure has the following requirements O The procedure has to be performed from a local management session For instructions refer to Starting a Local Management Session on page 72 Oo This procedure is not supported from a Telnet or web browser management session 0 You need to store the new management software programs on the computer or terminal on which you ll be performing the local management session O To download new management software on the AT CM70S Line Card the card must be set to the UART backplane mode For instructions refer to Selecting the Management Method for the AT CM70S Line Card on page 242 325 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files To do wnload new management software using XMODEM 1 From the Main Menu select Image Download to display the menu in Figure 139 on page 321 2 Select Image Download via XMODEM to display the menu in Figure 140 di Image Download via XMODEM UN Management Card Image Download Single Local CM Line card Image Single Local CM Line Card Bootloader Single Remote CM Line Card Image Single Remote CM Line Card Bootloader
175. back Start Loopback Test gt Stop Loopback Test Show Loopback Test Statistics Clear Loopback Test Statistics V Return to OAM Configurations J Figure 108 OAM Loopback Test Menu 259 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 260 6 From the OAM Loopback Test Menu select Enable Remote Loopback A Caution The local line card and its remote counterpart stop forwarding network traffic Some network traffic may be lost Note There may be a delay of several seconds before the menu reflects your selection If the line card is not configured correctly for the OAM loopback test an error message is displayed The messages are described here OAM port is disconnected This message indicates that port A on the local line card has not established a link with its counterpart on the remote line card possibly because the fiber optic cable is not connected to the ports OAM is not in active mode This message indicates that the OAM mode of the line card is set to the passive mode instead of the active mode To correct the problem perform the procedure Configuring the OAM Client on page 254 and change the Mode setting from Passive to Active in the OAM Configuration submenu Line card not in OAM visible mode This message applies only to the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards and indicates that the line card s operational mode is set to the OAM bypass mode instead
176. be set to one of these operating modes ao OV OAM Visible AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards OAM LT Link Test with OAM AT CM3 Line Cards OAM ML MissingLink with OAM AT CM3 Line Cards OAM SML Smart MissingLink with OAM AT CM3 Line Cards LC MGMT The operating mode is controlled by the card s DIP switches All media converter line cards u uuu For background information refer to Operating Modes on page 48 FrmSz This column displays the maximum frame size of 10240 bytes supported by the AT CM301 AT CM302 and AT CM3KOS Line Cards This value is not adjustable This column will be blank for the AT CM2 AT CM70S and AT CV Line Cards Here are their maximum frame sizes O The AT CM2 Line Cards except for the AT CM2KOS Line Card and the AT CM70S Line Card have a maximum frame size of 1522 bytes oO The AT CM2KOS Line Card can have a maximum frame size of either 1522 bytes or 1632 bytes o The AT CV Line Cards have a maximum frame size of 9000 bytes 219 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Table 26 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description LPM This column displays the states of the low power modes LPM on the remote AT CM301 AT CM302 and AT CM3KOS Line Cards The low power mode lets you conserve power by turning off a line card s LEDs when you are not monitoring them For more information refer t
177. c characters Spaces and special characters are not allowed To save your changes in the master configuration file select Line Card Configuration and Save Line Card Configuration To assign names to the AT CM Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar In the Chassis View click a port on the line card you want to assign a name Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time Click the Setting tab shown in Figure 70 on page 179 Click the Edit button in the Module Name section of the window In the Module Name pop up window enter the new name for the card The name can be up to eight alphanumeric characters Spaces and special characters are not allowed Click the Update button To save your changes in the master configuration file click the Line Card Configuration tab the Current Configuration tab and the Save Current Configuration button 181 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Configuring the Maximum Frame Size on the AT CM2KO0S Line Card 182 Menus Web Browser The AT CM2 Line Cards and the AT CM70S Line Card can handle packets up to 1522 bytes An exception is the AT CM2KO0S Line Card because it can be configured to handle packets up to 1632 bytes To adjust the maximum packet size on the AT CM2KO0S Line Card perform either of the following pro
178. c on the ports of the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM70S Line Cards You might use this feature to deal with traffic bottlenecks in a network They can be set on both ports and for either the ingress or egress traffic For instructions refer to Configuring the Port Parameters on the AT CM Line Cards on page 169 Setting this feature requires the AT CV5M02 Management Card The AT CV Line Cards do not support packet rate limits 47 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Operating Modes 48 The operating modes of the line cards are used to determine the states of the links on their ports to troubleshoot link problems and in the case of the AT CM2 AT CM70S and AT CM3 Line Cards to implement the OAM based features The AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards support these operating modes Link Test mode MissingLink mode Smart MissingLink mode OAM visible mode OAM bypass mode u uuu iau The AT CM3 Line Cards support these operating modes Link Test mode MissingLink mode Smart MissingLink mode Link Test and OAM Visible mode MissingLink and OAM Visible mode Smart MissingLink and OAM Visible mode u uuuiuiu The AT CV Line Cards support these operating modes D Link Test mode D MissingLink mode o Smart MissingLink mode The AT CV Line Cards do not have an OAM operating mode and do not support the OAM based features The operating modes are discussed in the following sections Link Test Mo
179. cation To protect the card from unauthorized access you should change the community strings even if you do not plan to employ an SNMP application Anyone who learns the device s IP address and community strings can alter its settings with an SNMP program without having to know the manager account password To change the SNMP community strings from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 26 on page 100 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 4 Select IP Parameters to display the menu in Figure 29 on page 101 5 Enter the new community strings in the Get Community String Set Community String and Trap Community String fields A community string can have up to thirteen characters Spaces and special characters are permitted Community strings are case sensitive 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration Menu and select Save System Configurations To change the SNMP community strings from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 Select the SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab The SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab is shown in Figure 31 on page 107 3 To change the community strings click the Edit button to display a p
180. cations for SFP modules in remote AT CM2KO0S AT CM70S and AT CM3KOS Line Cards To view the SFP information from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Diagnostics to display the Diagnostics Menu shown in Figure 53 on page 148 2 Select Remote CM Line Card Diagnostics 3 From the Remote CM Line Card Diagnostics Menu select SFP Information The following prompt is displayed Enter Linecard Slot Number gt 4 Enter the slot number of the AT CM2KO0S AT CM70S Line Card or AT CM3KOS with the SFP module The following prompt is displayed Enter Linecard Port A or B gt 5 Enter the port of the SFP module An example of the SFP Information window is shown in Figure 89 on page 214 To use the web browser windows to view the SFP information 1 Select Diagnostics from the menu bar 2 Select the Remote CM Line Card tab 3 Select the SFP Information tab 4 When prompted select the Slot Number field and enter the slot number of the local line card connected to the remote card that has the SFP module you want to view You can specify only one slot number The information for the SFP module acting as port A on the remote line card is displayed Chapter 8 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card This chapter contains the following sections D Selecting the Management Method for the AT CM70S Line Card on page 242 D Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the AT CV5M02 Management Card
181. cedures To adjust the maximum packet size on the AT CM2KOS Line Card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration The Module Status and Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 58 on page 158 2 Select the AT CM2KOS Line Card you want to configure This displays the Module Configuration Menu for the line card An example of the menu is shown in Figure 63 on page 169 3 From the Module Configuration Menu select Configure Max Frame Size to display the Max Frame Size Config Menu shown in Figure 71 Max Frame Size Config Menu Module 14 gt Max Frame Size 1522 1518 Max Frame Size 1632 Return to Module Configuration Menu Figure 71 Max Frame Size Config Menu for the AT CM2KO0S Line Card 4 From the Max Frame Size Config Menu select one of the following frame sizes 1522 1518 Allows frames up to 1522 bytes This is the default value 1632 Allows frames of up to 1632 bytes The line card immediately implements your change 5 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Module Configuration Menu and select Line Card Configuration and Save Line Card Configuration This procedure is not supported in the web browser windows Converteon Management Software User s Guide Setting the Auto copy Feature Menus These procedures are used to set the auto copy feature on the chassis slots that contain AT CM Line Cards The auto copy setting of a slot dete
182. ctive or Passive OAM Loopback Support This parameter controls whether or not the OAM client on a line card will participate in OAM loopback tests by returning test packets received on port A from another OAM client This parameter only applies to OAM clients that return the test packets and has no affect on OAM clients that generate the test packets OAM Variable Requests Support This parameter controls whether or not the OAM client on a line card will respond to variable retrieval requests from other OAM clients A variable retrieval request is a query of an OAM client by another OAM client for the current value of a MIB object This parameter applies only to OAM clients that are queried and not to OAM clients that send the variable requests This parameter can be set to Yes or No on the local AT CM Line Cards because these line cards generate the test packets This parameter can be set to Yes or No on the local AT CM Line Cards because these line cards generate the variable requests The possible settings for this parameter on remote line cards are O Yes The remote line cards can participate in loopback tests by returning test packets o No The remote line cards cannot participate in loopback tests The possible settings on remote OAM compatible devices are O Yes The OAM client responds to variable retrieval requests This is the default setting Oo No The OAM client does not respond
183. cussion is explained in Configuration Files on page 32 When you enter a change to a parameter setting on the management card your change is automatically saved by the card in a file in DRAM For instance if you change the card s IP address adjust the speed or duplex setting of its 10 100Base TX port or enter the IP address of a syslog server the management card automatically records the new setting in the file However since this file is stored in DRAM it s only temporary which is why its referred to as the temporary master configuration file If you turn off the chassis or reset or remove the management card your changes are discarded If you want to permanently save your changes which in most cases you probably will you have to instruct the management card to copy its temporary master configuration file in DRAM to permanent storage in flash memory The configuration file after stored in flash will retain the settings even when the card is powered off The command in the menus for instructing the management card to save its configuration settings to permanent storage is in the System Configuration Menu The menus that lead to the command and the command itself are Main Menu gt Configuration gt System Configuration gt Save System Configuration Converteon Management Software User s Guide When you select this command the management card copies its settings from the temporary master configuration file in DRAM to fl
184. d prior to removing it from the chassis you want to manually update the configuration file on the standby card to insure that it has the latest settings Converteon Management Software User s Guide What to Configure First on the AT CV5M02 Management Card Changing the Manager and Operator Passwords This section has a few suggestions on what to configure during your initial management session of the management card The first management session has to be a local session from the Console port on the card For instructions on how to start a local management session refer to Starting a Local Management Session on page 72 Since the default passwords for the manager and operator accounts on the management card are included in this guide you should change them to protect the unit from unauthorized access To change the passwords 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration 4 From the System Parameters Configuration menu select Omega Options to display the Omega Options Menu 5 In the Omega Options Menu select Manager Password to change the Manager password or Operator Password to change the Operator password 6 Enter a new password of 0 to 16 alphanumeric characters A password is case sensitive and can consist of the letters A to Z in uppercase and lowercase and the numbers 1
185. d you could restore the previous configuration stored on the management card to the new card thereby giving the new line card the same configuration at its predecessor This relieves you from having to adjust the settings manually There are several commands for saving a line card s configuration in the master configuration file You can save the changes to each card individually or you can save the changes to all of the line cards at the same time If you re configuring just one card the former might be easier Converteon Management Software User s Guide But if you re configuring several cards the latter might be more convenient The command for saving a single line card s configuration is found in a submenu beneath the Module Configuration Menu which is the principal menu for configuring the settings of a line card An example of the menu is shown in Figure 63 on page 169 The command is in the Line Card Configuration menu When you select that menu option the menu in Figure 18 is displayed In that menu is the Save Line Card Configuration That command instructs the management card to update its master configuration file in flash memory with the latest configuration settings of the selected line card a Line Card Configuration UN Auto copy Line Card Configuration Display Current Configuration Display Last saved Configuration Display Default Configuration Restore Last Saved Configuration Return Line Card to Default Configurat
186. d image filenames in the TFTP client 323 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files 4 After you ve selected a download option and provided the necessary information the management card using the information you defined in its TFTP client contacts the TFTP server on your network and requests the appropriate files Note The management card or a line card may be damaged if you power off the chassis or remove it from the chassis while it is writing a file to flash memory 324 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Downloading New Management Software Using XMODEM The procedure in this section explains how to use XMODEM to download new versions of the management software programs to the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Line Cards Unlike TFTP downloads which allow you to update multiple line cards at the same time XMODEM downloads can only update one card at a time Note Allied Telesis recommends that you save the current configurations of all the AT CM Line Cards in the master configuration file before performing these procedures For instructions refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 Note Updating the AT S99 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card interrupts the card s operations The card will be unresponsive for approximately two minutes while it downloads and initializes the new software Your management session ends To resume managing the unit you h
187. d to view OAM status information on the remote OAM clients connected to the local line cards Menus To display status information for remote OAM clients from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration Menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 2 Select the local card connected to the remote OAM device whose status information you want to view The Module Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 63 on page 169 3 Select Port A the fiber optic port to display the Port Management Menu in Figure 64 on page 170 OAM is only supported on port A 4 From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration Menu shown in Figure 105 on page 254 5 From the OAM Configuration Menu select Show Remote OAM Information to display the Show Remote OAM Information window in Figure 114 4 Show Remote OAM Information b Module 11 Port A MAC Address 00 0c 46 9a 21 c9 Mux State Forward Parser State Forward Local Discovering Yes Local Stable NO Remote Discovering No Remote Stable NO Critical Event NO Dying Gasp NO Link Fault NO OAM Version 0x01 Config Revision 0x0003 vendor Info 0x00160001 vendor OUI 00 30 84 Mode Active Max OAMPDU Size 1518 Loopback support Yes Event Support No variable Support Yes Unidirect Support Yes S Return to OAM Configurations A Figure 114 Show Remote OAM Information Window This window is for viewing purpose
188. de next Link Test and OAM Visible Mode on page 49 MissingLink Mode on page 49 MissingLink and OAM Visible Mode on page 51 Smart MissingLink Mode on page 52 Smart MissingLink and OAM Visible OAM on page 53 OAM Visible Mode on page 53 OAM Bypass Mode on page 53 uuuuuuiuiu Link Test Mode Link Test and OAM Visible Mode MissingLink Mode Converteon Management Software User s Guide This operating mode is supported on all of the Converteon media converter line cards Contrary to its name this operating mode is not a diagnostic utility program Rather it simply displays on the Link LEDs on a line card the states of the links on the ports That is a port s Link LED will be on and a port s status in the management software will be online when the port has a link to a network device Conversely a port s Link LED will be off and its status in the management software will be offline when it does not have a link to a network device This operating mode is typically used when the ports on a card are connected to network devices that are unable to take advantage of the features of the MissingLink mode You might also use this mode instead of an OAM mode if the device connected to the fiber optic port is not OAM compatible meaning that you cannot implement the OAM features This mode is also particularly useful when you want to use the Link LEDs or the management software to troubleshoot a network p
189. decessor You can also restore previous configurations manually to the AT CM3 Line Cards You may find this valuable if you replace a line card in a slot where auto copy is disabled After installing the new line card you can instruct the management card to send the previous configuration to the card You can also restore previous configurations to the AT CM2 Line Cards using auto copy just as you can with the AT CM3 Line Card When one of these line cards is installed in a chassis slot where the auto copy feature is enabled it receives its configuration from the management card whenever itis reset or powered on However you cannot manually restore configurations to the AT CM2 Line Cards They do not support that feature So if you install a replacement AT CM2 Line Card in a slot where auto copy is disabled and you want the new card to have the same configuration as the previous card you have to manually configure it When the management card restores a configuration to a line card it takes the configuration not from the master file in DRAM but from the file in flash memory So keeping that file up to date is important Otherwise the line cards could receive incomplete or out of date configurations The best way to do that is to always remember to save your changes whenever you configure the line cards as explained in Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 The configuration of a line card in the master configuration file inclu
190. des the active or inactive state of a card s DIP switches These switches are an alternative method for setting the operating mode of a line card As such when a line card receives a new configuration from the management card the card s method for setting its operating mode along with the operating mode itself may change For example if you have a line card whose DIP switches are active and you restore to it a previous configuration where the operating mode is controlled by the management software the card s DIP switches will be deactivated and its operating mode will be determined by the management software Here is an overview of the configuration process that occurs when an AT CM2 or AT CM3 Line Card is installed in an active chassis or when a chassis is powered on 1 The line card initializes its management software a process that takes approximately one minute to complete During this process the line card uses the default values for its parameter settings to forward network traffic through its ports AT CM Line Cards and Remote Peer Management Converteon Management Software User s Guide 2 After the line card initializes its software it queries for a management card over the backplane of the chassis 3 If the chassis does not have a management card the line card configures its operating parameters using the settings in its configuration file in flash memory 4 Ifthe chassis has a management card the following occurs
191. e High Low Warning Range High Low Digital Diagnostic Monitoring Information ATI 000 AT SPLX10 4 403236R075100037 07122301 55 2500 100 0000 40 0000 95 0000 30 0000 3 2024 3 4650 3 1350 3 4000 3 2000 31 7600 80 9280 10 4640 70 9280 20 4640 0 2388 0 4784 0 1202 0 3800 0 1513 0 0000 1 0000 0 0079 0 7943 0 0126 216 Figure 90 SFP Information Tab Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management This chapter has the following sections o Configuring the Remote Line Cards with the Menus on page 218 0 Configuring the Remote AT CM Line Cards with the Web Browser Windows on page 228 o Displaying the Version Numbers of the Remote AT CM Line Cards on page 235 D Displaying the MAC Addresses and Serial Numbers of the Remote AT CM Line Cards on page 238 o Displaying SFP Module Information from the Remote AT CM Line Cards on page 240 For background information refer to Remote Peer Management on page 56 For instructions on how to configure the AT CM Line Cards for this feature refer to Configuring the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM70S Line Cards for the OAM based Features on page 90 217 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Configuring the Remote Line Cards with the Menus The menus let you perform these functions on remote line cards 0
192. e it forwards traffic using its default parameter settings To restore the last saved configuration to a line card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 2 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the AT CM3 Line Card you want to configure You can configure only one line card at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 63 on page 169 is displayed 3 Select Line Card Configuration to display the menu in Figure 72 on page 183 4 To view the parameter settings of the card s last saved configuration before activating them on the line card select Display Last Saved Configuration If the card is new to the slot the settings are from the previous card installed in the slot If the fields are empty the master configuration file does not have a previous configuration for this slot or the previous and current line cards of the slot are different models 5 To return the line card to its last saved configuration return to the Line Card Configuration menu and select Restore Last Saved Configuration 195 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 196 6 At the confirmation prompt select Yes to restore the settings or No to cancel the procedure If you select Yes the parameter settings on the card are returned to the last saved configuration The line card will reset if its
193. e set to the MissingLink and OAM Visible mode or the Smart MissingLink and OAM Visible mode you have to connect their twisted pair ports to live network equipment Otherwise the fiber optic ports will not establish a connection with each other If the enclosures are close to each other you can for the purposes of this test connect the twisted 95 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session 96 pair ports of the two cards together This requirement does not apply to the OAM Visible mode for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards or to the Link Test and OAM Visible mode for the AT CM3 Line Cards Start a local management session on the management card For directions refer to Starting a Local Management Session on page 72 From the Main Menu select Remote Module Status and Configuration An example of the menu is shown in Figure 91 on page 218 If the local line card in the chassis with the management card has established a remote peer connection to the other line card the second card appears as an entry in this menu This would indicate that the OAM clients on the two line cards were configured correctly Note The AT CM Line Cards have to be in the OAM operational state to support the OAM based features The cards when powered on or reset may take up to two minutes to achieve this state because they have to initialize their management software and negotiate the OAM states with their local or remote counterpart If the remote li
194. e 10 100Base TX port is not adjustable To restore the default setting of Auto Negotiation on the 10 100Base TX port from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration 2 Select the AT CV5M02 Management Card in the menu to display the Module Configuration Menu shown in Figure 35 on page 120 3 Select Return Management Card Port Configuration to Default 4 Atthe confirmation prompt select Yes to restore the default setting of Auto Negotiation on the port or No to cancel the procedure 5 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Main Menu and select Configuration System Configuration and Save System Configuration To restore the default setting of Auto Negotiation on the 10 100Base TX port from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status and Configuration from the menu bar 2 Inthe Chassis View click the 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5MO2 Management Card Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the management card The Port A tab for the management card is shown in Figure 45 on page 136 3 Select the General tab shown in Figure 36 on page 121 4 Click Return Management Card Port Configuration to Default Setting 5 Atthe confirmation prompt click OK restore the default setting of Auto Negotiation on the 10 100Base TX port or Cancel to cancel the procedure Converteon Management Software User s Guide 6 To save your changes in th
195. e Card is reset it has to initialize its management software During the initialization process which takes approximately one minute the line card forwards network traffic using the default values for its parameter settings Afterwards it configures its parameters using the settings from the AT CV5M02 Management Card or from its own configuration file depending on the auto copy setting of its slot The AT CV Line Cards do not have management software and immediately resume forwarding network traffic after the reset For instructions on how to reset the AT CV5M02 Management Card refer to Resetting the Management Card on page 119 To reset all of the media converter line cards in the chassis from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Diagnostics The Diagnostics Menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 148 2 From the Diagnostics Menu select Chassis Diagnostics to display the Chassis Diagnostics Menu in Figure 54 on page 148 3 Select Reset Chassis and Restart All CV amp CM Line Cards 4 Atthe confirmation prompt select Yes to reset all of the media converter line cards or No to cancel the procedure If you choose Yes the following message is displayed The chassis will reset when FLASH writes are complete Afterwards the Chassis Diagnostics Menu is displayed again 5 To monitor the status of the line cards return to the Main Menu and select Module Status and Configuration When a line card has completed the reset
196. e Cards See also AT CM Line Cards default settings 340 described 40 AT CM2KOS Line Card setting maximum frame size 182 AT CM3 Line Cards See also AT CM Line Cards default settings 342 described 42 AT CM70S Line Card configuring T1 E1 ports from AT CV5M02 Manage ment Card 246 configuring T1 E1 ports from Console port 249 Console port settings 249 default settings 340 selecting management method for T1 E1 ports 242 universal asynchronous receiver transmitter UART setting 242 AT CV Line Cards configuration files 32 default settings 343 described 44 displaying serial numbers of 210 displaying status of 158 resetting 201 setting operating modes on 176 AT CV1000 Chassis 38 AT CV1200 Chassis 38 AT CV1203 Chassis 38 AT CV5000 Chassis 38 AT CV5M02 Management Card See also standby AT CV5M02 Management Card default settings 338 displaying MAC address of 148 displaying serial number of 210 downloading configuration files to 328 downloading software to with TFTP 320 downloading software to with XMODEM 325 features 22 management access methods 26 master configuration files 32 naming 88 104 111 resetting 119 restoring to default settings 140 SNMPv3 configuration files 37 uploading configuration files from 328 AT S102 Management Software See also AT CM Line Cards default settings 342 371 Index displaying remote version numbers 235 displaying version numbers 207 downloading with TFTP 320 downloading with XMODEM 325 AT S
197. e Configuration Menu shown in Figure 63 on page 169 From the Module Status and Configuration Menu select the AT CM Line Card you want to configure This displays the Module Configuration Menu shown in Figure 63 on page 169 You can configure only one card at a time Select Port A the fiber optic port on the line card to display the Port Management Menu shown in Figure 64 on page 170 The OAM client is supported only on Port A From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configurations menu in Figure 105 d OAM Configurations S Module 4 Port A OAM Configuration Show Local OAM Information Show Remote OAM Information Show OAM Statistics OAM Loopback Test Send OAM Variable Request uda to Port Management Menu J Figure 105 OAM Configurations Menu Note If the Port Management Menu doesn t have the OAM Configurations selection the line card is not set to an OAM operating mode Converteon Management Software User s Guide 5 From the OAM Configuration Menu select OAM Configuration to display the OAM Configuration submenu shown in Figure 106 d OAM Configuration E Module 4 Port A Admin State Enabled Mode Passive Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 Unidirectional Support Yes Loopback Support Yes Link Event Support NO variable Retrieval Support Yes REGE to OAM Configurations 27 Figure 106 OAM Configuration Submenu The parameters in the
198. e Main Menu select Diagnostics The Diagnostics Menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 148 2 To view the version numbers of the management software for the local line cards select Local CM Line Card Diagnostics to display the menu in Figure 83 on page 199 3 Select Image Version An example of the Line Card Module Software Image Version window is shown in Figure 85 on page 208 This window is for viewing purposes only 207 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 208 4 Line Card Module Software Image Version N Converteon Module App Ver BootLdr ver 1 AT CV5M02 v4 0 1 2 Reg11 AT CM3KOS v4 0 1 v1 7 0 3 Reg20 AT CM301 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 4 Reg21 AT CM301 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 5 Area2a AT CM301 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 6 Area2b AT CM302 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 7 a121 AT CM202 v2 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 8 Reg12 AT CM202 v2 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 9 AT CM202 v2 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 10 AT CM212A 1 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 11 AT CV102 12 AT CV102 13 AT CV102 14 AT CV102 15 Unequi pped 16 Unequi pped 17 Unequi pped 18 Unequi pped le any key to continue E Figure 85 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window The columns in the window are described in Table 24 Table 24 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window Row Description Module This column displays the slot numbers the names and the model names
199. e aE A E a EST Ha asm du ote sete que ue e eae uu suce Eure arena Seded 90 Configuring the OAM Settings inneren tede recede ee Ue Ee dete te aen Re ence enirn ede dee dee Pede edge deed e edet 93 Testing the OAM Settings iterare eie e od equite bay aide pepe pie bb i e dde bed ie oU DES ce exei 95 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card sese eme eere 99 Assigning an IP Address Configuration seesssesssseeeeeenenenee nennen nennen enr nen nnne nennen nr nenne ern EEEE 100 MGS sione oe RED e eU DIRE E RUD EE RE eie 100 lA acier T E 103 Assigning alNamie eut REN RR E D ERN RARE ENRICO P ERU TERRE UU 104 Men s dente eiae tede eh Sinead rte i edu cue oti e aedi eee Ce S eI eS dip d dnd 104 Web Browser teenie leis i A ee ee AS 104 Assigning Contact and Location Information ssssseeeeeeneeee nennen ene nenen enne EE eerie nens ennemi rennes 106 MID M od 106 Web BIOWSeE 52 ete eot e ete ete qeodiiit iste qa in d d aat etit exeat 106 Configuring the SNMP Community Strings essen eee nennen ener ene nennen nennen nennen nns 108 MODUS iter dere REA hee chte das evsvan sete AMI REDE ERUEBU RR E ERE ERE QURE RR E ER ER A UB 108 lad m S 108 Specifying the IP Addresses of the S
200. e master configuration file refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 139 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Restoring the Default Values on the AT CVSM02 Management Card 140 Menus In this section are the procedures for restoring the default values to all of the following operating parameters on the AT CV5M02 Management Card uuuuuuuu uu u uou u IP address configuration Name location and contact IP addresses of SNMP trap receivers SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c community strings SNMPv3 configurations Management security i e passwords console timer etc Network Time Protocol client Syslog client 10 100Base TX port Temperature threshold Console port s baud rate Note Before performing these procedures you should save the current configurations of the AT CM Line Cards to the master configuration file For instructions refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 Note A management card resets when its parameter settings are returned to the default values It will be unresponsive to management commands for one minute while it initializes its management software To resume managing the device start a new local management session on the unit Restoring the default settings on the AT CV5M02 Management Card does not affect the parameter settings of the media converter line cards in the chassis nor does it interrupt their network operations To restore
201. e menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration The Configuration menu is shown in Figure 26 on page 100 From the Configuration menu select System Configuration From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 From the System Configuration Menu select System Clock Configuration to display the menu in Figure 34 on page 115 Select the NTP Server field and enter the IP address of the NTP server Select the NTP UTC Offset field and enter the time difference in hours between the Universal Time Coordinated UTC and your local time The range is between 12 and 12 hours The default is O hours To enable the client select Enable NTP To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration Menu and select Save System Configurations To configure the NTP client from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Configuration from the menu bar If the System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 30 on page 103 in the System Information section click the Edit button Select the NTP Server field in the pop up window and enter the IP address of the NTP server Select the NTP UTC Offset field and enter the time difference in hours between the Universal Time Coordinated UTC and your local time The range is between 12 and 12 hours The default is O hours 117 Chapter 5 Config
202. e minute Afterwards the card configures its operating parameters from the settings in its configuration file or from the management card The AT CV Line Cards which do not have management software immediately resume normal operations To change the operating mode of a line card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the line card you want to configure You can configure only one line card at a time This displays the Module Configuration Menu in Figure 63 on page 169 From the Module Configuration Menu select Configure Operating Mode The next menu you ll see is the Operating Mode Configuration Menu This menu for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards is different from the menu for the AT CM3 Line Cards Here is the menu that you ll see for the AT CM2 and AT CM706S Line Cards a Operating Mode Configuration Menu A Module 4 Smart Missing Link Mode Missing Link Mode OAM BYPASS Mode OAM Visible Mode Link Test Mode Line Card DIP Switch Mode LS Return to Module Configuration Menu E Figure 67 Operating Mode Configuration Menu for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards 4 5 6 Converteon Management Software User s Guide If you configuring an AT CM3 Line Card here is the menu you ll see Operating Mode Configuration Men
203. e slot number 322 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 41 Image Download via TFTP Menu Parameter Description Multiple CM Line Card Images by Card Type Select this option to upgrade the management software on multiple local or remote AT CM Line Cards When you select this option the following prompt is displayed 1 AT CM3xx CM3Kxx 2 AT CM2x2 3 AT CM2Kx 4 AT CM70x Enter card type group gt Do one of the following O To update the AT 8102 Management Software on local or remote AT CM301 AT CM302 and AT CM3KOS Line Cards enter 1 to select AT CM3xx CM3Kxx O To update the AT S73 Management Software on local or remote AT CM201 AT CM202 AT CM202 1 AT CM202 2 AT CM212A 1 and AT CM212B 1 Line Cards enter 2 to select AT CM2x2 o To update the local or remote AT CM2KOS Line Cards enter 3 for AT CM2Kx 0 To update the local or remote AT CM70S Line Cards enter 3 for AT CM70x The following prompt is displayed 1 Local Line Cards Only 2 Remote Line Cards only 3 Both Local and Remote Line Cards Enter card type group Use this prompt to specify whether you want to upgrade the local line cards of the selected card type the remote line cards or both All CM Line Cards Image Select this option to upgrade the management software on all of the local or remote AT CM Line Cards The upgrade process skips any line cards that do not have define
204. ect the Save System Configuration option 147 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis 148 Menus In this section are the procedures for displaying operational information about the power supplies and fans in the chassis The information also includes information about the management card including its MAC address and the states of the flash memory and the Console port Note These procedures do not perform any diagnostic utilities and are not disruptive to the operations of the management card or the media converter line cards in the chassis To view general information about the chassis from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Diagnostics The Diagnostics Menu is shown in Figure 53 FK Diagnostics Menu SN Converteon Chassis Diagnostics Local CM Line Card Diagnostics Remote CM Line Card Diagnostics Real time IPC Message Analyzer Return to Main Menu A Figure 53 Diagnostics Menu 2 From the Diagnostics Menu select Chassis Diagnostics to display the menu in Figure 54 Chassis Diagnostics Menu Converteon Chassis Information Reset Chassis and Restart All CV amp CM Line Cards Return to Diagnostics Menu Figure 54 Chassis Diagnostics Menu Converteon Management Software User s Guide 3 From the Diagnostics Menu select Chassis Information to display the Chassis Diagnostics Menu The example in Figure 55
205. ed to be unique Notify View Name The value that you configured with the View Name parameter in the SNMPv3 View Table A Notify View Name allows the users assigned to this Group Name to send traps permitted in the specified View This value does not need to be unique Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Context Prefix This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Access Table and is set to null Context Match This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Access Table and is set to exact Row Status This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Access Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 299 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Configuring the SNMPv3 Group Table 300 This section contains a description of the SNMPv3 Group Table and how to create delete and modify table entries The SNMPv3 Group Table allows you to associate a User Name with a Group Name The User Name is configured in the Configure SNMPv3 User Table menu while the Group Name is configured in the Configure SNMPv3 Access Table menu In addition the configuration in the Configure S
206. efault password friend and the operator account has the username operator and the default password operator The usernames and passwords are case sensitive For the instructions on changing the passwords refer to Configuring the Management Security on page 111 To change to a different account after you ve started a management session you have to log out from your current session and log in again For example if you log on using the operator account and afterwards want to configure the parameter settings of the line cards you have to log out of the operator account and log in again with the manager account Note The management card can support up to one manager session and ten operator sessions at the same time 25 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Management Access Local Management Remote Telnet Management Remote Web Browser Management 26 There are four ways to manage the Converteon product Local management Remote Telnet management Remote web browser management uuu Remote SNMP management The AT CV5MO2 Management Card has an RS 232 Console port for local out of band management This type of management which has to be performed at the chassis hence the term local is accomplished with the management cable that ships with the card and a terminal or a PC with a terminal emulator program The management card does not need an IP address for local management Your initial manageme
207. efer to Event Log on page 24 Menus To display the event log from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration The Administration Menu is shown in Figure 37 a Administration Menu E Converteon Ping a Remote System Syslog Server Address Null not configured Syslog Facility Code 1 Event Log Activity Monitor Start Activity Monitor gt Stop Activity Monitor Return to Main Menu E Figure 37 Administration Menu 2 From the Administration Menu select Event Log to display the Event Log Menu window shown in Figure 38 i Event Log Menu Converteon Display Event Log Clear Event Log a to Administration Menu Figure 38 Event Log Menu 3 From the Event Log Menu select Display Event Log An example of the event log is shown in Figure 39 The messages are displayed from oldest to newest 122 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Va 10 12 08 11 32 02 10 12 08 11 32 05 10 12 08 11 32 10 10 12 08 11 32 15 Total Events 8 Displaying 1 to 4 ModuleName Message REPORT Region21 Line Card 2 Port 1 Online REPORT Region21 Line Card 2 Port 2 Online REPORT Region22 Line Card 3 Port 1 Online REPORT Region22 Line Card 3 Port 2 Online N Next Page P Previous Page F First Page L Last Page R Return Converteon E Event Log Figure 39 Event Log The columns in the event log are described in Table 12 Table 12 Event Log Format
208. efix Read View Name viewUSMmanager Write View Name viewUSMmanager Notify View Name viewUSMmanager Storage Type Nonvolatile Configure SNMPv3 Group Table Security Name commpublic Security Model v1 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Group Name grpcommpublic Storage Type Nonvolatile Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table Notify Name sysadminTrap Notify Tag sysadminTag Notify Type Trap Storage Type Nonvolatile Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table Target Address Name host408 Ip Address 198 35 11 1 UDP Port 162 Timeout 1500 Retries 3 Tag List sysadminTag Target Parameters SNMPmgrPC Storage Type NonVvolatile Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Target Parameters Name SNMPmanagerPC User Security Name systemadmin24 Security Model v3 Security Level P AuthPriv Storage Type NonVvolatile 347 Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples SNMPv3 Operator Configuration 348 This section provides a sample configuration for an Operator with a User Name of atiengr77 Since this user will only send messages to a group and not an SNMP host you do not need to configure message notification for this user Configure SNMPv3 User Table Menu User Name atiengr77 Authentication Protocol MD5 Privacy Protocol None Storage Type NonVvolatile Configure SNMPv3 View Table Menu View Name internet View Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 or internet Subtree Mask View Type Included
209. eg20 AT CM302 OAM LT o o 10240 ON N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 00 Y 0 0 Y 4 Reg21 AT CM302 OAM LT o o 10240 ON N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 00 Y 0 0 Y 5 Area2a AT CM302 OAM ML o o 10240 ON N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 00 Y 0 0 Y 6 Area2b AT CM302 ET o o 10240 ON N v400 100 Y 0 0 00 Y 0 0 Y 7 al21 AT CM3K0S OAM LT o 10240 0N N V400 1G Y 0 0 oo G Yy 0 0 Y 8 Reg12 AT CM202 v2 OAM V o o N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 00 Y 0 0 Y 9 AT CM202 v2 OAM V o o N v400 100 v 0 0 oo 00 Y 0 0 Y 10 AT CM202 v2 OAM V o o N v400 100 v 0 0 oo 00 Y 0 0 Y 11 AT CV102 LT 100 00 12 AT CV102 ET SN m oa ae SSS N 100 Sem Te E 00 13 AT CV102 Eh 100 00 14 AT CV102 2 a 100 00 15 AT CV102 BT 100 00 More Module Status and Configuration Figure 58 Module Status and Configuration Menu The columns in the menu are described in Table 19 Table 19 Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description MODULE INFO Mod Name This column lists the chassis slot numbers and the names of the AT CM Line Cards For instructions on how to assign names refer to Assigning Names to the AT CM Line Cards on page 181 The AT CV Line Cards do not support names CardType
210. el Storage Type Figure 137 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Tab 310 Converteon Management Software User s Guide The parameters are defined in Table 39 Table 39 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Parameters Parameter Description Target Parameters Name A name for the entry of up to 32 alphanumeric characters User Security Name The user name of the appropriate entry in the SNMPv3 User Table Security Model 1 v1 2 v2c 3 v3 The Security Model for this Security Name or User Name The possible values are 1 v1 This value associates the Security Name or User Name with the SNMPv1 protocol 2 v2c This value associates the Security Name or User Name with the SNMPv2c protocol 3 v3 This value associates the Security Name or User Name with the SNMPv3 protocol The SNMPv3 protocol allows you to configure the group to authenticate SNMPv3 entities users and to encrypt messages 311 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Table 39 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Parameters Parameter Description Security Level A AuthNoPriv P AuthPriv N NoauthNoPriv The possible values are Note This value must match the security level of the corresponding user name in the SNMPv3 User Table A AuthNoPriv This option provides authentication but no privacy protocol The SNMP user is authenticated but without encryption You can select this value if you configured the
211. ely 308 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table This section describes the parameters for entries in the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table which links the user security information with the message notification information in the SNMPv3 Notify Table and the SNMPv3 Target Address Table In the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table you specify the SNMP parameters that are used when a message is generated to a target or host IP address The SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table also links a User Name and its related security information called user security information with a host The user security information consists of the following parameters listed in the SNMPv3 tables where they are configured o User Name parameter configured in the SNMPv3 User Table menu D View Name parameter configured in the SNMPv3 View Table menu O Group Name Security Model and Security Level parameters configured in the SNMPv3 Access Table D User Name Security Model and Group Name configured in the SNMPv3 Group Table When you enter user security information in an SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table entry the information must match the configuration in the SNMPv3 tables listed above If the user security information in the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table entry does not match the configuration in the tables listed above messages are not sent on behalf of the user Note In the SNMPv3 Target Parameters
212. enn enne nen ennemi enne 264 IA re E rE M I 264 lupe LEM 270 Displaying OAM Information on Remote OAM Clients ssssesseeneneen eene nennen nemen nene enne nnns 271 MOnUS sitet EI ERE DU e erae ideo EM PU D e RERUM iceeatqdebes 271 lilii C I 272 Displaying OAM Statistics erre reete ee eda eed a Ve Ti eee Hd e eee Donde ae de Ru see oie eei dee eee eR eqs 273 Men s tete etes de ente a tetto ot ee ese deed Met d Lett ead cite ested 273 Web BrOWS6EL n ai eR e Ae e ER ER al 274 Sending OAM Variable Requests to View MIB Variables sessesseeeee eem ene ennemi 275 MIU rm A 275 Web BFOWSSF eoa a e ee edic fei paiete tbc tede tact stie Listes da etes Ee de ids ossa enna 276 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPV3 ooo cece cece ee eee eene nennen nrnen nene en nene entren nr nennen nennen enne nenne 279 SNMPYy39 OVetVIOW 5 2 e ropa ie ee ege LE ele aee eese ai tope eod i Ue fe e deseo deu et feste 280 SNMPv3 Authentication Protocols n rises a entera cene sente E a dede aei a pedes 281 SNMPv3 Privacy Protocol denote Se iei tetra e aite eerte Pub ge ade zo petep lesu ere pde dd tie needs e dede dtc ee abre fne idee 281 SNMPV3 MIB VIEWS io 281 SNMPvy3 Storage Types iet ee dedique ntt dea he tite tet ede Di d o eiit testo quide dex addi decehen des 283 SNMPv3 Message Notif
213. ension should be cfg c Click the Upload button 334 Converteon Management Software User s Guide 4 To download the master configuration file to the management card from a TFTP server a In the Configuration File Download section select the TFTP Server IP Address field and enter the IP address of the TFTP server on your network Select the Configuration File Name field and enter the filename of the configuration file you want to download from the TFTP server The extension should be cfg Click the Download button The download begins immediately There is no confirmation prompt After receiving the master configuration file from the TFTP server the card writes the file to flash memory and resets Afterwards it initializes its management software and configures its parameters according to the settings in the downloaded configuration file To resume managing the card you have to start a new management session If the auto copy settings for the chassis slots is activated in the downloaded configuration file the settings on the line cards may change This may disrupt network operations and may result in the loss of network traffic For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 335 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files 336 Appendix A Default Settings for the Management Card and the Line Cards This appendix provides the default settings for the management card and the line c
214. ent Software The AT CM Line Cards send this signal if the AT CV1203 Chassis has both a primary power supply and a redundant power supply and just one of the power supplies loses power The signal indicates that the remote chassis is continuing to operate after having lost power on one of its power modules The following subsections explain how this feature works on the AT CM2 and AT CM3 Line Cards Converteon Management Software User s Guide AT CM2 Line Cards The AT CM2 Line Cards cannot detect if an AT CV1203 Chassis that has two power supplies loses power on just one of them Instead a management card is required If a single power supply fails it is the management card that detects the loss and generates the signal sending it over the backplane in the chassis to the line card which transmits it to its local counterpart in the AT CV5000 Chassis This feature is illustrated in Figure 9 Theremote AT CV 1203 Chassis loses power on one power supply ac k 2 Themanagementcard sends CoS B lt the first RPS failure signal to s se the AT CM2 Line Card over the backplane The remote AT CM2 Card sends the signal to its local counterpart in the AT CV5000 Chassis The local AT CM2 Card sends the signal over the backplane to the management card Y lt ee o6 e pe iz eo eo IF F gt re ee e Ie ii ca p a j Ll
215. ent card issues two requests to the DHCP server If there is no response from the server the management card operates without an IP address configuration If you want to learn the MAC address of the management card to enter on the DHCP server refer to Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis on page 148 The management card does not have a MAC address Instead it adopts the MAC address of the backplane of the chassis as its MAC address to communicate with your network 7 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration Menu and select Save System Configurations Converteon Management Software User s Guide Web Browser To view the IP address configuration of the management card from the web browser windows Note You cannot use the web browser windows to change the IP address configuration of the management card To change that information you have to use the menus from either a local management session or a remote Telnet management session 1 Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 Ifthe System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 30 System SNMPvi amp SNMPv2 SNMPv3 All CM Line Cards Files System Information System Mame System Date 09 15 08 System Time 12 12 57 NTP Server 0 0 0 0 NTP UTC Offset 0 NTP Disable Edit Omega Options Manager Password ROR AOR ne Local Omega Enable Operator Password Se AER JEEN a ROE Remote
216. enview This type of management requires a familiarity with Management Information Bases MIBs To manage the product with SNMP you have to load and compile the ATCV5000 mib file found on the Allied Telesis web site into your SNMP program 27 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Active and Standby Management Cards 28 The AT CV5000 Chassis can have two AT CV5M02 Management Cards The second card functions as a backup card should the primary management card fail or have to be removed from the chassis When the AT CV5000 Chassis has two management cards one of the cards functions as the active card The other is placed in a standby mode Your local and remote management sessions have to be performed through the active card You can discern the states of the cards by examining their RDY LEDs On the active card this LED will be on it will be off on the standby card The management cards automatically determine their active and standby states when the chassis is powered on Their states are based on their chassis slot numbers The management card in the lower numbered slot acts as the active card and the card in the higher numbered slot functions as the standby card For example if two management cards are installed in slots 3 and 5 of the chassis the card in slot 3 becomes the active card and the card in slot 5 is the standby card The standby card continuously monitors the state of the active card over the backplane inside the
217. eport The line card in slot n was rebooted using AT CV1203 the AT CV5M02 Management Card AT CV5000 Power Module A B AT CV5000 Report The AT PWR14 or AT PWR15 Power has been Installed Supply Module was installed in the AT CV5000 Chassis 126 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 13 General Event Messages Message Chassis Classi Definition fication Power Module A B has been Removed AT CV5000 Report The AT PWR14 or AT PWR15 Power Supply Module was removed from the AT CV5000 Chassis The event messages listed in Table 14 are restricted to the AT CM3KOS Line Card and to SFP modules that support digital diagnostic monitoring DDM The messages are grouped into Local Messages and Remote Messages Local messages are generated by AT CM3KOS Line Cards in the same chassis as the management card Remote messages are sent by remote line cards through remote peer management For local messages the variable n identifies the slot of the AT CM3K0S Line Card that generated the message For remote messages the variable identifies in the local chassis the slot of the local line card that received the message from the remote AT CM3KOS Line Card The values that generate these messages on SFP modules are vendor specific and are not adjustable Table 14 SFP Module Event Messages linecard n Message Classification Definition Local Messages SFP Insertion local
218. er configuration file but rather in an auxiliary file called the SNMPv3 configuration file Just like the master configuration files there are two of them one in DRAM which is updated automatically by the management card whenever you change a value in the SNMPv3 tables and the other in flash memory which is updated in response to the save command The management software does not have different save commands for updating the master configuration file and the SNMPv3 configuration file to flash memory for permanent storage Instead the same command Save System Configuration stores both files When you enter that command the management card stores both files the master configuration file and the SNMPv3 configuration file from DRAM to flash memory For more information about this command refer to Saving the Configuration of the AT CV5MO02 Management Card on page 78 37 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Converteon Chassis 38 Table 1 lists the four chassis in the Converteon product line Table 1 Converteon Chassis Supports Supports Number of PP Redundant Chassis Redundant Slots Power Suppi Management PP y Card AT CV1000 1 No No AT CV1200 2 Yes No AT CV1203 2 Yes No AT CV5000 18 Yes Yes The AT CV1200 Chassis and AT CV1203 Chassis are physically identical The only difference between them is that the AT CV1203 Chassis supports the OAM based dying gasp feature which is explained in
219. ermanent storage There is no save command for you to perform and the settings are retained even if the remote line cards are powered off or are removed from their chassis But just like the configurations of the local line cards the parameter settings of the remote line cards can also be stored in the master configuration file of the local AT CV5M02 Management Card Once stored there the configurations can be restored to the remote cards if the need arises For instance if you replace a remote line card you could restore the predecessor s configuration to the new card so that it has the same settings The commands for saving the configurations of the remote line cards to the master configuration file are the same as those for the local cards To save the configuration of a single remote line card use the Save Line Card Configuration command from the menus or the Save Current Configuration from the web browser windows To save the configurations of all of the local and remote line cards use the Save All CM Line Card Configuration menu command or web browser button If the AT CV5000 Chassis has two AT CV5M02 Management Cards an active card and a standby card the active card automatically updates the master configuration file on the standby card This is explained in Active and Standby Management Cards on page 36 You can manually update the master configuration file on the standby card using two of the commands in the Management Card
220. ernet 100Base FX fiber Duplex SC 50 125 or 2 kilometers 1 24 optic 62 5 125 micron miles multi mode 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet AT CM3K0S Fast or Gigabit SFP slot for a Varies by SFP Varies by SFP Ethernet 100Base FX or a transceiver transceiver 1000Base X transceiver 10 100 1000Base RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters T twisted pair 328 feet 1 SFP transceiver sold separately Table 4 lists the common features Table 4 Features of the AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards Twisted Pair Port u uuu iu IEEE 802 3u Auto Negotiation Half or full duplex mode Auto MDI MDI X RJ 45 connector IEEE 802 3x flow control in full duplex mode at 10 or 100 Mbps SFP Slot AT CM3KOS Line Card Supports 100Base FX and 1000Base X SFP modules SFP module purchased separately 42 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 4 Features of the AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards Operating Modes OAM u uuuuiu Link Test MissingLink Smart MissingLink Link Test and OAM Visible MissingLink and OAM Visible Smart MissingLink and OAM Visible Loopback test Remote Converteon line card management Remote management software downloads Dying gasp Variable requests Other Features ee ee O0 02 02 2 0 Q 0 Q m Jumbo frames up to 10 240 bytes Ingress and egress packet rate limiting LEDs for unit and
221. ers Name User Security Name Security Model Security Level Storage Type Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2K0S Line Card If you set packet rate limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card you need to know that the feature s actual performance may not correspond with the value you specify The graph in Figure 145 shows the correlations between the ingress and egress rate limit values and the actual average rate limits For example the actual packet rate limit for any value between 150 000 and 250 000 is 285 714 packets For instructions on how to set packet rate limiting refer to Configuring the Port Parameters on the AT CM Line Cards on page 169 Average Rate Limit Result Kbps 300000 250000 200000 150000 100000 50000 i 0 50000 100000 150000 200000 250000 300000 Value You Specified Kbps Figure 145 Rate Limit Input vs Hardware Configured Values Table 49 lists the values in table format When you see multiple values in the Specified Rate Limit Kbps column and Same in the Average Rate Limit Kbps column the average rate limit value equals the specified rate limit When you see multiple values in the Specified Rate Limit Kbps column and one value in the Average Rate Limit Kbps column all of the specified values result in the same average rate limit 351 Appendi
222. ers of the management software programs on the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Line Cards This field may be blank for AT CM Line Cards that have a different version of AT S73 Management Software than the version of the management software on the management card This field will also be blank for AT CV Line Cards because they do not have management software FIBER PORT or COPPER PORT ST This column displays the states of the ports The possible states are o The port has establish a link to a network device o o The port has not establish a link to a network device SP This column displays the speeds of the ports The possible speeds are 3 10 10 Mbps o 100 100 Mbps o 1G 1 Gbps FC This column displays the status of flow control on the ports of the AT CM Line Cards The possible states are o Y Flow control is enabled on the port o N Flow control is disabled on the port IngRL This column displays the settings of the ingress rate limiting filters on the ports on the AT CM Line Cards The value 0 means rate limiting has not been set on the port This is the default setting For instructions on setting this parameter refer to Configuring the Port Parameters on the AT CM Line Cards on page 169 This feature is not supported on the AT CV Line Cards 162 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 19 Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Desc
223. es bytes and bits as it transmitted Test frames are sixty octets in length You can stop the test at any time by selecting Stop Loopback Test from the OAM Loopback Test Menu To resume normal network operations on the local and remote line cards select Disable Remote Loopback To clear the statistics counters select Clear Loopback Test Statistics 261 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 262 Web Browser Chassis View Menu Port or Status Configuration Slot Number 3 To perform the loopback test from the web browser windows A Caution This test is disruptive to network operations Some network traffic may be lost The local and remote media converter line cards do not forward network traffic during the test 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 From the Chassis View click Port A the fiber optic on the AT CM Line Card you want to perform the loopback test Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line Card 3 If the Port A tab is not selected select it The OAM client is only supported on Port A 4 Click the OAM Loopback Test tab to display the OAM Loopback Test tab in Figure 110 Module Status amp Configuration View Help Line Card Configuration Setting Port OAM OAM OAM OAM OAM Variable Statistics Configuration Information Statistics Loopback Test Request Card
224. es that encountered a collision and that were not counted in the Single Multiple Excessive or Late counter Single The number of frames that were successfully transmitted after they encountered one collision This counter applies only to half duplex mode Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 22 Port Statistics for the AT CM3 Line Cards Statistic Description Multiple The number of frames that were successfully transmitted after they encountered more than one collision This counter applies only to half duplex mode Excessive The number of frames that were discarded after they encountered 16 consecutive collisions This counter applies only to half duplex mode Late The number of times that a collision was detected late in the transmission of a frame This counter applies only to half duplex mode OutFCSErr The number of egress frames with an invalid FCS 64 Octets The number of ingress and egress packets with a length of 64 octets This counter includes packets with errors 65 to 127 Octets The number of ingress and egress packets with a length of 65 to 127 octets This counter includes packets with errors 128 to 255 Octets The number of ingress and egress packets with a length of 127 to 255 octets This counter includes packets with errors 256 to 511 Octets The number of ingress and egress packets with a length of 256 to 511 octets This counter includes pac
225. essages or traps the user can send A trap is a type of SNMP message After you have created a user you define SNMPv3 message notification This consists of determining where messages are sent and what types of messages can be sent This configuration is similar to the SNMPv1 and SNMP v2c configuration because you configure IP addresses of trap receivers or hosts In addition with the SNMPv3 implementation you decide what types of messages are sent This section further describes the features of the SNMPv3 protocol The following subsections are included SNMPv3 Authentication Protocols on page 281 SNMPv3 Privacy Protocol on page 281 SNMPv3 MIB Views on page 281 SNMPv3 Storage Types on page 283 SNMPv3 Message Notification on page 283 SNMPv3 Tables on page 284 SNMPv3 Configuration Example on page 288 o2 uuuuiuouiu SNMPv3 Authentication Protocols SNMPv3 Privacy Protocol SNMPv3 MIB Views Converteon Management Software User s Guide The SNMPv3 protocol supports two authentication protocols HMAC MD5 96 MD5 and HMAC SHA 96 SHA Both MD5 and SHA use an algorithm to generate a message digest Each authentication protocol authenticates a user by checking the message digest In addition both protocols use keys to perform authentication The keys for both protocols are generated locally using the Engine ID a unique identifier that is assigned to the switch automatically and the user password
226. ets No confirmation prompt is displayed 2 To continue managing the remote card return to the Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu and wait approximately one to two minutes for the card to initialize its management software and negotiate the OAM state with its local counterpart Then select the card again from the menu 227 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Configuring the Remote AT CM Line Cards with the Web Browser Windows Displaying the Status of the Remote Line Cards Menu View Remote Module Status amp Configuration REMOTE_MODULE FIBER_PORT COPPER_PORT Mod Name CardTypeVer _ ER_ OperMod FrmSz LPM Slot CPM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL AN From the web browser windows you can perform these management tasks on the remote line cards Displaying the Status of the Remote Line Cards next Displaying the Current Configuration on page 229 Naming a Remote Line Card on page 230 Configuring the Remote Ports on page 230 u uuuiu Configuring the Low Power Mode on AT CM3 Line Cards on page 230 Configuring the OAM Clients on Remote Line Cards on page 231 Changing the Operating Mode on page 231 Restoring the Default Parameter Settings on page 232 Restoring the Last Saved Configuration on page 233 Saving the Parameter Settings on page 233 Resetting the Remote AT CM3 Line Cards on page 234 u uuuuiu
227. eturn to Port Configuration Menu 37 Figure 101 LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu 5 To designate the T1 or E1 carrier type for the line card select Manufacture T1 Mode or Manufacture E1 Mode respectively 246 Converteon Management Software User s Guide 6 After you ve designated the carrier type configure the individual ports Each channel in the menu represents a different port on the line card Channel 1 represents T1 E1 port 1 channel 2 represents T1 E1 port 2 and so forth Each port has a submenu 1 shown in Figure 102 and a submenu 2 shown in Figure 103 Some of the selections differ depending on the designated carrier type of the card di TDM Channel Configuration Menu 1 E Module 15 Port C gt Long Haul Limited Long Haul gt T1 DSX 1 0 to 133ft 0dB CSU T1 DSX 1 133 to 266ft T1 DSX 1 266 to 399ft T1 DSX 1 399 to 533ft T1 DSX 1 533 to 655ft T1 7 5dB CSU T1 15dB CSU T1 22 5dB CSU Return to LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu m Figure 102 TDM Channel Configuration Menu 1 ie TDM Channel Configuration Menu 2 TN Module 15 Port C Transmit All Ones gt Transmit Data Normally gt Transmit PRBS Disable Transmit PRBS Enable gt Remote Loopback Disable Remote Loopback Enable gt Local Loopback Disable Local Loopback Enable Rerum to LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu P Figure 103 TDM Channel Configuration Menu 2 As you configure the ports the t
228. f management select Disable Web Server To save your change in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration Menu and select Save System Configurations You cannot disable the web browser server from a web browser management session Converteon Management Software User s Guide Manually Setting the Date and Time Menus To manually set the date and time on the management card perform the procedures in this section The date and time are added to event messages and SNMP traps Note When the date and time are set manually they are not retained when the chassis or management card is reset or powered off To manually set the management card s date and time from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 26 on page 100 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 From the System Parameters Configuration Menu select System Clock Configuration to display the menu in Figure 34 po System Clock Menu N System Date mm dd yy 00 00 00 System Time hh mm ss 00 17 00 NTP Server 0 0 0 0 NTP UTC Offset 0 gt Disable NTP Enable NTP Return to System Parameters Configuration Menu sg Figure 34 System Clock Menu To set the date select
229. figuration Menu Media Converter Line Card senem 169 Port Management Men 3 oiIccooe pce eti a nes bed coe ameet a e De see eese cen ee cese Dot de ee oa qd Seas 170 Port Configuration Menu sier ehe eere eiie bep ete tue 171 Port Configuration WindOW 3 entrer tine net eoe i etude DHL R ber DE Deed ned er Ee Dee Ie AL Rd d haa ddaa EEn 175 Operating Mode Configuration Menu for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards see 176 Operating Mode Configuration Menu for the AT CMS Line Cards eseee em 177 Configure Operating Mode via Management Card Menu sssssseee emere 177 Niue ec 179 Max Frame Size Config Menu for the AT CM2KOS Line Card ssseeeeeeee menn 182 Line Card Configuration Men sesira det Seo eid ecce ten ea Le duse 183 Auto copy Line Card Configuration Prompt nennen nnne nnrnen nennen nennen 184 pXecconpo E 185 Low Power Mode Configuration Prompt ssssssseeseeeeeeeenen nene nennen errem rennen nennen nennen 186 All CM Line Card Configurations Menu ssssesseneeeen nennen enr ut nennen ennt en nennen nnne nen 188 CM301 CM302 CMCM3K0S LPM Menu esee nemen enne nene enne nn nennen nennen nennen nnne 188 Line Card Low Power Mode Information esssseseseeen ene nem eee nnrnen nennen nennen 189
230. figuration Menu System Parameters Configuration Save System Configuration Return System Configuration to Default MRSEHR to Configuration Figure 27 System Configuration Menu Converteon Management Software User s Guide 3 Select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 ia System Parameters Configuration Menu N System Name Omega Options Terminal Configuration web Server Configuration Temperature Threshold Configuration IP Parameters System Clock Configuration TFTP Image Download Configuration TFTP File Upload Download Configuration SNMPv3 Configurations L Rerum to System Configuration Menu F Figure 28 System Parameters Configuration Menu 4 From the System Configuration Menu select IP Parameters to display the menu in Figure 29 di IP Parameters Menu TS Converteon IP address 10 0 0 1 Subnet mask 255 255 252 0 Gateway address 0 0 0 0 Manager address 0 0 0 0 Manager address 0 0 0 0 Manager address 0 0 0 0 Manager address 0 0 0 0 Get community string public Set community string private Trap community string public Location California USA Contact Allied Telesis gt Disable DHCP Enable DHCP Re Return to System Parameters Configuration Menu Figure 29 IP Parameters Menu 101 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 102 5 To assign a static IP address configuration to the card enter the
231. finition fication Dying Gasp has AT CV1203 Report The media converter line card in slot n in Occurred on Remote AT CV5000 the AT CV5000 Chassis received the Line Card n dying gasp signal from its line card counterpart in a remote AT CV 1203 Chassis The remote line card sent the signal because the AT CV1203 Chassis lost power For background information refer to Dying Gasp and First RPS Failure Signals on page 62 Fan Tray A B Fan AT CV5000 Report The temperature of the chassis exceeded Temperature Exceeds the temperature threshold Limit Clear The temperature of the chassis returned below the temperature threshold Fan Tray A B has AT CV5000 Report The AT CVFAN Fan Module was installed been Installed in the AT CV5000 Chassis Fan Tray A B has AT CV5000 Report The AT CVFAN Fan Module was removed been Removed from the chassis Fan Tray Module A B AT CV5000 Report A cooling fan stopped Fan n Failed Clear A cooling fan resumed operations Line Card n Missing AT CV1200 Report The line card in slot n was removed from AT CV1203 the chassis AT CV es Clear The line card removed from slot n was reinstalled in the slot Line Card m Port n AT CV1200 Report Port n on the line card in slot m lost its link Offline AT CV1203 to a network device AT CV5000 Line Card m Port n AT CV1200 Report Port n on the line card in slot m Online AT CV1203 established a valid link with a network AT CV5000 device Line Card n Reboot AT CV1200 R
232. from the Administration Menu Web Browser The activity monitor is not supported in the web browser windows 130 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring the Syslog Client Menus Web Browser Event Log Syslog Syslog IP Address Syslog Facility Code g For background information refer to Syslog Client on page 24 To configure the syslog client from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration to display the menu shown in Figure 37 on page 122 2 From the Administration Menu select the Syslog Server Address field and enter the IP address of the syslog server on your network To stop the management card from sending any further event messages to the server enter 0 0 0 0 as the server address 3 Select the Syslog Facility Code field and enter a facility code for the events The management card adds this code to the messages when it sends the messages to the syslog server The range is 0 to 23 The default is 1 The numerical codes are defined in the RFC 3164 standard 4 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Main Menu and select Configuration System Configuration and Save System Configuration To configure the syslog client from the web browser windows 1 Select Administration from the menu bar 2 Click the Syslog tab to display the tab in Figure 42 Administration Syslo Help 0 0 0 0 1 Figure 42 Syslog Tab 3 Click the Ed
233. g a privacy protocol You can select this value if you configured the Security Model parameter with the SNMPv3 protocol P AuthPriv This option represents authentication and the privacy protocol Select this security level to encrypt messages using a privacy protocol and authenticate SNMP entities This level provides the greatest level of security You can select this value if you configured the Security Model parameter with the SNMPv3 protocol N NoauthNoPriv This option represents no authentication and no privacy protocol Select this security level if you do not want to authenticate SNMP entities and you do not want to encrypt messages using a privacy protocol This security level provides the least security Note The only security level for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c is N NoauthNoPriv 298 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 35 SNMPv3 Access Table Parameters Parameter Description Read View Name The value that you configured with the View Name parameter in the SNMPv3 View Table A Read View Name allows the users assigned to this Group Name to view the information specified by the View Table entry This value does not need to be unique Write View Name The value that you configured with the View Name parameter in the SNMPv3 View Table A Write View Name allows the users assigned to this Security Group to write or modify the information in the specified View Table This value does not ne
234. g a new value enter 0 0 0 0 A default gateway address is needed if the management card will be communicating with a network device like a TFTP server or a syslog server located on a different subnet The address which has to be a member of the same subnet as the card s IP address should identify the first hop to reaching the remote subnet 6 To activate the DHCP client to assign the IP address from a DHCP server on the network select Enable DHCP Review the following guidelines before activating the DHCP client o If you want to learn the management card s MAC address so that you can enter it on the DHCP server refer to Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis on page 148 The 10 100Base TX port on the management card has to be connected to a device on your network such as a Fast Ethernet switch The card communicates with your network through that port If the card already has a static IP address the address is overwritten by the address from the DHCP server When you activate the client the management card immediately transmits up to two queries to the DHCP server If there is no response the management card operates without an IP address To change the community strings enter the new values in the Get Community String Set Community String and Trap Community String fields Community strings are case sensitive and can have up to thirteen characters Spaces and special characters are permitted 8 Retu
235. g in the Information TLV changes Upon reception of an Information TLV from a peer an OAM Client may use this field to decide if it needs to be processed an Information TLV that is identical to the previous Information TLV doesn t need to be parsed as nothing in it has changed Vendor Information Vendor OUI Indicates the 32 bit identifier that may be used to differentiate a vendor s product models versions Contains the Organizationally Unique Identifier OUI of 00 30 84 for Allied Telesis Loopback State Indicates the current loopback state of the OAM client o None No loopback initiated D Initiating Loopback The local OAM client is initiating a loopback test with the remote client O Remote in Loopback The remote OAM client has received the loopback command from the local client and is ready to participate or is already participating in the loopback test O Terminating Loopback The local OAM client is ending the loopback test In Loopback Test Indicates whether or not the OAM client is currently running a loopback test D Yes The OAM client is running a loopback test o No The OAM client is not running a loopback test 269 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client Web Browser windows 1 To display status information for local OAM clients from the web browser Select Module Status amp Configuration from the
236. g message is displayed Saving system configuration Please Wait After updating its master configuration file the management card changes the message to Saving system configuration Please Wait OK Press any key to continue 4 Return to the Main Menu 89 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session Configuring the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM70S Line Cards for the OAM based Features 90 Setting the Operating Mode Are you planning to use any of these OAM based features on the AT CM Line Cards Remote peer management Remote downloads of new management software Dying gasp OAM loopback tests OAM variable requests u uuu 0 If so this procedure shows you how to configure the line cards It explains how to set their operating modes to an OAM mode and how to verify the settings of the OAM clients This procedure has to be performed at a Converteon chassis that has the management card Thus those AT CM Line Cards that you plan to deploy at remote sites must initially be installed and configured in a chassis that has a management card You can use either the menus or the web browser windows to configure the line cards This procedure uses the menus This procedure is divided into the following tasks O Setting the Operating Mode next D Configuring the OAM Settings on page 93 o Testing the OAM Settings on page 95 To set the operating mode on the AT CM Line Card for the OAM based features
237. ge 2t a M302 M302 las eas dd AT CV102 AT C 1 e PWR n 3 2 Lk Lk Y 5 F s x n x n x Heprea 107100 10 108 10 108 10 108 10 100 107100 nor LU RDY ror ror H e e 9 ism m s M cru reser REM rient riget A ceres E reete SML ME DAM ava METAM apa M AM Figure 59 Chassis View The Menu View shown in Figure 60 on page 165 lists all of the line cards in the chassis and displays the states of the links of their ports The information in this view is automatically refreshed every few seconds The columns in the table are described in Table 19 on page 158 To view or configure the parameters of the line cards or a management card click in the CardTypeVer column the model name of the card You can configure only one card at a time Converteon Management Software User s Guide Alli ic AT S99 MVE Allied Telesis Converteon Web Management Module Status amp Configuration Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View MODULE INFO FIBER PORT COPPER PORT Remote Module Status amp Mod Name CardTypeVer ST OperMod IPC FrmSz LPM AC VER ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL AN Sareen 1 AT CVSMO2 Active 301 vao0__ 100 Y 2 Regii AT CM302 OAM ILT oo 10240 ON N Vv400 100 Y 0 got qs 200 Y 8B 0 1 Administration 3 Reg20 AT CM302 OAM LT 10240 ON N Vv o0 1i00Y O0 ib ee 200 7B Te A 4 Reg21 AT CM302 OAM ILT oo 1
238. guration from the menu bar to display the Remote Module Status amp Configuration tab 2 Click the model name of the line card you want to reset 1 Select the Setting tab 2 Click the Reset Remote Line Card button at the bottom of the tab The line card resets 3 Select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar again 4 To continue managing the line card wait one to two minutes for the card to initialize its management software and to negotiate the OAM state with its local counterpart and then select the card again from the Remote Module Status amp Configuration window Converteon Management Software User s Guide Displaying the Version Numbers of the Remote AT CM Line Cards Menus These procedures are used to view the version numbers of the management software and bootloader files on remote AT CM Line Cards The management software programs of the line cards are listed here o The AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards use the AT S73 Management Software 0 The AT CM3 Line Cards use the AT S102 Management Software To view the information from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Diagnostics to display the Diagnostics Menu shown in Figure 53 on page 148 2 Select Remote CM Line Card Diagnostics 3 From the Remote CM Line Card Diagnostics Menu select Image Version An example of the Remote Line Card Module Software Image Version window is shown in Figure 95 The information in this window is fo
239. guration tab 2 Click the model name of the AT CM3 Line Card you want to configure 3 Click the Setting tab Configuring the OAM Clients on Remote Line Cards Changing the Operating Mode 4 5 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Click the Edit button in the Low Power Mode section of the window To activate the low power mode on the line card and to turn off the LEDs select On in the pull down menu in the pop up window To disable the low power mode and turn on the LEDs select Off The default setting is Off For background information refer to DAM Client Settings on page 69 To configure the OAM client on a remote line card 1 Select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar to display the Remote Module Status amp Configuration tab Click the model name of the line card you want to configure Click the Port A tab Click the OAM Configuration tab Configure the settings as needed For the explanations of the parameters refer to Table 31 on page 255 Note If you disable the OAM Admin State on a remote line card the card will continue to forward traffic but it will not support remote peer management You will not be able to remotely manage the device and if the remote chassis does not have a management card you ll have to visit the remote site to configure the card s parameters For background information refer to Operating Modes on page 48 Before changing the operating
240. h 1078 1078 1079 through 1082 1082 1083 through 1086 1086 1087 through 1090 1090 1091 through 1094 1094 1095 through 1098 1098 1099 through 1103 1103 1104 through 1107 1107 1108 through 1111 1111 1112 through 1116 1116 359 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 360 Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1117 through 1120 1120 1121 through 1124 1124 1125 through 1129 1129 1130 through 1133 1133 1134 through 1138 1138 1139 through 1142 1142 1143 through 1147 1147 1148 through 1152 1152 1153 through 1156 1156 1157 through 1161 1161 1162 through 1166 1166 1167 through 1170 1170 1171 through 1175 1175 1176 through 1180 1180 1181 through 1185 1185 1186 through 1190 1190 1191 through 1195 1195 1196 through 1200 1200 1201 through 1205 1205 1206 through 1210 1210 1211 through 1215 1215 1216 through 1221 1221 1222 through 1226 1226 1227 through 1231 1231 1232 through 1236 1236 1237 through 1242 1242 1243 through 1247 1247 1248 through 1253 1253 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1259 through 1264 1264 1265 through 1269 1269 1270 through 1275 12
241. hanges If you remove the line card from the chassis or power off the chassis your changes are retained by the card 251 Chapter 8 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card 252 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client The sections in this chapter are Configuring the OAM Client on page 254 Performing the OAM Loopback Test on page 259 Displaying OAM Information on Local OAM Clients on page 264 Displaying OAM Information on Remote OAM Clients on page 271 Displaying OAM Statistics on page 273 u uuuuiu Sending OAM Variable Requests to View MIB Variables on page 275 Note The AT CM2 AT CM70S and AT CM3 Line Cards have to be set to an OAM operating mode before you can perform any of the procedures in this chapter Otherwise the OAM menus and windows are hidden from view The appropriate mode for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards is OAM Visible For the AT CM3 Line Cards the appropriate mode is any mode that supports OAM such as Link Test with OAM For more information refer to Operating Modes on page 48 and Setting the Operating Mode on page 176 253 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client Configuring the OAM Client 254 Menus To configure the OAM clients on the line cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Modul
242. he line card Change Operation Mode now Yes or No 10 Type Y to continue or N to cancel the procedure This prompt is displayed If auto copy is enable operation mode change need to be saved to take affect Save line card configuration before rebooting Yes or No 11 Type Y for yes to update the master configuration file on the management card with the new setting for the card s operating mode This step is especially important if the auto copy feature is activated on the card s slot If the card s operating mode isn t saved in the master configuration file the new setting will not take affect because the card after it resets will revert to its previous operating mode Since this is the initial configuration you probably don t know the auto copy setting for the slot But respond with Yes anyway In fact there is little 92 Configuring the OAM Settings 12 Converteon Management Software User s Guide likelihood you will ever respond with No to this prompt This step isn t applicable to the AT CM70S Line Card because it doesn t support the auto copy feature The operating mode on the line card is changed to OAM visible and the card resets Wait one minute for the line card to initialize its management software and for the RDY LED to turn on Then go to the next procedure To configure the OAM settings 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration Menu Select the line card you
243. he previously defined Notify Tag parameter values The Notify Tag parameter is configured in the Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table In this way the Notify and Target Address tables are linked Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save the entry to flash memory SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table The Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table menu allows you to define which user can send messages to the host IP address defined in the Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table The user and its associated information is previously configured in the Configure SNMPv3 User Table SNMPv3 View Table SNMPv3 Access Table and SNMPv3 Group Table Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save the entry to flash memory 287 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Configuration Example 288 You may want to have two classes of SNMPv3 users Managers and Operators In this scenario you would configure one group called Managers with full access privileges Then you would configure a second group called Operators with monitoring privileges only For a detailed example of this configuration see Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples on page 345 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring SNMPv3 Entities The following sections describe how to configure SNMPv3 entities using the SNMPv3 Tables To successfully configure this protocol you must perform
244. her Layer 3 routing devices If the management card and the remote devices reside on different subnets the card s IP address configuration should include a default gateway address that specifies the IP address of the router interface of the first hop to reaching the remote devices 31 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Configuration Files 32 AT CM Line Cards AT CV Line Cards AT CV5M02 Management Card The management card and the media converter line cards store their parameter settings in a series of configuration files These files enable the cards to retain their settings even when they are removed from the chassis or when the chassis is powered off The parameter settings of the AT CM Line Cards are stored in the configuration files in the flash memory on the cards The files contain the operating modes the port settings the ingress and egress filters and the OAM client settings of the line cards The cards automatically update their configuration files when you change a parameter setting There is no Save command needed to perform this operation For example if you adjust the OAM settings on a line card the card automatically updates its configuration file so that it retains the new settings even if you immediately afterwards remove the card and install it in another slot or chassis The configuration files on the AT CV Line Cards operate the same as the files on the AT CM Line Cards These line cards ho
245. ication 1 rane eere reete eee ette ordre Dea pono Y Tee Eee dL Ee cde dee edades tpe peres 283 SNMPv3 Tables eerte eer qe e e RU te eee e emite tied eps 284 SNMPv3 Configuration Exambple eere reete oed cede caede tese eaae avideeo auias 288 Configuring SNMPv3 Entities 5 3 reete Erebi ani eite 289 Configuririg the SNMPv3 User Table retinerent entire ehe Urna nera Lr d na aaae ete Eo ene sdtevstdocess eleneccoentes 290 Configuring the SNMPv3 View Table sssseeeeeeneene enne nnnm nennen nennen nen nns nenne erret enne nnen nnne 293 Configuring the SNMPv3 Access Tableros suede ties etn red eee atio d desssemevsensueseebdedensebecdenescemeeseneese 296 Configuring the SNMPv3 Group Table eret nennen seen susceeseecttnecegsncsececeneadseopesenistectnqeetesencecsepentaneted 300 Configuring the SNMPv3 Notify Table nene nennen nnne enr en nennen eterne en nnne enn ener en nene 303 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Address Table sssssseeneeeeeeee enne ene AEEA enne enren nene nenne eterne nene 306 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table sse nennen erem enne nnne 309 Contents Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files sss emere nere nnne 315 enu 316 Configuring the TFTP Client to Download New Management Software Programs eee 317
246. iguration Reset Line Card S Return to Remote Module Status and Configuration F Figure 92 Remote Module Configuration Menu The menu displays the current settings of the two ports on the remote line card The columns are described in Table 20 on page 170 Naming a Remote Line Card Displaying the Parameter Settings of a Remote Line Card Configuring Remote Ports Converteon Management Software User s Guide Your changes to the settings on a remote line card are automatically saved in the card s configuration file in flash memory and are retained even if the remote chassis is powered off or the card is removed from the unit For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 For instructions on how to save the changes to the master configuration file on the AT CV5M02 Management Card refer to Saving the Parameter Settings on page 227 3 When you finish configuring the remote line card return to the Remote Module Configuration Menu and select Return to Remote Module Status and Configuration to display the Remote Module Status and Configuration menu again To assign a name to a remote line card 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select the Module Name field 2 Enter a name of up to eight alphanumeric characters To view the current settings of a remote card 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select Line Card Configuration 2 From the Line Card Configu
247. iguration Menu m Figure 138 TFTP Image Download Configuration 317 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files 5 Enter the necessary information in the fields defined in Table 40 Be sure to specify the IP address of the TFTP server in the TFTP Server IP Address field To update a line card enter in the appropriate field the filename of its image file stored on the TFTP server A line card cannot be updated if its field is blank You only need to enter image filenames for those line cards you want to upgrade For example to upgrade the AT S102 Management Software on AT CM3 Line Cards you would enter the appropriate image filename in the AT CM3xx AT 3Kxx Image File Name ATS102 field On the other hand you would leave that field blank if you were not updating any AT CM3 Line Cards Table 40 TFTP Image Download Configuration Menu Field Description TFTP Server IP Address Enter in this field the IP address of the TFTP server that has the new management software programs for the line cards Management Card To update the AT S99 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card enter in this field the name of the new image file that is stored on the TFTP server Be sure to include the img extension AT CM3xx_AT 3Kxx Image File Name ATS102 To update the AT S102 Management Software on the AT CM301 AT CM302 and AT CM3KOS Line Cards enter in this field the name of the new image file sto
248. igure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save this view to flash memory SNMPv3 Group Table The Configure SNMPv3 Group Table menu allows you to associate a User Name with a security group called a Group Name The User Name is previously configured with the Configure SNMPv3 User Table menu The security group is previously configured with the Configure SNMPv3 Access Table menu Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save the entry to flash memory SNMPv3 Notify Table The Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table menu allows you to define the type of message that is sent from the switch to the SNMP host In addition you have the option of defining the message type as either an Inform or a Trap message The difference between these two types of messages is that when a switch sends an Inform message the switch expects a response from the host In comparison the switch does not expect the host to respond to Trap messages In addition you define a Notify Tag that links an SNMPv3 Notify Table entry to the host IP address defined in the Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table menu Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save the entry to flash memory SNMPv3 Target Address Table The Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table menu allows you to configure the host IP address Also in the same table you configure the values of the Tag List parameter with t
249. imit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 3285 through 3322 3322 3323 through 3361 3361 3362 through 3401 3401 3402 through 3442 3442 3443 through 3484 3844 3485 through 3527 3527 3528 through 3571 3571 3572 through 3616 3616 3617 through 3663 3663 3664 through 3710 3710 3711 through 3759 3759 3760 through 3809 3809 3810 through 3861 3861 3862 through 3913 3913 3914 through 3968 3968 3969 through 4024 4024 4025 through 4081 4081 4082 through 4140 4140 4141 through 4201 4201 4202 through 4264 4264 4265 through 4329 4329 4330 through 4395 4395 4396 through 4464 4464 4465 through 4535 4535 4536 through 4608 4608 4609 through 4683 4683 4684 through 4761 4761 4762 through 4842 4842 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 4843 through 4926 4926 4927 through 5012 5012 5013 through 5102 5102 5103 through 5194 5194 5195 through 5291 5291 5292 through 5390 5390 5391 through 5494 5494 5495 through 5602 5602 5603 through 5714 5714 5715 through 5830 5830 5831 through 5952 5952 5953 through 6079 6079 6080 through 6211 6211 6212 through 6349 6349 6350 through 6493 6493 6494 through 6644 6644 6645 through 6802 6802 6803 through 6968 5958 6969 thro
250. imum size in octets of the OAMPDUS The OAM clients negotiate the maximum OAMPDU size during the Discovery process If a client receives an Information OAMPDU from its OAM counterpart with a different value for the maximum OAMPDU size it uses the smaller value For instance if a client receives from its remote OAM counterpart an Information OAMPDU that has a smaller value for the maximum OAMPDU size than its own value the client uses the remote client s value The range of this value is 64 to 1518 octets The default value is 1518 octets Unidirec tional Support This parameter controls whether or not the OAM client sends OAMPDwUs if the receiver connector on the fiber optic port of Port A is not receiving a signal or network traffic The possible values are O Yes The OAM client sends OAMPDUS even when the receive fiber optic connector on the fiber optic port on port A is not receiving a signal or network traffic This is the default setting O No The OAM client sends OAMPDUS only when the receive fiber optic connector on the fiber optic port on port A is receiving a signal or network traffic and the port has established a link with its remote counterpart Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 31 OAM Client Parameters Parameter Description Loopback This parameter controls whether or not the OAM client Support on the line card will participate in OAM loopback tests by returning
251. in Report An SPF module was installed in the AT CM3KOS Line Card linecard n SFP Removal local in Report An SPF module was removed from the AT CM3KOS Line Card SFP Temp High Low Alarm Report The operating temperature of an SFP local in linecard n SFP Vcc High Low Alarm Report The input voltage of an SFP module either local in linecard n module either exceeded the operating range High or dropped below the range Low Clear The operating temperature of an SFP module returned to the operating range exceeded the operating range High or dropped below the range Low Clear The input voltage of an SFP module returned to the operating range 127 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Table 14 SFP Module Event Messages Message Classification Definition SFP Tx Bias High Low Report The laser bias of an SFP module either Alarm local in linecard n exceeded the operating range High or dropped below the range Low Clear The laser bias of an SFP module returned to the operating range SFP Tx Power High Low Report The laser output of an SFP module either Alarm local in linecard n exceeded the operating range High or dropped below the range Low Clear The laser output of an SFP module returned to the operating range SFP Rx Power High Low Report The laser input of an SFP module either Alarm local in linecard
252. ine card s default settings 193 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 194 5 Toreturn the parameter settings on the line card to the default values click Return to Default Configuration The parameter settings on the line card are returned to their default settings and the Menu View is displayed The line card will reset if its current operating mode is not the default operating mode 6 Forinstructions on how to save your changes in the master configuration file refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Restoring the Last Saved Configurations to the AT CM3 Line Cards Menus These procedures are used to restore the AT CM301 AT CM302 and AT CM3KOS Line Cards to their last saved configurations stored on the master configuration file on the management card You might perform this procedure to discard parameter changes you made to a line card but did not save or to configure a new line card with the save settings as the previous card in the slot For more information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 This procedure is not supported on the AT CM2 AT CM70S or AT CV Line Cards A Caution If the card s current operating mode is different from its last saved configuration the card will reset possibly resulting in the loss of some network traffic As the line card initializes its management software which takes approximately one minut
253. ine cards subsequently installed in the same slot will be assigned the same settings automatically For the auto copy feature to work the line cards have to be of the same model For instance if you were to install the AT CM302 Line Card in a slot that had been configured for the AT CM202 Line Card the new card would reject the configuration from the management card and would instead use the parameter settings in its own configuration file For background information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 To use the auto copy feature to configure multiple AT CM Line Cards with the same settings perform these additional steps After configuring the parameter settings for the OAM client on the line card return to the card s Module Configuration Menu Select Line Card Configuration From the Line Card Configuration menu select Auto copy Line Card Configuration Testing the OAM Settings Converteon Management Software User s Guide 4 From the Display Current Configuration menu select Auto copy Enable Although the setting of the auto copy feature is set in a card s Module Configuration Menu it applies to the slot The setting is not transferred if the line card is installed in a different slot or chassis 5 Return to the line card s Module Configuration Menu 6 To configure other parameters on the line card refer to Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards on page 157 7 Return to the card s Modu
254. ing 31 SNMPv3 described 280 examples 345 SNMPv3 Access Table configuring 296 described 286 SNMP 3 configuration files described 37 downloading to AT CV5M02 Management Cards 328 saving parameter settings in 78 uploading from AT CV5M02 Management Cards 328 SNMPv3 Group Table configuring 300 described 287 SNMPv3 Notify Table configuring 303 described 287 SNMPv3 Target Address Table configuring 306 described 287 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table configuring 309 described 287 SNMPv3 User Table configuring 290 described 286 SNMPv3 View Table configuring 293 described 286 standby AT CV5M02 Management Cards activating manually 144 described 28 displaying status messages 30 master configuration files 36 updating master configuration files manually 83 statistics displaying for AT CM Line Cards 203 syslog client configuring 131 374 described 24 requirements for sending events 31 T T1 E1 ports configuring from AT CV5M02 Management Card 246 configuring from Console port 249 default settings 340 selecting management method 242 Telnet management sessions described 26 enabling or disabling 111 requirements for 31 starting 75 temperature threshold 142 TFTP client configuring to download management software 317 configuring to transfer configuration files 330 downloading management software 320 requirements for 31 U unidirectional support 256 universal asynchronous receiver transmitter UART setting 242 Ww web br
255. ion save Line Card Configuration renum to Module Configuration Menu Figure 18 Save Command for a Local AT CM Line Card Menus The web browser windows also features the same command It s a button located in the Current Configuration tab of the Line Card Configuration window Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Line Card Configuration Setting Current Last Saved Default Auto copy Configuration Configuration Configuration Slot Number 5 Module AT CM302 Operation Mode Link Test OAM Visible Mode C Save Current Configuration B Current Configuration Port A 100Base FX Port B 100Base TX Port Enable Enabled Enabled Figure 19 Save Command for a Local AT CM Line Card Web Browser Windows 81 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session If you have a lot of line cards to configure rather than saving the changes of each card individually you can use this command instead Configuration gt All CM Line Cards Configuration gt Save All CM Line Cards Configurations When you select this command the management card saves in its master configuration file in flash memory the settings of all of the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM70S Line Cards in the chassis To locate this same command in the web browser windows click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then the All CM Line Cards tab Configuration System SNMPv1 amp SNM
256. ion Without the MissingLink mode Switch B would be unaware of the problem because it would still have a link to the media converter line card In the example the initial loss occurred on port A But the operating mode operates the same when the initial loss of the link is on port B Here the transmitter on port A is disabled to notify the node connected to that port of the loss of the link on port B The states of the ports on a line card running in this mode operate in tandem Either both of the ports have a link or neither of the ports This is reflected on the Link LEDs and in the management software If both ports can form links with their network devices their Link LEDs will both be on and their status in the management software will be Online If one or both ports cannot establish a link then the Link LEDs will be off and their status in the management software will be Offline This operating mode is useful when the network devices connected to the ports of a line card can react to a loss of a link on a port such as managed Fast Ethernet switches running SNMP or a spanning tree protocol Conversely the MissingLink mode will be of little value if the network devices of a line card cannot react to a lost link In the latter scenario the Link Test mode would probably be a better operating mode for a line card during normal network operations Furthermore Allied Telesis does not recommend using the MissingLink mode when troubleshooting
257. iption Management Card Image Download Select this option to upgrade the AT 899 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card Single Local CM Line Card Image Select this option to upgrade the management software on a single local AT CM Line Card After selecting the option you are prompted for the slot number of the line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number Single Local CM Line Card Bootloader Select this option to upgrade the bootloader file on a single local AT CM Line Card in the chassis After selecting this option you are prompted for the slot number of the line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number Single Remote CM Line Card Image Select this option to upgrade the AT S73 or AT S102 Management Software on a single remote AT CM Line Card through the remote peer management feature After selecting this option you are prompted for a slot number Enter the slot number of the local line card that is connected to the remote line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number Single Remote CM Line Card Bootloader Select this option to upgrade the bootloader on a single remote AT CM Line Card through the remote peer management feature After selecting this option you are prompted for a slot number Enter the slot number of the local line card that connects to the remote line card you want to upgrade You can specify only on
258. is To set the temperature threshold from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 26 on page 100 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 4 Select Temperature Threshold Configuration to display the Temperature Threshold Configuration Menu in Figure 47 The temperature threshold is given in Celsius C Temperature Threshold Configuration Menu Converteon Maximum Temperature Threshold 60 Return to System Parameters Configuration Menu Figure 47 Temperature Threshold Configuration Menu 5 Select Maximum Temperature Threshold and enter a new value The range is 0 to 75 C The default is 60 C 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration menu and select Save System Configuration To set the temperature threshold from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 If the System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 30 on page 103 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Click the Edit button in the Temperature Threshold section In the Temperature Threshold pop up window click the Maximum Temperature Threshold field and enter a new value The range is 0
259. is initializing its management software This state only applies to AT CM Line Cards For the AT CV5M02 Management Card this column displays the card s state The possible states are D Active The management card is in the active state o Standby The management card is in the standby mode This state only applies to redundant AT CV5M02 Management Cards For background information refer to Active and Standby Management Cards on page 28 159 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Table 19 Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description IPC This column displays utilization information of the backplane by the management card and the AT CM Line Cards and is intended for manufacturing and test purposes For the AT CV5M02 Management Card this column displays the following information 1804 A This is the slot number of the line card the management card is currently polling For example the value 12 indicates that the management card is polling the AT CM Line Card in slot 12 Slots that have AT CV Line Cards are not polled by the management card B This is the total number of messages the management card is waiting to transmit over the backplane to the AT CM Line Cards C This is the total number of responses the management card is waiting to receive from the AT CM Line Cards For AT CM Line Cards this column displays the following information 000
260. it button to display the Syslog pop up window 131 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 132 4 Select the Syslog IP Address field and enter the IP address of the syslog server on your network To stop the management card from sending any further event messages to the server enter 0 0 0 0 as the server address To specify a facility code select Syslog Facility Code and enter a facility code for the events The management card adds this code to the messages when it sends the messages to the syslog server The range is 0 to 23 The default is 1 The numerical codes are defined in the RFC 3164 standard Click the Update button To save your changes in the master configuration file refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring the 10 100Base TX Port Menus The procedures in this section explain how to set the speed and duplex mode on the 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card The management card uses this port to communicate with your network for those management functions that require it such as sending event messages to a syslog server or uploading or downloading files to a TFTP server For background information refer to the 10 100Base TX Port on page 23 Note The port cannot be disabled and the port s wiring configuration of MDI cannot be changed To configure the settings of the 10 100Base TX port on the
261. ive Max OAMPUD Size 68 Loopback Support Yes Even Support No Veriable Support Yes Unidirect Support Yes Figure 115 Remote OAM Information Tab This tab is for viewing purposes only Refer to Table 32 on page 265 for the definitions of the fields 272 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Displaying OAM Statistics Menus To display OAM statistics for local OAM clients from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration Menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 Select the line card whose OAM statistics you want to view The Module Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 63 on page 169 Select Port A to display the Port Management Menu in Figure 64 on page 170 From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration Menu in Figure 105 on page 254 From the OAM Configuration Menu select Show OAM Statistics to display the Show OAM Statistics window in Figure 116 en Show OAM Statistics TN Module 11 Port A TX OAMPDUS 70917 RX OAMPDUS 70918 Tx Information OAMPDUS 70917 Rx Information OAMPDUS 70918 Tx Event OAMPDUS Rx Unique Event OAMPDUS Rx Duplicate Event OAMPDUS Tx Loopback Control OAMPDUS Rx Loopback Control OAMPDUS Tx Variable Request OAMPDUS Rx Variable Request OAMPDUS Tx Variable Response OAMPDUS Rx Variable Response OAMPDUS Tx Organizational Specific OAMPDUS Rx Organizational
262. kets with errors 512 to 1023 Octets The number of ingress and egress packets with a length of 512 to 1023 octets This counter includes packets with errors 1024 to Max Octets The number of ingress and egress packets with a length of 1024 octets up to the maximum permitted by the line card This counter includes packets with errors 205 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 206 The port statistics for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards are described in Table 23 Table 23 Port Statistics for AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards Row Description Received The number of packets received by the port from the Packets network device connected to it This statistic is only available on the AT CM2KOS Line Card Transmitted The number of packets transmitted by the port This Packets statistic is only available on the AT CM2KOS Line Card CRC Errors The number of received packets with CRC errors Collisions The number of collisions on the port This statistic is applicable only when a port is operating in the half duplex mode Web Browser To display the traffic statistics for the ports on the AT CM Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 In the Chassis View click one of the ports of the line card whose statistics you want to view Or select the Menu View tab and click the model name of the line
263. l Event Messages ci iate aol pecie Ete etie act due Le doe cueste uides 124 SEP Module Event Messages 1 ete E en ie a Det en tede Oe edge 127 Module Configuration Menu for a Management Card ssssssssssesseeee nene 133 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Cards sese 135 Chassis Information Men 3 3 Ete Bene rede te acer Le is Rd ee ee tr Ue piii tede ebd N 149 ge3 ccr p iis Mites nn ene eta eine ee ee eval 153 Module Status and Configuration Menu cccccccececeeeeneeeeceeenaeceeeeeenaeeeeeesesaeaeeeesecaeaeeeeseecaeeeeesesnaeeeeensnaaees 158 Module Configuration MOTU eve see eae te i ite iE cete trei enia deer eee ne ds spore ciel eee 170 Port Gonfiguration Mer rete tot netten tunm nn nA MAI 171 Port Statistics for the AT CM3 Line Cards sese eene nennen enne nennen nnns 203 Port Statistics for AT CM2 and AT CM706 Line Cards sse nennen 206 Line Card Module Software Image Version WindOw esee emen nennen enne 208 Line Card Module Information Window sesseeeeen ennemi nnne enne nnns 211 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu sss en ene nennen nennen enne 219 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window sseeeen emere 236 Remote Image Version WIndOW 1 1 23 42 xoti ei ede eoe e irt Te e de Pa Ie e D ded te tc ite dien
264. l down menu You can select only one operating mode The Line Card DIP Switch Mode selection activates the DIP switches on the line card so that the operating mode is controlled with the switches instead of the management software Click the Update button The management card automatically updates its master configuration file with the new setting for the line card s operating mode Afterwards the Module Status and Configuration menu is displayed again The line card resets When the operating mode is changed on an AT CM Line Card the device has to initialize its management software and configure its operating parameters before resuming normal operations In contrast the AT CV Line Cards immediately return to normal operations because the cards in that series do not have management software Converteon Management Software User s Guide Assigning Names to the AT CM Line Cards Menus Web Browser To assign names to the AT CM Line Cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the line card you want to name You can configure only one line card at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 63 on page 169 is displayed From the Module Configuration Menu select Module Name and enter the new name for the card The name can be up to eight alphanumeri
265. l name of the line card you want to configure 3 Select the Line Card Configuration tab Restoring the Last Saved Configuration Saving the Parameter Settings Converteon Management Software User s Guide 4 Click the Default Configuration tab This tab displays the default settings for the line card An example of the tab is shown in Figure 81 on page 193 5 To return the card s parameter settings to the default values click the Return to Default Configuration button The parameter settings on the card are returned to the default settings This procedure is used to restore a remote line card to the last saved configuration stored in the master configuration file on the management card in the local chassis This procedure can be useful if you want to discard parameter changes that you may have made to a remote line card but did not save in the master configuration file or to configure a new line card with the save settings as its predecessor For more information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 A Caution If the card s current operating mode is different from its last saved configuration the card will reset possibly resulting in the loss of some network traffic As the line card initializes its management software which takes approximately one minute it forwards traffic using its default parameter settings To use the web browser windows to restore the last saved configuration to a remote line card 1
266. le First you configure a view of a subtree Then you have the option of configuring a Subtree Mask that further refines the subtree view For example you can use a Subtree Mask to restrict a user s view to one row of the MIB OID Table In addition you can chose to include or exclude a view As a result you can let a user see a particular view or prevent a user from seeing a particular view Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save this view to flash memory SNMPv3 Access Table The Configure SNMPv3 Access Table menu allows you to configure a security group After you create a security group you assign a set of users with the same access privileges to this group using the SNMPv3 Group Table Consider the types of groups you want to create and the types of access privileges each group will have In this way you can more easily keep track of your users as belonging to one or two groups For each group you can assign read write and notify views of the MIB table The views you assign here have been previously defined in the Configure SNMPv3 View Table menu For example the Read View allows Converteon Management Software User s Guide group members to view the specified portion of the OID MIB table The Write View allows group members to write to or modify the MIBs in the specified MIB view The Notify View allows group members to send trap messages defined by the MIB view Lastly you can conf
267. le Configuration Menu and select Line Card Configuration 8 From the Line Card Configuration menu select Save Line Card Configuration 9 You can now remove the line card from the slot 10 To assign the same configuration to another AT CM Line Card install the card in the same slot and wait a full minute for the line card to initialize its management software and to receive its parameter settings from the management card Afterwards remove the card Repeat this step to assign the same settings to other AT CM Line Cards The following procedure shows you a quick and easy way to test the OAM based settings on the line cards The test consists of connecting the fiber optic ports on two identical AT CM Line Cards such as two AT CM302 Cards and checking to see whether the cards can establish a remote peer connection to each other If they can then their OAM settings are correct To test the OAM settings of two identical AT CM Line Cards 1 Install one of the line cards in a Converteon chassis that has the AT CV5M02 Management Card 2 Install the second line card in a different Converteon chassis If you want to test the dying gasp feature the enclosures have to be the AT CV5000 Chassis and the AT CV1203 Chassis 3 If the enclosures are not powered on power them on now 4 Connecta fiber optic cable between the fiber optic ports on the two line cards 5 If you are testing AT CM3 Line Cards and one or both of the cards ar
268. ll down menu and click the Update button The line card resets and initializes its operating software 6 To continue managing the remote card return to the Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu and wait approximately one to two minutes for the card to initialize its management software and if you selected an OAM mode negotiate the OAM state with its local counterpart Then select the card again from the menu This procedure is used to restore a remote line card to its default settings The default settings for the line cards can be found in Chapter A Default Settings for the Management Card and the Line Cards on page 337 Review the following information before performing this procedure O If the default operating mode of a line card is not an OAM mode the line card will not support remote peer management after it is returned to its default values A Caution If the card s current operating mode is not the default mode the card will reset possibly resulting in the loss of some network traffic The line card will immediately resume forwarding traffic but it will be unresponsive to management commands for one minute while it initializes its management software To return the parameter settings on a remote line card to their default values from the web browser windows 1 Select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar to display the Remote Module Status amp Configuration tab 2 Click the mode
269. ll find it on the labels on the shipping container and on the bottom of the unit Examine the first six characters If the characters are A04187 or A04188 the chassis is the newer version and it doesn t need the management card to support the first RPS failure signal with the AT CM3 Line Cards If it s any other number than the management card is required This discussion about the different versions of the AT CV1203 Chassis does not apply to the AT CM2 Line Cards If you want these cards to support the first RPS failure signal the chassis regardless of its version must have the management card 67 Chapter 3 OAM based Features OAM Variable Requests 68 This feature which is part of the IEEE 802 3ah Ethernet OAM standard lets you view the performance and error statistics that are stored in the Management Information Bases MIBs on remote OAM devices To use the feature you specify the branch and leaf of the object identifier OID of the MIB object you want to view These are the last two parts of an OID The prefix of the OID predefined in the OAM clients on the line cards is not adjustable This feature has the following restrictions O Variable requests use the following MIB tree prefix iso 1 member body 2 us 840 ieee802dot3 10006 csmacdmgt 30 0 Variable requests are transmitted from Port A the fiber optic port on the line cards This feature is not supported on Port B the twisted pair port D You can u
270. ly one minute the line card forwards network traffic using the default values for its parameter settings Afterwards it configures its parameters using the settings from the AT CV5M02 Management Card or from its own configuration file depending on the auto copy setting of its slot For instructions on how to reset the AT CV5M02 Management Card refer to Resetting the Management Card on page 119 To reset an AT CM3 Line Card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 2 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the AT CM Line Card you want to reset The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 63 on page 169 is displayed 3 Select Reset Line Card There is no confirmation prompt The line card resets immediately To reset an AT CM3 Line Card from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 In the Chassis View click either of the ports on the AT CM3 Line Card you want to reset Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the model name of the card You can reset only one line card at a time 3 Select the Setting tab 4 Click the Reset Line Card button There is no confirmation prompt The line card resets immediately Converteon Management Software User s Guide Resetting All of the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards Men
271. ment Card To manage the remote card you select its local counterpart to establish a remote management connection over the fiber optic cable that links the line cards AT CM Line Card in remote AT CV1000 Chassis Management traffic and AT CV5M02 Management Card AT CV5000 Chassis fey Ty i e ma gt ES eo Do LH AT CM Line Card Local or remote management workstation Figure 2 Remote Peer Management Example 1 Converteon Management Software User s Guide This feature is supported on all of the Converteon chassis In the next example the chassis with the management card is the AT CV 1203 Chassis Remote AT CM Line Card in AT CV1000 Chassis Management traffic AT CM Line Card and AT CV5M02 Management et Card in AT CV1203 KT HET Chassis ES E J Vs a Local or remote management workstation Figure 3 Remote Peer Management Example 2 Remote management is supported in both the menus and the web browser windows in the AT S99 Management Software To configure remote line cards from the menus you use the Remote Module Status and Configuration menu selected directly from the Main Menu An example of the menu is shown in Figure
272. menu bar 2 From the Chassis View click Port A the fiber optic port on the AT CM Line Card whose OAM information you want to view Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line Chassis view Menu View Port Port Status Configuration Port Statistics Card If Port A is not selected select it The OAM client is only supported on Port A If the Local OAM Information tab is not selected select it The window in Figure 113 Setting Line Card Configuration Slot Number 3 Local OAM Information Line Card Operation Mode Operation Status MUX State Parser State Local Discovering Local Stable Remote Discovering Remote Stable Critical Event Dying Gasp Link Fault OAM Version Config Revision Vendor Information Vendor OUI Loopback State In Loopback Test Module Status amp Configuration OAM Variable OAM OAM OAM OAM Configuration Information Statistics Loopback Test Request Card Type AT CM302 Remote OAM Information OAM Link Test Operational Forward Forward No Yes No Yes No No No 0x01 0x0005 0x00970001 00 30 84 None No 270 Figure 113 OAM Local Information Tab The information in this tab which is for viewing purposes only is defined in Table 32 on page 265 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Displaying OAM Information on Remote OAM Clients The procedures in this section are use
273. meters Parameter Description Group Name A descriptive name for the group of up to 32 alphanumeric characters You are not required to enter a unique value here because the SNMPv3 Access Table entry is indexed with the Group Name Security Model and Security Level parameter values However unique group names allow you to more easily distinguish the difference groups There are four default values for this field defaultV 1GroupReadOnly defaultV1GroupReadWrite defaultV2cGroupReadOnly defaultV2cGroupReadWrite u uuu These values are reserved for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c implementations 297 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Table 35 SNMPv3 Access Table Parameters Parameter Description Security Model The possible values are Select one of the following SNMP protocols as the Security Model for this Group Name 1 v1 Select this value to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv1 protocol 2 v2c Select this value to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv2c protocol 3 v3 Select this value to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv3 protocol The SNMPv3 protocol allows you to configure the group to authenticate SNMPv3 entities users and encrypt messages Security Level The possible values are A AuthNoPriv This option represents authentication but no privacy protocol Select this security level if you want to authenticate SNMP users but you do not want to encrypt messages usin
274. mit is discarded by a port To set a rate limit on a port on the AT CM2 Line Cards you can choose from the following predefined values 128 Kbps 256 Kbps 512 Kbps 1 Mbps 2 Mbps 4 Mbps 8 Mbps 0 No rate limiting default setting uuuuuuiuiu For instance if you select 512 Kbps as the ingress rate limit for a port on a line card the card would accept up to that number of bits per second from the network device connected to the port and would discard bits exceeding the threshold Rate limiting on the AT CM3 Line Cards is handled differently You can specify a value rather than select from predefined numbers However the value that you set has to conform to a specific increment which varies depending on the range in which you are filtering The ranges and increments are listed here 173 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Table 21 Port Configuration Menu Setting Description Ingress Rate Limit Egress Rate Limit Continued O For ingress or egress rate limiting from 64 Kbps to 1 Mbps the value has to be an increment of 64 Kbps e g 64 128 etc O For ingress or egress rate limiting from 1 Mbps to 100 Mbps the value has to be an increment of 1 000 kbps in the range of 1 000 to 100 000 kbps e g 1000 2000 etc O For ingress rate limiting from 100 to 200 Mbps the value has to be an increment of 10 000 Kbps in the range of 100 000 to 200 000 kbps e g
275. n Display Last saved Configuration Display Default Configuration Restore Last Saved Configuration Return Line Card to Default Configuration Save Line Card Configuration VRELU to Module Configuration Menu p Figure 72 Line Card Configuration Menu 183 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 184 Web Browser 4 Select Auto copy Line Card Configuration The following prompt is displayed Display Current Configuration Auto copy Enable gt Auto copy Disable Return to Line Card Confirmation Figure 73 Auto copy Line Card Configuration Prompt Select the desired setting for the auto copy feature for the line card s slot The default setting is disabled If you enable auto copy and later replace this line card with another card of the same model the new card will be assigned the same parameter settings as this card To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Line Card Configuration Menu and select Save Line Card Configuration To set the auto copy feature from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar In the Chassis View click either of the ports on the AT CM Line Card in the slot you want to configure Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the model name of the line card You can configure only one slot at a time Select the Line Card Configuration tab If the Auto copy tab is not
276. n be managed through the management card in the chassis In contrast the UART setting of the card at the remote site is set to UART console mode so that the T1 E1 ports can be managed through the card s Console port at the site If the card at the remote site had a UART setting of UART backplane mode you would have to remove the card from the chassis and install it into another unit that had a management card whenever you wanted to configure the T1 E1 ports AT CM70S Line Card Set to the UART Local Console Mode AT CV1203 Chassis AT CV5000 Chassis with a Management Card AT CM708 Line Card Set to the UART Backplane Mode Figure 98 UART Settings on the AT CM70S Line Card Here are the general steps to configuring a pair of AT CM70S Line Cards 1 Forthe initial configuration install both of the AT CM70S Line Cards in an AT CV5000 Chassis that has the AT CV5M02 Management Card 2 Using the menus interface in the management card change the UART setting on both cards to UART backplane mode so that you can configure all of the parameter settings including the T1 E1 ports using the management card 243 Chapter 8 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card 244 3 Using the manageme
277. n exceeded the operating range High or dropped below the range Low Clear The laser input of an SFP module returned to the operating range Remote Messages Remote SFP Temp Report The operating temperature of a remote High Low Alarm in linecard SFP module either exceeded the n operating range High or dropped below the range Low Clear The operating temperature of a remote SFP module returned to the operating range Remote SFP VccHigh Low Report The input voltage of a remote SFP Alarm in linecard n module either exceeded the operating range High or dropped below the range Low Clear The input voltage of a remote SFP module returned to the operating range Remote SFP Tx Bias Report The laser bias of a remote SFP module High Low Alarm in linecard either exceeded the operating range n High or dropped below the range Low Clear The laser bias of a remote SFP module returned to the operating range Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 14 SFP Module Event Messages Message Classification Definition Remote SFP Tx Power Report The laser output of a remote SFP module High Low Alarm in linecard either exceeded the operating range n High or dropped below the range Low Clear The laser output of a remote SFP module returned to the operating range Remote SFP Rx Power Report The laser input of a remote SFP module High Low Alarm in linecard either exceeded the operating range n High or drop
278. n page 112 5 Click the Update button 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file click the Edit button in the Configuration section of the window and select the Save System Configuration option 113 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Enabling or Disabling the Web Server 114 Menus Web Browser The web server on the AT CV5M02 Management Module allows you to use a web browser on a remote workstation on your network to manage the module and the chassis If you do not intend to use a web browser to manage the device disabling the server will increase the security of the unit from unauthorized access To set the web server from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 26 on page 100 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 Select Web Server Configuration to display the menu in Figure 33 web Server Configuration Menu Disable web Server gt Enable web Server Return to System Parameters Configuration Menu Figure 33 Web Server Configuration Menu To activate the web server to remotely manage the module with a web browser select Enable Web Server This is the default setting To deactivate the server to prohibit this type o
279. n you change a parameter on the management card or on a line card It does this by Restoring Configurations to the AT CM Line Cards Converteon Management Software User s Guide constantly polling the line cards over the backplane in the chassis for their current parameter settings However this file is temporary It is discarded whenever the chassis is powered off or the management card is reset or removed from the chassis The second master configuration file on the AT CV5M02 Management Card is stored in flash memory and retained even when the chassis is powered off However this master configuration file is not updated automatically Instead you have to instruct the management card to do it by issuing one of the save commands When you enter a save command the management card copies the master configuration file in DRAM to flash memory for permanent storage For information on the save commands refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 Here are the steps that the management card and the line cards perform when one of their parameter settings is changed 1 When you enter a new setting on a line card the management card sends the change to the designated card over the backplane of the chassis 2 The line card implements the change and updates its configuration file in flash memory so that it retains the change even if you remove the line card or power off the chassis 3 The management card automatically updates
280. nabled Note The settings on the Console port on the line card are not adjustable 2 Connect the management cable included with the AT CM70S Line Card to the Console port on the card and to the RS 232 port on your terminal or computer 3 If the card is already running the terminal screen will be blank To display the card s menu in Figure 104 type m for menu and press Return 249 Chapter 8 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card 250 Command SN P d AT CM70S Local Console Menu 7 Boot Configuration a Boot Data From Customized in EEPROM b LIU Mode T1 Current Status T1 with B8ZS Coding All 4 channels Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 1 Rec Sens Set Long Haul Long Haul Long Haul Long Haul 2 Line Build Out DSX 1 0 CSU DSX 1 0 CSU DSX 1 0 CSU DSX 1 0 CSU 3 Transmit All 1s Normal Normal Normal Normal lt 4 gt PRBS Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled lt 5 gt Remote Loopback Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enter lt Item gt lt space gt lt Channel gt to change each channel s config Change will be saved automatically if EEPROM data was used Figure 104 Local Console Menu on the AT CM70S Line Card The first selection in the menu a Boot Data From returns the parameter settings of the T1 E1 ports to the default values This selection initially says Manufacture Default indicating that the parameter settings on
281. nagement software and select Save Line Card Configuration from the Line Card Configuration Menu Converteon Management Software User s Guide Web Browser Torestore the default parameter settings on a line card from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 Inthe Chassis View click either port on the AT CM Line Card you want to configure Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time 3 Click the Line Card Configuration tab 4 Select the Default Configuration tab shown in Figure 81 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Port A Port B Setting Line Card Configuration C t Last Saved Default Auto copy Configuration de Configuration Slot Number 14 Card Type AT CM302 Operation Mode Link Test OAM Visible Mode Return to Default Configuration Default Configuration Port amp 100Base FX Port B 100Base TX Port Enable Enabled Enabled Negotiation Auto negotiate Duplex MDI MDIX Flow Control Enable Enable Ingress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit OAM Configuration Admin State Enabled Mode Passive Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 Unidirectional Supprt Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support No Variable Retrieval Support Yes Figure 81 Default Configuration Tab This tab displays the l
282. nal messages about the line cards Activity monitor for viewing the event messages in real time Syslog client for storing the event messages on a syslog server on your network Network Time Protocol NTP client for setting the card s date and time from an NTP server on your network or the Internet Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP client for assigning the management card s IP address configuration from a BOOTP or DHCP server on your network Redundant management cards in the AT CV5000 Chassis Manual or automatic restoration of previous configurations to the local or remote AT CM Line Cards Converteon Management Software User s Guide AT S99 Management Software The AT CV5M02 Management Card uses the AT S99 Management Software This program comes pre installed on the card with default values for all of the operating parameters New versions of the software can be downloaded onto the card using XMODEM or Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP as explained in Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files on page 315 Console Port The management card has an RS 232 Console port for local management of a Converteon chassis with a terminal or a personal computer and a terminal emulator program The initial management session of the management card has to be a local session For instructions refer to Starting a Local Management Session on page 72 10 100Base TX Port The management card has a standard 10 100Base TX port
283. nction of the line card is disabled The module will pass all OAMPDUs whose vendor OUI is not Allied Telesis 265 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client Table 32 Show Local OAM Information Window Column Description Line Card Operation Mode Continued OAM Visible Mode In this mode the line card generates and responds to OAMPDU packets As such it can initiate the OAM discovery process participate in OAM loopback tests and send OAM variable requests Operation Status Indicates the OAM operating status The possible values are o Disabled The OAM client is disabled o Passive Wait The OAM client is waiting for its remote OAM counterpart to initiate the OAM discovery process The client cannot initiate the OAM discovery process because its mode has been set to passive Active Send Local The OAM client has initiated the OAM discovery process and is waiting for a response from the remote OAM client to its queries The client is able to initiate the OAM discovery process because its mode has been set to active O Send Local and Remote The local OAM client is sharing its OAM settings with the remote client by sending OAM Information OAMPDUS that contain its settings and the OAM settings received from the remote client O IOAM Peering Locally Rejected The remote OAM client has rejected the OAM information from the local client
284. nd Remote 2 221 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Table 26 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description AN This column displays the status of Auto Negotiation on the twisted pair ports on the remote line cards The possible states are o Y Auto Negotiation is enabled on the port The speed and duplex mode are set automatically This is the default setting 0 N Auto Negotiation is disabled on the port The speed and duplex mode were set manually 222 Note To support remote peer management the local and remote line cards have to be in the OAM operational state The line cards may take up to two minutes to reach that state whenever they are powered on or reset because they have to initialize their management software and negotiate the OAM state with their counterparts 2 To configure a remote line card select the card in the menu to display the Remote Module Configuration Menu You can configure just one line card at a time The example of the window in Figure 92 is from an AT CM3 Line Card There are fewer menu selections for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards Remote Module Configuration Menu E Converteon Module 1 Remote Module AT CM302 Port Link Speed Mode A 100BaseFX online 100M Full B 100BaseTX online 100M Full Module Name Maximum Frame Size 10240 bytes Configure Low Power Mode Line Card Conf
285. ne card does not appear in the menu wait one to two minutes to give the line cards time to initialize their management software and negotiate their OAM states and then try the following a Return to the Main Menu and select Module Status and Configuration b Examine the three characters in the OAM column for the fiber optic port of the line card you are testing This column displays information about the status of the OAM client on the card The third character in the OAM column should be an asterisk indicating that the OAM client on the card is operational and that it has established a connection to the OAM client on the other line card Converteon Management Software User s Guide OAM Status Operational Mod Name CardTypever 1 AT CV5M02 2 Regll AT CM302 3 Reg20 AT CM302 4 Reg21 AT CM302 5 Area2a AT CM302 6 Area2b AT CM302 7 al21 AT CM3KOS 8 Reg12 AT CM202 v2 9 AT CM202 v2 10 AT CM202 v2 11 AT CV102 12 AT CV102 13 AT CV102 14 AT CV102 15 AT CV102 More Return to Main Menu OO Module Status and Configuration E Converteon MODULE INFO FIBER PORT qe COPPER PORT ST OperMod IPC FrmSz LPM AC VER ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL AN Active 800 ON v400 100 OAM LT o o 10240 0N N V400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 Y OAM LT o o 10240 0N N v400 100 Y 0 0 oo 100 Y 0 0 Ne
286. ne port The Port Management Menu is shown in Figure 64 on page 170 4 Select Port Configuration to display the Port Configuration Menu in Figure 65 on page 171 5 From the Port Configuration Menu select Port Statistics 6 Select Show Port Statistics The number of statistics depends on the line card For the port statistics for the AT CM3 Line Cards refer to Table 22 For the port statistics for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards refer to Table 23 on page 206 Table 22 Port Statistics for the AT CM3 Line Cards Statistic Description InGoodOctetsLo The length in octets of all the good frames received by a port The length is given in two counters This is the lower 32 bits of the counter InGoodOctetsHi The length in octets of all the good frames received by a port The length is given in two counters This is the upper 32 bits of the counter InBadOctets The length in octets of all the bad frames received by a port InUnicast The number of unicast frames received by a port InBroadcasts The number of broadcast frames received by a port InMulticasts The number of multicast frames received by a port InPause The number of pause frames received by a port 203 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 204 Table 22 Port Statistics for the AT CM3 Line Cards Statistic Description InUndersize The number of undersize frames received by a port An undersize frame is less than 64 octets
287. nfiguration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card 4 Configure the settings of the port as needed To activate Auto Negotiation select Auto negotiate To set the speed and duplex mode manually select Manual negotiate to display the additional parameters shown in Figure 44 di Port Configuration Menu Module 1 Port A 100Base TX Link State Online Auto negotiate gt Manual negotiate gt Full Half gt Hundred Base 100Base TX Ten Base lt 10Base T gt Re Return to Module Management Menu J Figure 44 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card Converteon Management Software User s Guide The parameters in the menu are described in Table 16 Table 16 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Cards Setting Description Auto negotiate These selections are used to control the speed and Manual negotiate duplex mode settings of the twisted pair port on the Full management cards The Auto negotiate setting the Half default setting activates IEEE 802 1u Auto Negotiation Hundred Base 100Base TX so that the speed and duplex mode of the port are Ten Base 10Base T established automatically Auto Negotiation is designed to ensure that the ports on the management card and the network device are operating at the same speed and that they are communicating at the highest possible common
288. nnne nnns enn ESEE nE nnn nnn 75 Starting a Web Browser Management Session ssssssssssssseeeee nenne nennen nennen nne erret nnne n nene nennen nnne 76 Saving Your Configuration Changes c ss cesgecnsescceqesdenrensceedeteneecusdecedadeetpenetiacespecsiecsscbenpiscesescesuedareeedtatergenteesbqeestaneres 78 Saving the Configuration of the AT CV5M02 Management Card sssssssseseeeeeeen nennen eee 78 Saving the Configurations of the Local AT CM Line Cards sssesseeeeeen enne nennen nennen 80 Saving the Configurations of the Remote AT CM Line Cards em een eene nennen 83 Updating the Master Configuration File on a Standby Management Card sse 83 What to Configure First on the AT CV5M02 Management Card seen eene nennen enne 85 Changing the Manager and Operator Passwords ssssssssssseeeen nene nennen nne errem nennen nennen 85 Assigning an IP Address Configuration and Changing the Community Strings es 86 Setting the Date and Time sss EAA EEREN ANEA 87 Naming the Management Card ssssssssseseeeeeneee ener nne nnne enn nennen innere eer enr nennen ennt en nennen nennen 88 SIebfeldvi E 89 Configuring the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM70S Line Cards for the OAM based Features ssssssssssss 90 Setting the Operating Mode iecit ion x
289. nt Card because they are able to determine for themselves when the chassis loses power on a single power supply module This leaves the second slot in the chassis available for another media converter line card This is illustrated in Figure 10 The remote AT CM3 Card Theremote AT CV1203 Chassis loses power on one power supply sends the first RPS failure signal to its local counterpart in the AT CV5000 Chassis The local AT CM3 Card sends the signal over the backplane to the management card Y lt The management card enters TRI BS Tes Tee Tes Tes Teo Tee Ted mo Joo eo sn the event in the event log and E g i sends an SNMP trap a L Figure 10 AT CM3 Line Cards and First RPS Failure Signal However if you have the older version of the AT CV1203 Chassis then just as with the AT CM2 Line Cards the chassis must have the management card to support the first RPS failure signal As stated earlier you do not have to configure the management card or connect its 10 100Base TX port to your network The card simply has to be in the chassis Converteon Management Software User s Guide How do you know whether you have an older or a newer version of the AT CV1203 Chassis You have to look at its serial number You
290. nt card configure the settings of the two AT CM70S Line Cards including the settings for the T1 E1 ports as required by your network 4 For the AT CM70S Line Card to be deployed at the remote site change its UART setting to UART local console mode after configuring its T1 E1 ports This will make it possible for you to adjust the settings of the T1 E1 ports from the Console port when the line card is installed at the remote site How to set the UART setting on the AT CM70S Line Card is explained in the following procedure The procedure requires the AT CV5M02 Management Card The UART setting cannot be set through the Console port on the card A Caution This procedure may be disruptive to network operations The AT CM706 Line Card resets and initializes its management software when the UART setting is changed Some network traffic may be lost To set the UART setting on the AT CM70S Line Card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration The Module Status and Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 58 on page 158 2 Select the AT CM70S Line Card you want to configure The Module Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 63 on page 169 3 From the Module Configuration Menu select 3 TDM LIU T1 E1 Configuration to display the TDM Management Menu shown in Figure 99 a TDM Management Menu eM Module 15 Port C TDM Port Configurations UART Configurations M BECHER to Module C
291. nt log described 24 displaying 122 F flow control displaying status of on line cards 158 displaying status of on remote line cards 218 228 setting on line cards 169 setting on remote line cards 223 frame sizes described 46 displaying on AT CM3 Line Cards 158 displaying on remote AT CM3 Line Cards 218 228 setting on AT CM2KO0S Line Card 182 l ingress rate limiting displaying status of on line cards 158 displaying status of on remote line cards 218 228 setting on line cards 169 setting on remote line cards 223 Internet Protocol IP address configuration described 23 setting 86 100 L Link Test operating mode described 49 selecting on line cards 176 selecting on remote line cards 224 231 Link Test with OAM operating mode described 49 selecting on line cards 176 selecting on remote line cards 224 231 local management sessions described 26 enabling or disabling 111 starting 72 location 106 loopback tests See OAM loopback tests low power mode configuring on line cards 186 188 configuring on remote line cards 224 230 described 46 displaying status of on line cards 158 displaying status of on remote line cards 218 228 M MAC addresses AT CM and AT CV Line Cards 210 AT CV5M02 Management Card 148 remote AT CM Line Cards 238 management sessions described 26 starting local 72 starting remote Telnet client 75 starting remote web browser 76 manager account changing password 85 111 described 25 ma
292. nt session of a management card has to be a local session For instructions refer to Starting a Local Management Session on page 72 The management card has a Telnet server for remote management from Telnet clients on your network Because this type of management is performed over the network you may find it more convenient than local management which has to be performed in the wiring closet where the chassis is located Remote Telnet management also referred to as in band management uses the same menus as local management and supports all of the same management capabilities The requirements for remote Telnet managed are detailed in Accessing Your Network on page 31 For further instructions refer to Starting a Telnet Management Session on page 75 The AT CV5M02 Management Card can also be managed from a web browser on a network workstation This is an alternative to the menus and it supports nearly all of the same management functions The requirements for remote web browser management are detailed in Accessing Your Network on page 31 To start this type of management session refer to Starting a Web Browser Management Session on page 76 Note The web browser windows are supported on the AT CV5000 Chassis but not on the AT CV1200 or AT CV1203 Chassis SNMP Management Converteon Management Software User s Guide The management card can be managed with a Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP program like HP Op
293. nu View al 2 RegiiR AT CM302 3 Reg20R AT CM302 4 Reg2iR AT CM302 5 Area2aR AT CM302 Mod Name CardTypeVer _ ER_ OperMod FrmSz LPM Slot CPM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL AN REMOTE MODULE FIBER PORT COPPER PORT v400 OAM LT 10240 ON 2 uF 1000 0 0 oo ipn Y 0 WM v400 OAM LT 10240 ON 0 N gt JUD 353 IU 0 oor fe 100 Y D 0 Y v400 OAM LT 10240 ON 0 N 3200 1510 0 oo 100Y fi af V400 OAM LT 10240 ON 2 Y 220 100 i IU 0 Gae fa pojar fE 0 Y 58 Figure 5 Remote Module Status and Configuration Window You cannot perform the following management functions on remote line cards through remote peer management o You cannot disable the twisted pair ports or the fiber optic ports on the remote line cards O You can view but not configure the OAM settings on remote AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards This limitation does not apply to remote AT CM3 Line Cards because you can configure their OAM settings Converteon Management Software User s Guide D You cannot change the operating modes on AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards but you can on AT CM3 Line Cards o You cannot reset AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards but you can AT CM3 Line Cards For instructions on how to use this feature refer to Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management on page 217 59 Chapter 3 OAM based Features Remote Updates of the AT S73 or AT S102 Management Sof
294. o Low Power Mode on page 46 The possible states are o No LPM is disabled on the remote line card and the LEDs are active This is the default setting DJ Yes LPM is enabled on the line card The LEDs are off This column does not apply to remote AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards Slot This column displays the slot numbers of the remote AT CM3 Line Cards in their remote enclosures In order for a remote line card to return its slot number the remote chassis must have the AT CV5M02 Management Card If this parameter is blank the remote chassis does not have a management card This parameter is not supported on remote AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards CPM This column indicates whether or not the remote Converteon enclosures with the AT CM3 Line Cards have the AT CV5M02 Management Card The possible states are Y The remote chassis has a management card N The remote chassis does not have a management card This parameter is not supported on the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards FIBER PORT or COPPER PORT ST This column displays the link status of the ports on the remote line cards The possible states are o The port has establish a link to a network device o o The port has not establish a link to a network device SP This column displays the speeds of the remote ports The possible speeds are o 10 10 Mbps o 100 100 Mbps o 1G 1 Gbps 220 Converteon Management Softw
295. o Module Status and Configuration E Note The maximum frame size parameter applies only to AT CM3 Line Cards and cannot be changed 169 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 170 The columns in the table are described in Table 20 Table 20 Module Configuration Menu Column Description Module This field displays the model name of the line card Newer versions of the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards are identified with suffixes like v2 in their names Port This column identifies the port types Link This column displays the states of the links between the ports and the network devices connected to the ports The possible states are O Online The port has established a link to a network device O Offline The port is not connected to a network device or has not established a link to a device Speed This column displays the current speeds of the ports in Mbps Mode This column displays the current duplex modes of the ports The possible duplex modes are o Full Full duplex mode o Half Half duplex mode 3 Select the port you want to configure You can configure only one port at a time This displays the Port Management Menu shown in Figure 64 dk Port Configurations OAM Configurations Port Management Menu TM Module 4 Port A postu to Module Configuration Menu E Figure 64 Port Management Menu Note The OAM Configurations
296. o display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 26 on page 100 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 Select IP Parameters to display the menu in Figure 29 on page 101 To enter the location of the chassis select Location The location can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current location without entering a new location press the space bar once To enter the name phone number or other information that identifies the person responsible for managing the system select Contact and enter a value of up to 20 alphanumeric characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current location without entering a new location press the space bar once To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration Menu and select Save System Configurations To enter the contact and location information from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Configuration from the left menu bar Select the SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab The SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab is shown in Figure 31 Manager Address Manager Address Manager Address Manager Address Get Community String Set Community String Trap Community String Location Contact Converteon
297. o the MissingLink and OAM operating mode the fiber optic link that connects the cards is active only if the twisted pair ports also have links If either of the twisted pair ports does not have a link to a network device the fiber link is disabled and so is OAM For example if the twisted pair port on the line card in the AT CV1000 Chassis at the remote site did not have a link to its device the fiber optic port on the card would be disabled along with OAM AT CV5000 Chassis Twisted pair cable to network device AT CV 1000 Chassis Fiber optic cable Twisted pair cable to network device Figure 1 MissingLink and OAM Operating Mode 51 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 52 Smart MissingLink Mode The same would happen if the twisted pair port on the line card in the AT CV5000 Chassis did not have a link with its device The fiber optic link across the line cards would be unavailable This relationship between OAM on the fiber optic port and the state of the link on a twisted pair port has to be taken into account when using this operating mode You must remember that in order for OAM and the OAM based features to work on a line card set to this operating mode there have to be links on both ports on the line card and not just on the fiber optic port If you want to have access to
298. o the Main Menu and wait one to two minutes for the card to initialize its management software and to negotiate the OAM settings with its local counterpart Then select the card again from the Remote Module Status and Configuration menu This procedure is used to restore a remote line card to the last saved configuration stored in the master configuration file on the management card in the local chassis This procedure can be used to discard any parameter changes that you may have made to a line card but did not save in the master configuration file or to assign to a new remote line card the save settings as its predecessor For more information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 A Caution If the card s current operating mode is different from its last saved configuration the card will reset possibly resulting in the loss of some network traffic As the line card initializes its management software which takes approximately one minute it forwards traffic using its default parameter settings To use the menus to restore the last saved configuration to a line card 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select Line Card Configuration 2 To view the parameter settings of the card s last saved configuration before activating them on the line card select Display Last Saved Configuration If the fields are empty the master configuration file does not have a previous configuration for this slot or the previous and cu
299. of the Console Port nennen nennen daad en tenentem eere enne 146 aD ee eed ae a nie Pe ee ee in 146 WD BrOWSO 147 Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis sssssesseeeneeneen nene nennen nennen nennen nnne nnns 148 Menusi iiit eee obi E imet meibaueriiucmtte te nti 148 liie EE E A 150 Pinging Network Devices i cre e n tte CEDERE ERR ER REST RUE RR ER RR Me Me RR nec RR ME capra ta 152 FIG PE ieee 152 Webi BrowSen terree te t eri eR ke te p leas ee A e cnedes 152 Displaying the Inter process Communication Monitor sssesseeeeenen nennen nne nnnm enn nnne 153 Mara dag 153 Web Browser ice HE E ede ein ttede deg eae oed bester esee ute Poeti ete on pique tei qe ise eiie eeu dien 154 Displaying Information about the Management Card sssssssssssssseeeeeeeen eene nnne nnnrren nne enne nnns 155 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards sssssssssssssssseeeeeerener nnne 157 Displaying the Status of the Line Cards ccnt oirein einer aienea eee nnne errem nnne n nnne n nennen nne enne nnns 158 IGUrer X 158 Web BrowSerss HR M M 164 Displaying the Parameter Settings of
300. of the cards For instructions on how to assign a name to a line card refer to Assigning Names to the AT CM Line Cards on page 181 App Ver This column displays the version numbers of the management software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Line Cards If this field is blank for an AT CM Line Card the line card and the management card have different versions of the management software This column does not apply to the AT CV Line Cards because they do not have management software Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 24 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window Row Description BootLdr This column displays the version numbers of the Ver bootloader files on the AT CM Line Cards This column does not apply to the AT CV5M02 Management Card or to the AT CV Line Cards because they do not have bootloader files Web Browser To view the version numbers of the management software and bootloader files on the line cards from the web browser windows 1 Select Diagnostics from the menu bar 2 Select the Local CM Line Card tab 3 If the Image Version tab isn t selected select it The columns in the window are described in Table 24 on page 208 Chassis Local CM Line Card Remote CM Line Card Help n EEERIESD xc eu Module Application Version Bootloader Version 1 AT CV5MO02 v4 0 0 2 AT CM302 v4 0 0 v1 7 0 3 AT CM302 v4 0 0 v1 7 0 4 AT CM302 v4 0 0 v1 7 0 5
301. onfiguration Menu pf Figure 99 TDM Management Menu The TDM Port Configurations selection appears in the menu only when the line card s UART setting is set to UART backplane mode Converteon Management Software User s Guide From the TDM Management Menu select UART Configurations to display the UART Configuration Menu shown in Figure 100 a UART Configuration Menu VN Module 15 Port C gt UART Local Console Mode UART Back Plane Mode ie Return to Port Configuration Menu E Figure 100 UART Configuration Menu From the UART Configuration Menu select one of the following options O UART Local Console Mode This setting lets you configure the T1 E1 ports from the Console port on the line card This is the appropriate setting if the line card will be installed in a chassis that does not have the AT CV5M02 Management Card This is the default setting C UART Back Plane Mode This setting lets you configure the T1 E1 ports through the AT CV5M02 Management Card This is the appropriate setting if the line card will be installed in a chassis that has the management card Atthe confirmation prompt type Y to implement your change or type N to cancel it Wait one minute for the line card to reset and initialize its management software If you set the line card to the UART Local Console Mode to deploy the card at a remote site remove the line card from the chassis If you set the line card to
302. ons The card will be unresponsive for approximately two minutes as it downloads and initializes the new software Your management session ends and you have to start a new management session to continue managing the unit A Caution Updating the AT S73 or AT S102 Management Software on a line card interrupts the card s network operations Some network traffic may be lost A line card stops forwarding network traffic for approximately two minutes while it receives and initializes the new software To upgrade the management software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card or the AT CM Line Cards 1 From the Main Menu select Image Download to display the menu in Figure 139 Image Download Menu Image Download via TFTP Image Download via XMODEM Return to Main Menu Figure 139 Image Download Menu 2 Select Image Download via TFTP This displays the menu in Figure 140 d Image Download via TFTP ON Management Card Image Download Single Local CM Line card Image Single Local CM Line Card Bootloader Single Remote CM Line Card Image Single Remote CM Line Card Bootloader Multiple CM Line Cards Image by Card Type All CM Line Cards Image Return to Image Download Menu E Figure 140 Image Download via TFTP Menu 321 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files 3 Select the desired upgrade The options are described in Table 41 Table 41 Image Download via TFTP Menu Parameter Descr
303. op selection in the LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu changes to Customized Mode to indicate that the port settings have been changed from their default values 247 Chapter 8 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card 7T Adjustthe settings as needed Refer to Table 30 for the available settings Table 30 T1 E1 Port Settings Transmit All Ones Menu selections from the AT CV5M02 Management Card O Transmit Data Normally default o Transmit All Ones Menu selections from the Console Port on the AT CM70S Line Card Normal default Unframed All Ones Parameter T1 Settings E1 Settings Receiver Sensitivity Setting D Limited Long Haul O Short Haul CD Long Haul default CD Long Haul default Line Build Out DO DSX 1 CSU 0 to 133ft D 75 Ohm Normal default 9 120 Ohm Normal default o DSX 1 133 to 26610 75 Normal with High o DSX 1 266 to 399ft Return Loss o DSX 1 399 to 533ft o 120 Normal with High 3 DSX 1 533 to 655ft Return Loss o 7 5dB CSU o 15dB CSU o 22 5dB CSU Menu selections from the AT CV5M02 Management Card D Transmit Data Normally default o Transmit All Ones Menu selections from the Console Port on the AT CM70S Line Card Normal default Unframed All Ones PRBS Enable Disable default Enable Disable default Remote Loopback Enable Disable default o2 u uauluu Enable Disable default
304. op up window 4 Enter the new community strings in the Get Community String Set Community String and Trap Community String fields A community string can have up to thirteen characters Spaces and special characters are permitted Community strings are case sensitive 5 Click the Update button Converteon Management Software User s Guide 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 109 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Specifying the IP Addresses of the SNMP Trap Receivers 110 Menus Web Browser The management card can send SNMP traps to up to four trap receivers on your network The traps alert you to significant events in the operations of the Converteon chassis like the removal of line cards the failure of a cooling fan or the loss of a link on a port on a media converter line card The requirements for this feature are described in Accessing Your Network on page 31 To specify the IP addresses of SNMP trap receivers from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 26 on page 100 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 4 Select IP Parameters to display the menu in Fig
305. oses power the AT CM Line Card in the chassis transmits the dying gasp signal from Port A over its fiber optic link to its line card counterpart in the AT CV5000 Chassis at the central office The local card sends the signal over the chassis backplane to the management card which enters the event in its event log and sends an SNMP trap to alert you to the problem Converteon Management Software User s Guide The remote AT CV1203 The remote AT CM Card Line The local AT CM Line Card Chassis loses power Card sends the dying gasp signal to its local counterpart in the AT CV5000 Chassis sends the signal over the backplane to the management card The management card enters the event in the event log and sends an SNMP trap Figure 8 Dying Gasp Feature If there are two line cards in the remote chassis both cards send the signal The requirements for the dying gasp signal are listed here O Only AT CM Line Cards in the AT CV1203 Chassis can send the signal and only AT CM Line Cards in the AT CV5000 Chassis can recognize the signal and pass it to the management card in the chassis This feature is not supported on the AT CV Line Cards the AT CV1000 Chassis or the AT CV1200 Chassis This feature is supported on all the AT CM3
306. ou might also disable unused ports to secure them from unauthorized connections 171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Table 21 Port Configuration Menu Setting Description Flow Control Enable Flow Control Disable Flow control regulates the flow of network traffic on ports set to full duplex mode When flow control is enabled on a port on a line card the port issues pause packets whenever it needs to stop the network device from sending packets The default setting for flow control is enabled Auto negotiate Manual negotiate Full Half Hundred Base lt 100Base TX gt Ten Base 10Base T MDI MDIX 172 These selections control the speed and duplex mode settings of the twisted pair ports on the AT CM Line Cards The Auto negotiate setting the default setting activates IEEE 802 1u Auto Negotiation which configures the speed and duplex mode automatically The Manual negotiate setting deactivates Auto Negotiation on a port so that the parameters can be set manually Selecting this option displays additional settings The Full and Half settings establish the duplex mode of the port which can be either full duplex or half duplex The Hundred Base and Ten Base selections set a port s speed to 100 or 10 Mbps respectively Here are guidelines for setting the speed or duplex mode on a port HB Ifthe network device connected to a port on a line card does not support Au
307. ourse if you never use the SNMPv3 feature on the management card you can ignore that configuration file This section has a requirements section and the procedures o Requirements next o Saving the Configuration Settings on page 329 If you re planning to upload the configuration files to a TFTP server you should update them first with one of the procedures in this section so that they have the most current settings O Transferring the Master and SNMPv3 Configuration Files with the Menus on page 330 This section has the procedures for uploading or downloading the configuration files using the menus O Transferring the Master Configuration File with the Web Browser Windows on page 334 This section has the procedure for uploading or downloading the master configuration file using the web browser windows Here are the requirements to transferring the configuration files on the management card o You have to use TFTP You cannot use XMODEM to transfer the configuration files 0 Totransfer the master configuration file you can use the menus either from a local management session or from a remote Telnet management session or the web browser windows C To transfer the SNMPv3 configuration file you have to use the menus Transferring that configuration file from the web browser windows is not supported 0 To download a configuration file to the management card you have to store the file on the TFTP server
308. ow power mode on the AT CM3 Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar In the Chassis View click either port on the AT CM3 Line Card you want to configure Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time Click the Setting tab shown in Figure 70 on page 179 Click the Edit button in the Low Power Mode section of the window To activate the low power mode and turn off the LEDs on the line card select On In the Low Power Mode pop up window To deactivate the low power mode and turn on the LEDs select Off Click the Update button To save your changes in the master configuration file click the Line Card Configuration tab the Current Configuration tab and the Save Current Configuration button 187 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Setting the Low Power Mode on all the AT CM3 Line Cards If you want to set the local power mode on the AT CM3 Line Cards individually perform the previous procedure If you want to set the mode on all of the AT CM3 Line Cards in the chassis you can save yourself some time and effort by performing one of these procedures instead Note Activating or deactivating the low power mode does not affect the network operations of the AT CM3 Line Cards Menus Tosetthe local power mode on all of the AT CM3 Line Cards from the menus
309. owser management sessions described 26 requirements for 31 starting 76 web server 114 X XMODEM downloading management software 325
310. parameters are defined in Table 31 OAM Client Parameters on page 255 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file click the Line Card Configuration tab the Current Configuration tab and the Save Current Configuration button Converteon Management Software User s Guide Performing the OAM Loopback Test Menus For background information refer to OAM Loopback Tests on page 61 To perform the OAM loopback test from the menus A Caution This test is disruptive to network operations Some network traffic may be lost The local and remote media converter line cards do not forward network traffic during the test 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration Menu An example of the menu is shown in Figure 58 on page 158 2 Select the local AT CM Line Card you want to perform the loopback test This displays the Module Configuration Menu for the line card An example of the menu is shown in Figure 63 on page 169 3 Select Port A to display the Port Management Menu shown in Figure 64 on page 170 4 From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration Menu in Figure 105 on page 254 5 From the OAM Configuration Menu select OAM Loopback Test to display the OAM Loopback Test Menu shown in Figure 108 A OAM Loopback Test TAS Module 11 Port 1 Enable Remote Loopback gt Disable Remote Loop
311. ped below the range Low Clear The laser input of a remote SFP module returned to the operating range 4 To clear all the messages from the log select Clear Event Log from the Event Log Menu Web Browser To view the event log from the web browser windows 1 2 Event Log Syslog Total Events 11 Displaying 1 to 11 Date Time 04 17 08 T1 15117 04 17 08 11 15 17 04 17 08 als Lon n ley 04 17 08 11 15 17 04 17 08 11 15 18 04 17 08 11 75 35 04 17 08 SISS Select Administration from the menu bar If the Event Log tab isn t selected select it The Event Log tab shown in Figure 42 displays the messages from oldest to newest Refer to Table 12 on page 123 for the descriptions of the columns and Table 13 on page 124 for the event messages and their meanings Message REPORT Region22 Line Card 14 Port B Offline REPORT Region21 Line Card 11 Port 4 Offline REPORT Region21 Line Card 11 Port B Offline REPORT Region21 Copper port failure on remote linecard 11 REPORT Region22 Copper port failure on remote linecard 14 REPORT Region21 Line Card 11 Port A Online REPORT Region22 Line Card 14 Port A Online Administration Figure 40 Event Log Tab 3 To clear all of the messages in the log click the Clear Event Log button at the bottom of the tab 129 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Viewing the Activity Monitor The activity monitor displays the event messages in
312. port status Low power mode Cyclical redundancy check Suitable for managed and unmanaged network environments Management available with the AT CV5M02 Management Card AT S102 Management Software 1 Requires the AT CV5M02 Management Card 2 Requires one AT CV5M02 Management Card in the upstream AT CV5000 Chassis 43 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Table 5 lists the line cards in the AT CV Series Table 5 AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 1000Base X twisted pair or fiber optic transceiver SFP slot for a 1000Base X twisted pair or fiber optic transceiver transceiver Varies by SFP transceiver Maximum Model Type Port Slot Connector Cable 1 Distance AT CV101 Fast Ethernet 100Base FX fiber Duplex ST 50 125 or 2 kilometers 1 24 optic 62 5 125 micron miles multi mode 100Base TX RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet AT CV102 Fast Ethernet 100Base FX fiber Duplex SC 50 125 or 2 kilometers 1 24 optic 62 5 125 micron miles multi Mode 100Base TX RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet AT CV102 1 Fast Ethernet 100Base FX fiber Duplex SC 9 125 micron 40 kilometers optic single mode 24 8 miles 100Base TX RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 meters twisted pair 328 feet AT CV102 2 Fast Ethernet 100Base FX fiber Duplex SC 9 125 micron 15 kilometers 9 4 optic single mode miles 100Base T
313. r parameter settings while they initialize the management software a process that takes approximately one Restoring the Default Settings Converteon Management Software User s Guide minute Afterwards the cards use the settings in their configuration files to configure their operating parameters To configure the operating mode from the menus 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select Line Card Configuration 2 If you want to use the DIP switches on the card itself to set the card s operating mode select Line Card DIP Switch Mode and skip to step 4 This is the default setting If you prefer to set the card s operating mode using the management software select Line Card Management Mode 3 In the Configure Operating Mode Via Management Card menu select the desired mode for the card The line card resets and begins to initialize its management software 4 To continue managing the line card return to the Main Menu and wait one to two minutes for the card to initialize its management software and if you selected an OAM mode to negotiate the OAM settings with its local counterpart Then select the card again from the Remote Module Status and Configuration menu This procedure is used to restore a remote line card to its default settings The default settings for the line cards can be found in Chapter A Default Settings for the Management Card and the Line Cards on page 337 Review the following information
314. r this value to permit the View Name to see the subtree specified above E Excluded Enter this value to not permit the View Name to see the subtree specified above Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Row Status This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 View Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 295 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Configuring the SNMPv3 Access Table This section describes the parameters for SNMPv3 Access Table entries The SNMPv3 Access Table is used to configure security groups Each user must belong to a security group After you have configured a security group use the Group Table to assign users to security groups The parameters are Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name Storage Type u uuuuiuiu Before adding entries to the Access Table you should configure entries in the View Table These values are used to configure the Read Write and Notify View parameters Refer to Configuring the SNMPv3 View Table on page 293 To access the SNMPv3 Access Table from the menus O From the
315. r viewing purposes only a Remote Line Card Module Software Image Version UN Converteon Module App Ver BootLdr ver 1 AT CV5M02 v4 0 1 2 Regll AT CM301 v4 0 1 v4 0 0 3 Reg20 AT CM301 v4 0 1 v4 0 0 4 Reg21 AT CM301 v4 0 1 v4 0 0 5 Area2a AT CM301 v4 0 1 v4 0 0 6 Area2b AT CM202 v2 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 7 Regl2 AT CM202 v2 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 8 Reg5 AT CM202 v2 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 9 Regl7 AT CM202 v4 0 1 v1 7 0 10 AT CV102 11 AT CV102 12 AT CV102 13 AT CV102 14 AT CV102 15 Unequi pped 16 Unequi pped 17 Unequi pped 18 Unequi pped S RUE any key to continue B Figure 95 Remote Line Card Module Software Image Version Window 235 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management The columns in the window are described in Table 27 Table 27 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window Row Description Module This column displays the slot numbers the names and the model names of the local AT CM Line Cards in the chassis that has the management card App Ver BootLdr Ver This column displays the version numbers of the management software on the remote AT CM Line Cards This column displays the version numbers of the bootloader files on the remote AT CM Line Cards Web Browser To view the version numbers of the management software and bootloader files on
316. rage Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 775 and 776 776 777 and 778 778 779 and 780 780 781 and 782 782 783 and 784 784 785 through 787 787 788 and 789 789 790 and 791 791 792 and 793 793 794 and 795 795 796 through 798 798 799 and 800 800 801 and 802 802 803 and 804 804 805 through 807 807 808 and 809 809 810 and 811 811 812 through 814 814 815 and 816 816 817 and 818 818 819 through 821 821 822 and 823 823 824 and 825 825 826 through 828 828 829 and 830 830 831 and 832 832 833 through 835 835 836 and 837 837 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 838 to 840 840 841 and 842 842 843 through 845 845 846 and 847 847 851 and 852 852 853 through 855 855 856 through 858 858 859 and 860 860 861 through 863 863 864 and 865 865 866 through 868 868 869 through 871 871 872 and 873 873 874 through 876 876 877 through 879 879 880 and 881 881 882 through 884 884 885 through 887 887 888 through 890 890 891 and 892 892 893 through 895 895 896 through 898 898 899 through 901 901 902 through 904 904 905 through 907 907 908 and 909 909 910 through 912 912 913 through 915 915 357 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line
317. ranch Number Prompt 2 ppt den eee eee eee tee doce d Te Eoo duae dede eleven ce Ree s 275 Enter Leaf N mber Prompts ooi idest ide eco rtc dnnn op ceo ge e iaa dme adegit esa e ede dte ee abre n dt ipee 276 OAM Variable Request Tab massi elder rcr edeee citet eee dd eee dite dede ede edd deve e iere de eddie 276 MIB Tr86 iiie eu ette s irte enel ote ete oe ie ab qe e ES eamm oeste nts 282 SNMPv3 User Configuration Process sssssseeeeeeeneneen ener enne errem en nene enne nes 284 SNMPv3 Message Notification Process ssssssseseseeneen eene nennen enemies 285 Configure SNMPv3 User Table Menu sssese eene nene enne ennemi nre nes 290 SNMPv3 User Table Tb irm e dme tee uti 291 Configure SNMPv3 View Table Menu ssssseeeeen eene mene nen ennemi en nene errem nnn en nene nnn enne 293 SNMPv3 View Table Tab sitire ropet araea tirarai aadar nter en ne FER Een Rn koi ei ie pe agria ede iige 294 Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Menu sssssssee eene nennen enn en nennen nen ennt nen nennen 296 SNMPv3 Access Table Tab erit e debe dede euet ipe pen do added ee ee datore ene deus 297 Configure SNMPv3 Group Table Menu sssseseeeeeenneen eee enne nere en nne nnne nes 300 SNMPv3 Group Table Tab ceret rrt clin oe eterne dede cabe de d eee n ene dede ve eine deine dde 301 Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table Men eicere erede ded ener de drinnen de ko ue
318. ration menu select Display Current Configuration An example of the window is shown in Figure 61 on page 166 The port parameters are described in Table 21 on page 171 and the OAM parameters in Table 31 on page 255 To configure the parameter settings of a port on a remote line card 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select the port you want to configure You can configure only one port at a time 2 From the Port Management Menu select Port Configurations to display the Remote Port Configuration Menu This menu contains the current settings of the port 3 Configure the parameters as necessary Refer to Table 21 on page 171 for the parameter descriptions 223 Chapter 7 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Configuring the Low Power Mode on the AT CM3 Line Cards Configuring the OAM Clients Changing the Operating Mode 224 For background information refer to Low Power Mode on page 46 To set the low power mode on a remote AT CM3 Line Card 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select Configure Low Power Mode to display the menu in Figure 75 on page 186 To activate the low power mode on the line card and to turn off the LEDs select Configure Line Card to Low Power Mode On To disable the low power mode and turn on the LEDs select Configure Line Card to Normal Mode Off For background information refer to OAM Client Settings on page 69 To
319. rd is set to an OAM operating mode To view the current parameter settings of the AT CM Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 In the Chassis View click either of the ports on the AT CM Line Card you want to view Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the model name of the line card You can view only one line card at a time 3 Select the Line Card Configuration tab 4 Select the Current Configuration tab shown in Figure 62 on page 168 167 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Port A Port B Setting Line Card Configuration gp C t Last Saved Default o EA Io Slot Number 5 Module AT CM302 Operation Mode Link Test OAM Visible Mode Save Current Configuration Current Configuration Port amp 100Base FX Port B 100Base TX Port Enable Enabled Enabled Negotiation Manual negotiate Duplex Half MDI MDIX Auto MDI MDIX Ingress Rate Limit 8 Mbps 8 Mbps Egress Rate Limit 8 Mbps 8 Mbps OAM Configuration Admin State Enabled Mode Active Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 Unidirectional Supprt Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support No Variable Retrieval Support Yes Figure 62 Current Configuration Tab This window is for viewing purposes only The parameters for the fiber optic port and the twisted pair port are described in Table 21 on page
320. rd to transition to the active state and afterwards start a new management session Note The two other selections in the Management Card Redundancy tab are described in Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 145 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Setting the Baud Rate of the Console Port 146 Menus The following procedures are used to set the baud rate of the Console port on the management card The port is used to locally manage the card with a terminal or a computer with a terminal emulator program The baud rate is the only adjustable parameter on the port Refer to Starting a Local Management Session on page 72 for all of the Console port settings Note Changing the baud rate of the Console port during a local management session ends your management session To resume managing the chassis change the baud rate of your terminal or terminal emulator program To set the baud rate of the Console port from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration The Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 26 on page 100 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 4 From the System Parameters Configuration Menu select Terminal Configuration The Terminal Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 51
321. real time For background information refer to Activity Monitor on page 24 Menus Toview the activity monitor from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration The Administration Menu is shown in Figure 37 on page 122 2 From the Administration Menu select Start Activity Monitor 3 From the Administration Menu select Activity Monitor to display the monitor An example of the Activity Monitor is shown in Figure 41 The monitor displays the messages as they occur on the line cards in the chassis Converteon E Activity Monitor hit Return to resume the previous menu 10 12 08 12 05 23 Module 5 has been removed 10 12 08 12 08 02 Module 5 has been Installed 10 12 08 12 10 30 Module 10 has been removed 10 12 08 12 14 02 Module 10 has been Installed 10 12 08 12 17 34 Power Tray A has been Installed 10 12 08 12 28 34 Power Tray B has been removed Vy Figure 41 Activity Monitor For the descriptions of the columns and messages refer to Table 12 on page 123 Table 13 on page 124 and Table 14 on page 127 4 To return to the Administration menu press Return 5 If you return to the Activity Monitor during the same management session the monitor displays those event messages that occurred in the interim If you start a new session the monitor displays those events that occurred since the start of the management session 6 To stop the activity monitor select Stop Activity Monitor
322. red on the TFTP server All of the AT CM3 Line Cards use the same image file Be sure to include the img extension AT CM3xx_AM3Kxx Bootloader Image File Name ATS102 To update the bootloader file on the AT CM301 AT CM302 and AT CM3KOS Line Cards enter in this field the name of the new bootloader file stored on the TFTP server All of the AT CM3 Line Cards use the same bootloader Be sure to include the bin extension AT CM2x2 Image File Name To update the AT S73 Management Software on the AT CM201 AT CM202 AT CM202 1 AT CM202 2 AT CM212A 1 and AT CM212B 1 Line Cards enter in this field the name of the new image file stored on the TFTP server All of these line cards use the same image file Be sure to include the img extension AT CM2Kx Image File Name To update the AT S73 Management Software on the AT CM2KOS Line Card enter in this field the name of the new image file stored on the TFTP server Be sure to include the img extension 318 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 40 TFTP Image Download Configuration Menu Field Description AT CM70x Image File Name To update the AT S73 Management Software on the AT CM706 Line Card enter in this field the name of the new image file stored on the TFTP server Be sure to include the img extension AT CM2x2 CM2Kx CM70x Bootloader Image File Name ATS73 To update the bootloader file on the A
323. riable performs the same function in this message as it does in the previous message indicating the slot number of the line card that received the signal in the AT CV5000 Chassis Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card This chapter has the following sections u uuu 0 uuuuuuuu ui suiu Q Oaog0Q060 Q0 0 Assigning an IP Address Configuration on page 100 Assigning a Name on page 104 Assigning Contact and Location Information on page 106 Configuring the SNMP Community Strings on page 108 Specifying the IP Addresses of the SNMP Trap Receivers on page 110 Configuring the Management Security on page 111 Enabling or Disabling the Web Server on page 114 Manually Setting the Date and Time on page 115 Configuring the Network Time Protocol Client on page 117 Resetting the Management Card on page 119 Viewing the Event Log on page 122 Viewing the Activity Monitor on page 130 Configuring the Syslog Client on page 131 Configuring the 10 100Base TX Port on page 133 Restoring the Default Setting on the 10 100Base TX Port on page 138 Restoring the Default Values on the AT CV5M02 Management Card on page 140 Configuring the Temperature Threshold on page 142 Activating a Standby AT CV5M02 Management Card on page 144 Setting the Baud Rate of the Console Port on page 146 Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis on page 14
324. ription EgrRL This column displays the settings of the egress rate limiting filters on the ports on the AT CM Line Cards The value 0 means rate limiting has not been set on the port This is the default setting For instructions on setting this parameter refer to Configuring the Port Parameters on the AT CM Line Cards on page 169 This feature is not supported on the AT CV Line Cards OAM This column which applies only to AT CM Line Cards that are operating in an OAM operating mode displays the following OAM client information 00 A This alternates between and o when Port A the fiber optic port is transmitting OAMPDUS Otherwise it remains o B This alternates between and o when Port A is receiving OAMPDUs Otherwise it remains o C This displays the operational state of the OAM client on Port A The possible states are Operational A Active Send Local D Disabled L Active Send Local M Peer Remote Reject P or W Wait R Peer Local Reject 1 Active Send Remote 1 2 Active Send Remote 2 Note The AT CM Line Cards have to be in the OAM operational state to support the OAM based features Achieving this state may take a line card up to two minutes when it is powered on or reset because it has to initialize its management software and negotiate the OAM state with its remote counterpart This column does not apply to the AT CV5M02 Management
325. rmines the source of the configuration settings of the line card installed in the slot If auto copy is disabled on a slot the line card uses the configuration file in its own flash memory to set its parameters whenever it is reset or powered on If auto copy is enabled the line card receives its configuration settings from the master configuration file on the management card For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 Review the following information before performing these procedures C The auto copy setting for a slot is stored in the master configuration file on the management card and not on the line card Consequently the AT CM Line Cards do not carry this setting with them when you install them in different slots or chassis O The auto copy feature is not supported on the AT CM70S Line Card or the AT CV Line Cards To set the auto copy feature from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 2 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the slot that you want to configure The slot must have an AT CM Line Card You can configure only one slot at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 63 on page 169 is displayed 3 Select Line Card Configuration to display the menu in Figure 72 a Line Card Configuration B Auto copy Line Card configuration Display Current configuratio
326. rn to the Main Menu The management card adds the date and time to event messages and SNMP traps You can set the date and time manually or you can configure the Network Time Protocol NTP client so that the card obtains this information from an NTP server on your network or the Internet If you choose to use the NTP client review Accessing Your Network on page 31 to learn the client s requirements Note If you enter the date and time manually you ll have to reenter it whenever the management card is reset or the chassis is powered off because the card does not have an onboard battery to maintain the information For this reason the NTP client is the recommended method for setting the date and time 87 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session 88 Naming the Management Card To set the date and time 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration 4 From the System Parameters Configuration menu select System Clock Configurations 5 To set the date and time manually do the following a In the System Clock Menu select System Date mm dd yy and enter a new date in the format mm dd yy format For example April 5 2008 would be 4 5 08 b Select System Time hh mm ss and enter a new time in 24 hour hh mm ss format The seconds are optional For ex
327. roblem or after the installation of a line card to verify the links on the ports As with all of the operating modes this mode does not interfere with the forwarding of traffic by a media converter line card during normal network operations The AT CM3 Line Cards have two versions of the Link Test operating mode one with and another without support for the OAM based features To use the Link Test mode together with the OAM based features on the fiber optic port set the card to this operating mode Or to use the Link Test mode without the OAM based features set the line card to just the Link Test mode This operating mode makes it possible for the two ports of a line card to share their link states with each other so that a change to the state of a link on a port is automatically replicated on the other port In this way both ports on a line card and the network devices connected to the ports are kept aware of any changes to the states of a link on a port When a line card in the MissingLink mode detects that a port cannot establish a link to its network device or has lost its link the card replicates the loss on the other port on the card by disabling the port s transmitter This notifies the network device connected to the port that there is no link on the other port To explain it another way the MissingLink mode will not allow a port to establish a link to a network device unless the companion port on the card can also establish a
328. rocedure in this section explains how to configure the TFTP client on the AT CV5M02 Management Card This is the first step to using TFTP to download new versions of the management software programs to the management card or the AT CM Line Cards You can perform this procedure from a local management session or a remote Telnet session After you ve configured the client go to Downloading New Management Software Using TFTP on page 320 Note You cannot use the web browser windows to download new versions of the management software programs to the management card or the line cards To configure the TFTP client 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 26 on page 100 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 3 From the Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 4 From the System Parameters Configuration Menu select TFTP Image Download Configuration to display the menu in Figure 138 ee TFTP Server IP Address Management Card ATS99 AT CM3xx CM3Kxx Image File Name ATS102 AT CM3xx CM3Kxx Bootloader Image File Name ATS102 AT CM2x2 Image File Name AT CM2Kx Image File Name AT CM70x Image File Name AT CM2x2 CM2Kx CM70x Bootloader Image File Name ATS73 TFTP Image Download Configuration ES RETURN to System Parameters Conf
329. roup Table Tab The parameters for SNMPv3 Group Table entries are defined in Table 36 Table 36 SNMPv3 Group Table Parameters Parameter Description Security Name Security Model The Security Name that you want to associate with a group Enter a Security Name that you configured in Configuring the SNMPv3 User Table on page 290 The corresponding SNMP protocol of the User Name The possible values are 1 v1 Select this value to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv1 protocol 2 v2c Select this value to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv2c protocol 3 v3 Select this value to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv3 protocol 301 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Table 36 SNMPv3 Group Table Parameters Parameter Description Group Name a Group Name that you configured in the SNMPv3 Access Table Refer to Configuring the SNMPv3 Access Table on page 296 There are four default values for this field a defaultV1GroupReadOnly o defaultV1GroupReadWrite D defaultV2cGroupReadOnly o defaultV2cGroupReadWrite These values are reserved for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c implementations Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesi
330. rrent line cards of the slot are different models 3 To return the line card to its last saved configuration return to the Line Card Configuration menu and select Restore Last Saved Configuration 4 Atthe confirmation prompt select Yes to restore the settings or No to cancel the procedure Saving the Parameter Settings Resetting the Remote AT CM3 Line Cards Converteon Management Software User s Guide When you change a parameter setting on a remote line card your change is automatically saved by the card in its configuration file in flash memory which retains your changes even when the chassis is powered off or the card is removed from the enclosure The configuration settings of the remote line cards can also be saved in the master configuration file on the management card from where they can be restored to the remote cards should that ever be necessary To update the master configuration file on the management card select Line Card Configuration and Save Line Card Configuration If you ever need to restore the setting to the line card perform Restoring the Last Saved Configuration on page 226 This procedure is not supported on the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards Caution This procedure will disrupt the network operations of the line card Some network traffic may be lost To reset a remote AT CM3 Line Card 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select Reset Line Card The line card immediately res
331. rt Management Menu shown in Figure 64 on page 170 From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration Menu shown in Figure 105 on page 254 From the OAM Configuration Menu select Send OAM Variable Request The prompt in Figure 118 is displayed Converteon Enter branch number 0 255 Figure 118 Enter Branch Number Prompt 275 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 6 Enter the branch number of the MIB package or object to be returned The range is 0 to 255 The prompt in Figure 119 is displayed Converteon Enter leaf number 0 255 gt Figure 119 Enter Leaf Number Prompt 7 Enter the leaf number of the package or object to be returned The range is 0 to 255 If the remote OAM device has a value for the corresponding MIB object the value is displayed on the screen Web Browser To send MIB variable requests from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 From the Chassis View click Port A the fiber optic port on the AT CM Line Card whose remote counterpart you want to query with an OAM variable request Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line Card 3 If the Port A tab is not selected select it 4 Click the OAM Variable Request tab to display the window in Figure 120 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Men
332. s only Refer to Table 32 on page 265 for the definitions of the items in the window 271 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client Web Browser To display OAM status information about remote OAM clients from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 From the Chassis View click Port A the fiber optic port on the AT CM Line Card that is connected to the remote OAM device whose status information you want to view Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line Card 3 If the Port A tab is not selected select it The OAM client is only supported on Port A 4 Click the OAM Information tab to display the tab in Figure 113 on page 270 5 Click the Remote OAM Information tab to display the tab in Figure 115 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Setting Line Card Configuration Port Port Port OAM OAM OAM OAM OAM Variable Status Configuration Statistics Configuration Information Statistics Loopback Test Request Slot Number 3 Card Type AT CM302 Local OAM Information Remote OAM Information MAC Address ff fF fF fF FF FF MUX State Forward Parser State Forward Local Discovering No Local Stable Yes Remote Discovering No Remote Stable Yes Critical Event No Dying Gasp No Link Fault No OAM Version 0x01 Config Revision 0x0005 Vendor Information 0x00970001 Vendor OUI 00 30 84 Mode Act
333. s recommends this storage type Row Status This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Group Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 302 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring the SNMPv3 Notify Table The SNMPv3 Notify Table is used to create names for sending traps or inform messages The entry parameters in the SNMPv3 Notify Table are u uuu Notify Name Notify Tag Notify Type Storage Type The parameters are defined in Table 37 on page 304 To access the Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table from the menus o From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration gt System Parameters Configuration gt SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table The Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table menu is shown in Figure 132 a Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table 38s Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry KCRECHER to SNMPv3 Configurations E Figure 132 Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table Menu To access the SNMPv3 Notify Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the Notify Table tab The tab is shown in Figure 133 on page 304 303 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Configuration System SNMPv1 amp SNMPy 2c SNMP3 Files Help User View Access Group Notify
334. se OAM variable requests to view but not change MIB values 0 This feature cannot be used to view the MIB objects in the private Allied Telesis MIB Note The AT CM Line Cards do not support any of the MIB objects in the portion of the MIB tree that variable requests can access So although the line cards can be used to send variable requests to query other OAM compatible devices for MIB values they will not respond to variable requests from other OAM compliant devices For instructions refer to Sending OAM Variable Requests to View MIB Variables on page 275 OAM Client Settings Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 9 lists the parameter settings for the OAM clients for the OAM based features on the AT CM Line Cards The instructions on how to configure the clients can be found in Configuring the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM7068 Line Cards for the OAM based Features on page 90 and Configuring the OAM Client on page 254 Table 9 OAM Parameter Settings for the OAM based Features OAM Parameter Local AT CM Line Card in a Managed Chassis Remote AT CM Line Card or Other OAM Compatible Device AT CM3 Line Card Operating Mode Link Test with OAM MissingLink with OAM or Link Test with OAM MissingLink with OAM or Smart MissingLink with Smart MissingLink with OAM OAM AT CM2 Line Card Operating Mode OAM Visible OAM Visible OAM Admin State Enabled Enabled OAM Mode Active A
335. selection applies only to Port A on AT CM Line Cards The line card has to be set to an OAM operating mode Otherwise the selection is hidden from view The AT CV Line Cards do not support OAM Converteon Management Software User s Guide 4 Select Port Configurations The Port Configuration Menu for the selected port is displayed The options in the menu vary depending on the type of port and card The example in Figure 65 is for a twisted pair port a Port Configuration Menu E Converteon Module 4 Port A gt Port Enable Port Disable gt Flow Control Enable Flow Control Disable Auto negotiate gt Manual negotiate gt Full Half gt Hundred Base 100Base TX Ten Base 10Base T Auto MDI MDIX MDI MDIX Ingress Rate Limit Egress Rate Limit Port Statistics Ne Return to Module Management Menu E Figure 65 Port Configuration Menu 5 Configure the settings of the port as needed Table 21 explains the possible parameters for both twisted pair and fiber optic ports Table 21 Port Configuration Menu Setting Description Port Enable These two selections enable and disable a port When a port Port Disable is enabled it forwards traffic to and from the network device connected to it This is the default setting When you disable a port it stops forwarding traffic You might disable a port if there is a problem with the cable or with the network device connected to it Y
336. serve power by turning off a line card s LEDs when you are not monitoring them LPM does not control the RDY LED The possible states are o No LPM is disabled on the line card and the LEDs are active This is the default setting O Yes LPM is enabled on the line card The LEDs are off You can set LPM on a line card using the recessed button on the card s front panel or through the management card as explained in Setting the Low Power Mode on the AT CM3 Line Cards on page 186 LPM is not supported on the AT CV5M02 Management Card or on the AT CM2 AT CM70S and AT CV Line Cards AC This column displays the status of the auto copy feature for those chassis slots that have AT CM Line Cards For background information refer to Configuration Files on page 32 The possible states are O N for No The auto copy feature is disabled on the slot The AT CM Line Card uses its own configuration file to set its parameter settings 161 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards Table 19 Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description AC Continued O Y for Yes The auto copy feature is activated on the slot The configuration settings for the AT CM Line Card in the slot are provided by the management card from the master configuration file The AT CM70S Line Card and the AT CV Line Cards do not support the auto copy feature VER This column displays the version numb
337. sssssssseeeeee eee nem ennemi 228 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Page sse nennen nnne 229 Remote Line Card Module Software Image Version Window esee 235 Remote Image Version Page iere ertet ect snout rhage dhenbsucteuschige te kPa e Brei prec ko Unde taa zee educere eade conc 236 Remote Line Card Module Information Window sese nennen 238 UART Settings on the AT CM70S Line Card sse nee enne nene nennen nennen nennen 243 TDM Management M NU rt De cates alice canada Sandan pause Dee Une ee so edet eese A e e rte ion ERE Pra Tapes a PAR aai 244 UART Configuration Menu cesses enne nennen nennen err enn sienten rnnt senten nennen nennen 245 LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu ssesesseeeen enne nennen nennen nnne nennen nene ennemis 246 TDM Channel Configuration Menu 1 sess een eene ennemi nnn en nnne n nennen nnne 247 TDM Channel Configuration Menu 2 cccccccccceceeceeeeceaececeesesaece eee ene ennrnn nennt nns et nnn tr sisi tente nnn ss nennen nnns nnne 247 Local Console Menu on the AT CM70S Line Card ssssssseeee enne enne nene 250 OAM Configurations Menu oot cecidi needed tote i quee entere n eH Cpu eo qe ced reed e ed gea te ui doe Eden d coded ens 254 OAM Configuration Subrmien cnet eror cte tenere leote tede sete seme ce de ei dete seme dee Pe endete Eaa EEAS 255
338. st the quality of the fiber optic connection that serves as the link between two AT CM Line Cards or between a line card and another OAM compliant device The test consists of a local line card in a managed chassis transmitting test packets from Port A the fiber optic port to a remote line card which transmits the packets back to the local line card over the same fiber optic cable As a local line card receives its original test packets it checks for lost packets and for packets with errors and displays the results in statistics counters Figure 7 illustrates a loopback test between two AT CM Line Cards The test packets are generated by a line card in the AT CV5000 Chassis at the central office and are returned by a line card in the AT CV1000 Chassis at a remote site Remote AT CM Line Card in AT CV1000 Chassis Test packets gt e Jeo F P e f re ee Pg SENS OLC aaa AT CV5000 Chassis and AT CV5M02 Management Card oe Local AT CM Line Card Figure 7 Loopback Test For instructions refer to Performing the OAM Loopback Test on page 259 A Caution Loopback tests are disruptive to network operations The local and remote line cards do not forward network traffic during the test Some network traffic may be lost
339. stem and All Line Card Confirmations O Resetting the management card ends your management session To continue managing the chassis wait approximately one minute for the management card to initialize its management software and afterwards start a new management session 0 If the chassis has two AT CV5M02 Management Cards resetting the active card activates the standby management card To resume managing the chassis wait twenty seconds for the standby card to transition to the active state and then start a new management session For more information refer to Active and Standby Management Cards on page 28 To reset the AT CV5M02 Management Card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration For the description and an example of the Module Status and Configuration window refer to Displaying the Status of the Line Cards on page 158 119 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 120 2 3 4 Select the AT CV5M02 Management Card If the chassis has two management cards select the active card This displays the Module Configuration Menu in Figure 35 D Module Configuration Menu Bc Module 1 Module AT CV5M02 Port Link Speed Mode A 100BaseTx Online 100M Full Module name Reset Management and Restart System Software Return Management Card Port Configuration to Default Return to Module Status and Configuration Menu p Figure 35 Module Configuration
340. ster configuration files described 32 downloading to AT CV5M02 Management Cards 328 saving parameter settings in 78 standby management cards 36 uploading from AT CV5M02 Management Cards 328 MDI MDIX AT CV5M02 Management Card 133 setting on line cards 169 setting on remote line cards 223 menus navigation 74 MissingLink operating mode described 49 selecting on line cards 176 selecting on remote line cards 224 231 MissingLink with OAM operating mode described 51 selecting on line cards 176 selecting on remote line cards 224 231 N naming AT CM Line Cards 181 AT CV5M02 Management Card 104 remote AT CM Line Cards 223 230 Network Time Protocol NTP client configuring 87 117 described 24 requirements for 31 Oo OAM Bypass operating mode described 53 selecting on line cards 176 selecting on remote line cards 224 231 OAM clients configuring for OAM based features 90 configuring on line cards 254 configuring on remote line cards 224 231 default settings 340 342 displaying statistics for 273 displaying status of on line cards 158 264 displaying status of on remote line cards 218 228 271 Converteon Management Software User s Guide OAM loopback tests configuring AT CM Line Cards for 90 described 61 performing 259 OAM variable requests configuring AT CM Line Cards for 90 described 68 sending 275 OAM Visible operating mode described 53 selecting on line cards 176 selecting on remote line cards 224 231 O
341. t The system tab is shown in Figure 30 on page 103 Click the Edit button in the Configuration section of the window Click the radio button for Return System Configuration to Default and click the Apply button The management card resets and your remote web browser management session ends To resume managing the unit wait one minute for the card to initialize its management software and then start a local management session on the card If you removed a standby AT CV5M02 Management Card reinstall the card The active card whose parameter settings are now at their default settings waits for the standby card to initialize its management software and then automatically sends its configuration file to it over the backplane in the chassis thus restoring the default values on the standby card 141 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Configuring the Temperature Threshold 142 Menus Web Browser The management card has a temperature threshold parameter to alert you in the event the temperature of the wiring closet exceeds operating norms If the threshold is exceeded the management card enters an event in the event log and sends an SNMP trap The temperature is measured on the power supply near the cooling vents of the chassis and tends to reflect the ambient air temperature The temperature threshold applies only to the AT CV5000 Chassis This feature is not supported on the AT CV1200 or AT CV1203 Chass
342. t Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 370 Index Numerics 10 100Base TX port AT CV5M02 Management Card configuring 133 default setting 338 described 23 restoring default setting to 138 A activity monitor described 24 displaying 130 AT CM Line Cards configuration files 32 configuring OAM client 254 configuring port settings 169 configuring remote port settings 223 230 configuring with remote peer management 218 228 default settings 340 342 described 40 42 displaying MAC addresses of 210 displaying management software version numbers of 207 displaying parameter settings of 166 displaying port statistics 203 displaying remote port settings 223 229 displaying remote MAC addresses 238 displaying remote serial numbers 238 displaying remote status of 218 228 displaying remote version numbers 235 displaying serial numbers of 210 displaying SFP information 213 displaying status of 158 displaying status of remote 218 228 downloading software to with TFTP 320 downloading software to with XMODEM 325 naming 181 naming remote 223 230 resetting all 199 201 resetting one AT CM3 Line Card 198 resetting remote 227 234 restoring configurations 33 restoring remote to default settings 225 232 restoring remote to last saved configuration 226 233 restoring to default settings 191 restoring to last saved configuration 195 setting operating modes on 176 setting operating modes on remote 224 231 AT CM2 Lin
343. t card When the Console port is disabled local management of the chassis through the RS 232 Console port is prohibited The default setting for the Console port is enabled If you disable local management during a local management session your current session is not interrupted However the card will not allow you to establish any new local management sessions When disabled the Console port still displays bootup information when the card is powered on Remote Omega Enabled These parameters are used to enable and disable the Telnet No Remote Omega server on the management card The default setting is enabled When this option is set to disabled you cannot manage the chassis from a remote Telnet client Note To set the web browser server refer to Enabling or Disabling the Web Server on page 114 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration Menu and select Save System Configurations Web Browser To configure the security features of the management software from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the left menu bar 2 Ifthe System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 30 on page 103 3 To configure the security features click the Edit button in the Omega Options section of the tab to display a pop up window 4 Configure the parameters as needed The options are defined in Table 11 Omega Options Menu o
344. tbeat messages are generated periodically by the standby card to check the status of the active card Converteon Management Software User s Guide Accessing Your Network The management card must have access to your network to perform the functions listed here 2 uuuuouiu Supporting remote Telnet web browser or SNMP management Sending event messages to a syslog server Setting the date and time from a Network Time Protocol server Sending SNMP traps to trap receivers Uploading or downloading files to a TFTP server Pinging remote devices Here are the requirements o The management card must have an IP address configuration You can assign it manually or it can be supplied by a BOOTP or DHCP server on your network For instructions refer to Assigning an IP Address Configuration on page 100 The card s 10 100Base TX port has to be connected to a device on your network such as an Ethernet switch The management card communicates with your network through that port If the chassis has two management cards the 10 100Base TX port on the standby card should also be connected to your network so that in the event the card becomes the active card it too will be able to support those management functions that require network access The management card should reside on the same subnet as the remote devices i e Telnet client syslog server or SNMP trap receivers or have access to their subnet through routers or ot
345. ters for the card Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current name without entering a new name press the space bar once 5 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration Menu and select Save System Configuration The new name for the management card doesn t start to appear in the menus until you return to the Main Menu To assign a name to the management card from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 Ifthe System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 30 on page 103 3 Click the Edit button in the System Information section of the tab 4 In the pop up window select the System Name field and enter a new name for the card of up to 40 characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current name without entering a new name press the space bar once 5 Click the Update button Converteon Management Software User s Guide 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file click the Edit button in the Configuration section of the window and select the Save System Configuration option 105 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Assigning Contact and Location Information 106 Menus Web Browser To enter the chassis location and the name of the network manager responsible for managing the chassis 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration t
346. test packets received on port A from another OAM client This parameter applies only to OAM clients that return the test packets and has no affect on OAM clients that generate the test packets For information on this feature refer to Performing the OAM Loopback Test on page 259 The possible values are o Yes The OAM client can return test packets from OAM loopback tests This is the default setting o No The OAM client cannot return test packets Link Event This parameter is not implemented in this release Support Variable This parameter controls whether or not the OAM client Retrieval on the line card will respond to variable retrieval requests Support from other OAM clients A variable retrieval request is a query of an OAM client by another OAM client for the current value of a MIB object The possible values are Yes The OAM client will respond to variable retrieval requests This is the default setting No The OAM client will not respond to variable retrieval requests Note The AT CM Line Cards do not support any of the MIB objects in the portion of the MIB tree that variable retrieval requests can access As a result the line cards will never return a MIB value in response to a variable retrieval request from an OAM client such as another AT CM Line Card 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Module Configuration Menu and select Line Card Configuration and Save Line
347. th the forwarding of network packets and so can be used by a line card during normal network operations This operating mode is supported on the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards A line card set to this mode ignores the OAMPDUS received on its fiber optic port and forwards the packets as normal network traffic For all intents and purposes this operating mode is identical to the Link Test mode Even the ports Link LEDs operate the same Note This mode does not support the OAM based features 53 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 54 Setting the Operating Mode There are two ways to set the operating modes on the AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards You can use the DIP switches on the line cards or the management card If you use the management card to set the operating mode on a line card the DIP switches are deactivated and reactivating them requires the management card For instructions on how to set the operating modes of the line cards refer to Setting the Operating Mode on page 176 Chapter 3 OAM based Features The Operations Administration and Maintenance OAM is a standard that defines a set of tools and utilities for remotely monitoring testing and troubleshooting a network It provides network operators the ability to monitor the condition of the network and to determine the location of the failing links or fault conditions For background information on OAM refer to the IE
348. the TFTP server on your network and the TFTP server must be active The management card must have an IP address configuration For instructions refer to Assigning an IP Address Configuration on page 100 The management card must reside on the same subnet as the TFTP server or must have access to its subnet through routers or other Layer 3 routing devices If the management card and the TFTP server reside on a different subnets the card s IP address configuration has to include a default gateway address that identifies the IP address of the router interface of the first hop to reaching the server The 10 100Base TX port on the card has to be connected to a device on your network such as an Ethernet switch The management card communicates with your network through that port To download new management software on the AT CM70S Line Card the card must be set to the UART backplane mode For instructions refer to Selecting the Management Method for the AT CM70S Line Card on page 242 Note Allied Telesis recommends that you update the master configuration file on the management card with the current configurations of all the AT CM Line Cards in the chassis before performing this procedure For instructions refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 320 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Note Updating the AT S99 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card interrupts the card s operati
349. the UART Back Plane Mode so that you can use the AT CV5MO2 Management Card to configure its parameter settings go to the next procedure for instructions 245 Chapter 8 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the AT CV5M02 Management Card To configure the T1 E1 ports on the AT CM70S Line Card from the menus in the AT CV5MO2 Management Card 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration The Module Status and Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 58 on page 158 2 Select the AT CM70S Line Card you want to configure 3 From the line card s Module Configuration Menu select TDM LIU E1 T1 Configuration to display the menu in Figure 99 on page 244 4 From the TDM Management Menu select TDM Port Configurations to display the LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu shown in Figure 101 Note If the TDM Port Configurations selection is not included in the TDM Management Menu you need to set the card s UART setting to the backplane mode For instructions refer to Selecting the Management Method for the AT CM70S Line Card on page 242 di LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu TN Module 15 Port C gt Manufacture T1 Mode Manufacture El Mode Customized Mode Channel 1 Sub Menu 1 Channel 1 Sub Menu 2 Channel 2 Sub Menu 1 Channel 2 Sub Menu 2 Channel 3 Sub Menu 1 Channel 3 Sub Menu 2 Channel 4 Sub Menu 1 Channel 4 Sub Menu 2 R
350. the current settings on the management card Click the All CM Line Cards tab Click the Edit button in the Configuration section of the window In the pop up window click the radio button for Save All CM Line Card Configurations and click the Apply button This command updates the master configuration file with all of the current settings on the line cards For instructions on how to upload the files refer to Transferring the Master Configuration File with the Web Browser Windows on page 334 There are two phases to uploading or downloading the configuration files from the menus In the first phase you configure the TFTP client In the second you perform the actual transfer Configuring the TFTP Client To configure the TFTP client to upload or download the master or SNMPv3 configuration file 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 26 on page 100 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 From the System Configuration Menu select System Parameters Configuration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 101 330 Converteon Management Software User s Guide 4 From the System Configuration Menu select TFTP File Upload Download Configuration to display the menu in Figure 142 ia TFTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Upload Configuration File Name Destination Download Configuration File Name Source
351. the default entry for the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c configuration You cannot use this default value for an SNMPv3 View Table entry View Subtree 294 The subtree that this view will or will not be permitted to display You can enter either a numeric value in hex format or the equivalent text name For example the OID hex format for TCP IP is 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 The text format is for TCP IP is tcp Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 34 SNMPv3 View Table Parameters Parameter Description Subtree Mask A subtree mask in hexadecimal format This is an optional parameter used to further refine the value in the View Subtree parameter This parameter is in binary format The relationship between a subtree mask and a subtree is similar to the relationship between an IP address and a subnet mask The subnet mask further refines the IP address In the same way the OID table entry defines a MIB View and the subtree mask further restricts a user s view to a specific the column and row of the MIB View The value of the Subnet Mask parameter is dependent on the subtree you select For example if you configure the View Subtree parameter as MIB ifEntry 0 3 has the following value 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 0 3 To restrict the user s view to the third row all columns of the ifEntry MIB enter the following value for the Subtree Mask parameter ff bf View Type The possible values are I Included Ente
352. the default settings on the management card from the menus 1 If the chassis has two AT CV5M02 Management Cards remove the standby card From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the menu in Figure 26 on page 100 Web Browser Converteon Management Software User s Guide From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 27 on page 100 Select Return System Configuration to Default A confirmation prompt is displayed At the confirmation prompt select Yes to restore the default setting on the management card or No to cancel the procedure If you respond with yes the management card resets and your management session ends To resume managing the unit wait one minute for the card to initialize its management software and then start a local management session on the card If you removed a standby AT CV5M02 Management Card reinstall the card The active card whose parameter settings are now at their default settings waits for the standby card to initialize its management software and then automatically sends its configuration file to it over the backplane in the chassis thus restoring the default values on the standby card To restore the default settings on the management card from the web browser windows 1 If the chassis has two AT CV5M02 Management Cards remove the standby card Click Configuration from the menus bar If the Systems tab is not displayed select i
353. the manager account and operator for the operator account The password is displayed as a series of asterisks To delete the current password without assigning a new password enter a space in the password field Timeout This parameter is used to set the console timer which controls the amount of time in minutes the management software waits before it automatically ends an inactive local or remote management session The management software automatically logs off a management session if there is no management activity for the duration of the timer This security feature can prevent unauthorized individuals from using your management station to alter the configuration settings of the media converter chassis should you step away from your system during a management session The console timer has a range of 0 to 60 minutes The default value is 10 minutes A value of 0 zero disables the console timer so that inactive management sessions are never timed out This value should be used with caution If you disable the console timer you must remember to always log off after your local and remote management sessions of the media converter Otherwise future management sessions may be blocked 112 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 11 Omega Options Menu Parameter Description Local Omega Enabled These parameters are used to enable or disable the Console Disable Local Omega port on the managemen
354. the procedures in the order given here For overview information about SNMPv3 see the SNMPv3 Overview on page 280 The following SNMPv3 tables are described Configuring the SNMPv3 User Table next Configuring the SNMPv3 View Table on page 293 Configuring the SNMPv3 Access Table on page 296 Configuring the SNMPv3 Group Table on page 300 Configuring the SNMPv3 Notify Table on page 303 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Address Table on page 306 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table on page 309 u uuuuiuouiu The SNMPv3 User View Access and Group tables are concerned with setting up a user determining authentication and privacy and associating a user to a security group The SNMPv3 Notify Target Address and Target Parameters tables are concerned with message notification You use the SNMPv3 Community Table to configure SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 communities Due to the complexity of the SNMPv3 configuration Allied Telesis recommends that you configure the SNMPv3 protocol with the procedures listed above in the order they are listed However you can configure the SNMPv3 protocol using the above procedures in any order 289 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Configuring the SNMPv3 User Table This section describes the parameters for SNMPv3 User Table entries The parameters are User Name Authentication protocol Authentication password Privacy protocol u uuu iu Privacy password To manage the
355. ting a Management Session Saving Your Configuration Changes 78 Saving the Configuration of the AT CV5M02 Management Card As you configure the parameter settings on the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM708S Line Cards it s important to keep in mind how the cards go about the task of permanently saving their settings Otherwise you may find yourself having to reenter the same settings if you have to reset a card or a chassis You ll also miss out on an important feature of the Converteon product line that lets you restore previous configurations to the line cards There are two parts to this discussion The first has to do with the commands that you use in the menus and the web browser windows to save the configuration settings This part of the discussion is the focus of the following subsections As you ll learn all of these commands do basically the same thing which is they update the master configuration file in flash memory on the management card Where they differ is in the amount of information that s saved There are commands for saving just the changes to the management card the changes to a single line card or the changes to all of the line cards in the chassis The second part of the discussion has to do with the configuration files themselves There are actually several configuration files on the management card and a separate configuration file on each of the line cards This part of the dis
356. to 75 C The default is 60 C Click the Update button To save your changes in the master configuration file click the Edit button in the Configuration section of the window and select the Save System Configuration option 143 Chapter 5 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Activating a Standby AT CV5M02 Management Card The procedures in this section activate the standby AT CV5M02 Management Card in a chassis that has two management cards You might perform these procedures if the currently active management card is experiencing problems and you want to use the standby card to manage the chassis For background information refer to Active and Standby Management Cards on page 28 These procedures do not interrupt the operations of the media converter line cards in the chassis However they do end your management session Menus To activate the standby management card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Management Card Redundancy to display the Management Card Redundancy Menu shown in Figure 49 K Management Card Redundancy Menu UN Switch Over Management Cards Copy Active Card Configuration to Standby Card Save Current Configuration of Standby Card Return to Administration Menu Fi Figure 48 Management Card Redundancy Menu 2 Select Switch Over Management Cards The following confirmation prompt is displayed Do Management Card switch over Yes or No Yes NO Ret
357. to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 To use the menus to update the master and SNMPv3 configuration files 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration 3 From the System Configuration Menu select Save System Configuration This command updates the master configuration file and the SNMPv3 file with all of the current settings on the management card 4 Return to the Configuration Menu 5 From the Configuration Menu select All CM Line Cards Configuration 6 From the All CM Line Cards Configuration Menu select Save All CM Line Cards Configurations This command updates the master configuration file with the current settings of the local and remote line cards For instructions on how to upload the files refer to Transferring the Master and SNMPv3 Configuration Files with the Menus on page 330 329 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files Transferring the Master and SNMPv3 Configuration Files with the Menus To use the web browser windows to update the master and SNMPv3 configuration files 1 2 Click the Configuration button in the menu bar If it isn t selected select the System tab Click the Edit button in the Configuration section of the window In the pop up window click the radio button for Save System Configuration and click the Apply button This command updates the master configuration file and the SNMPv3 file with all of
358. to 9 Do not use special characters such as spaces asterisks or exclamation points in a password To delete the current password without assigning a new password enter a space in the password field The default passwords are friend for the manager account and operator for the operator account For information on the other options in the Omega Options Menu refer to Configuring the Management Security on page 111 7 Return to the Main Menu 85 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session Assigning an IP Address Configuration and Changing the 86 Community Strings You have to assign the management card an IP address configuration if the card will be performing any of these management functions Remote Telnet web browser or SNMP management Sending event messages to a syslog server Setting the date and time from a Network Time Protocol server Sending SNMP traps to trap receivers Uploading or downloading files to a TFTP server OQ0Q0Q00 0 Pinging a remote device The IP address configuration has to consist of a unique IP address and a subnet mask If the management card and the network devices e g syslog server or TFTP server are located on different networks the configuration must also include a default gateway address The default gateway address is the IP address of the router interface that represents the first hop to reaching the remote networks where the devices reside Since a m
359. to Negotiation and has a fixed duplex mode of full duplex disable Auto Negotiation on the port and set the speed and duplex mode manually to avoid a duplex mode mismatch C To operate at 1000 Mbps the twisted pair ports on the AT CM2KO0S and AT CM3KOS Line Cards have to be set to Auto Negotiation You can not manually set the ports to 1000 Mbps When the twisted pair port is set to Auto Negotiation the wiring configuration is set automatically with Auto MDI MDIX When Auto Negotiation is disabled the MDI MDIX setting is manually controlled with these two selections Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 21 Port Configuration Menu Setting Description Ingress Rate Limit These selections are used to impose packet rate limiting on Egress Rate Limit the ports of the line cards and so restrict the flow of network traffic through the AT CM Line Cards Packet rate limiting is used for storm prevention and to protect against the formation of bottlenecks in a network topology The rate limits which are in kilobits and megabits per second can be applied separately on the two ports on a line card The Ingress Rate Limit controls the maximum number of bits per second a port accepts from the device connected to it The port discards any frames that exceed the limit The Egress Rate Limit controls the maximum number of bits per second a port transmits to the network device connected to it Traffic exceeding the li
360. tor account the username is operator and the default password is operator Usernames and passwords are case sensitive After you log on the Chassis View shown in Figure 14 and described in Displaying the Status of the Line Cards on page 158 is displayed 3 To end a management session click Log Out in the menu bar Note You should always remember to select Quit from the Main Menu when you are finished managing the chassis with the manager account If you close your web browser program without logging out the management session remains active and the management card rejects any further attempts to log on until the console timer has timed out 76 Converteon Management Software User s Guide MVE Allied Telesis Module Status amp Configuration Remote Module Status amp Configuration Administration Diagnostics Configuration Management Card Redundancy Log Out AT S99 Converteon Web Management Chas Menu View ie 6 2s6 s6 6 569 569 76 AT CM302 AT CY5M02 AT CM302 AT CM302 e e ej PWR ROY Fur LK Lk xo ss M M5 xs 4 3108NO2 LK n oss 4 amp u amp v AT CM202 AT C 102 AT C 1 AT CM302 AT CM302 e e LK Lk Lk Lk AT CM302 LK LK a xs 4 M xs 4 n ZW x 10 10 ror e e LML D AMIDOM SMLML D AMIDON ee ejeeo o SML ML OAM sML ML OAM Figure 14 Chassis View TT Chapter 4 Star
361. try in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Row Status This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Notify Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 305 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Address Table The SNMPv3 Target Address Table is used to designate the IP addresses of hosts to receive notifications The SNMPv3 Target Address Table is linked internally to the SNMPv3 Notify Table through the Tag List parameter The entries in the SNMPv3 Notify Table receive the host IP addresses from the entries in the SNMPv3 Target Address Table The parameters of the entries in the SNMPv3 Target Address Table are Target Address Name Target IP Address UDP Port Timeout Value Number of Retries Tag List Target Parameters uuuuuuiuiu Storage Type The parameters are defined in Table 38 on page 307 To access the Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table from the menus O From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration System Parameters Configuration SNMPv3 Configurations Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table The Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table menu is shown in Figure 134 di Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table ON Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry
362. ttti trennen 224 Changing the Operating Mode 2 3 dt need eM decet He tete n Le ertet cedo ional 224 Restoring the Default Settings rr ine eet et asin Dice det teo v ee te 225 Restoring the Last Saved Configuration enne nne ren nenne nennen ene enne nn 226 Saving the Parameter Settings 2 1er dee eei p decet te Dee adde adden dedo dme dE decere de hee ee ede Desde dn 227 Resetting the Remote AT CM3 Line Cards sssssseseeee enne nre en nennen nennen enne enne nn 227 Configuring the Remote AT CM Line Cards with the Web Browser Windows e me 228 Displaying the Status of the Remote Line Cards eene mnn en nne nnne 228 Displaying the Current Configuration nennen a ennemi entre nennen nennen nnne 229 Naming a Remote Eine Gard te Eee penitius 230 Configuring the Remote Ports tern ein tee Te Ik eet ERRARE S ERE N Re a STA ARI DE Reden dues 230 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring the Low Power Mode on AT CM3 Line Cards ssssssseeeeeeeeene emere 230 Configuring the OAM Clients on Remote Line Cards ssssssssseeeeeeeen emen nnnm nr nennen 231 Changing the Operating Mode retener teret Fert Miren tee eir n pussctanedgeeseuagedvuaeeased 231 Restoring the Default Parameter Settings enne nrnen nennen nne nnne nnns 232 Restoring the Last Saved Configuration nennen nennen nene enne n nennen nne nennen nns 233 Saving the Par
363. tware 60 Allied Telesis may periodically release new versions of the AT S73 Management Software for the AT CM2 and AT CM70S Line Cards and the AT S102 Management Software for the AT CM3 Line Cards New software can be downloaded to remote media converter line cards through the OAM based remote peer management feature This saves you from having to visit the remote sites when you want to update their management software This feature is illustrated in Figure 6 The remote AT CM Line Card in the AT CV1000 Chassis receives a new version of the AT S73 or AT S102 Management Software over the fiber optic link on Port A from its line card counterpart in the managed chassis in this case the AT CV5000 Chassis The file is downloaded through the management card from a local management session using XMODEM or from a remote TFTP server For instructions refer to Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files on page 315 Remote AT CM Line Card in AT CV1000 Chassis New management software d Local AT CV5000 Chassis and AT CV5M02 Management Card E uu Local XMODEM OR Remote TFTP download server download Figure 6 Downloading New AT S73 Management Software to Remote AT CM Line Cards Converteon Management Software User s Guide OAM Loopback Tests OAM loopback tests are used to te
364. tware Using TFTP on page 320 Downloading New Management Software Using XMODEM on page 325 Q D Transferring Configuration Files on page 328 315 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files Overview Allied Telesis may periodically release new versions of the management software for the Converteon management cards and line cards New releases are available from the company s web site Note Before installing new software be sure to read the software release notes that are included with the new release to determine whether there are any special restrictions or guidelines The cards in the Converteon product line use the following management software programs o The AT CV5MO2 Management Card uses the AT S99 Management Software 3 The AT CM2 and AT CM70S Media Converter Line Cards use the AT S73 Management Software and bootloader file o The AT CM3 Media Converter Line Cards use the AT S102 Management Software and bootloader file o The AT CV Media Converter Line Cards do not use management software You can use XMODEM or TFTP to download new management software Downloads using XMODEM have to be performed from a local management session at the chassis Downloads using TFTP can be performed from local management sessions or remote Telnet management sessions 316 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring the TFTP Client to Download New Management Software Programs The p
365. tyToGroup Table SNMPv3 Notify Table um ei a euim epee ee Linked by User Name or Security Name Linked by Security Name an Linked by View Name Security Model Figure 123 SNMPv3 Message Notification Process 285 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 286 For a more detailed description of the SNMPv3 Tables see the following subsections SNMPv3 User Table on page 286 SNMPv3 View Table on page 286 SNMPv3 Access Table on page 286 SNMPv3 Group Table on page 287 SNMPv3 Notify Table on page 287 SNMPv3 Target Address Table on page 287 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table on page 287 u uuuuiuiu SNMPv3 User Table The Configure SNMPv3 User Table menu allows you to create an SNMPv3 user and provides the options of configuring authentication and privacy protocols With the SNMPv3 protocol users are authenticated when they send and receive messages In addition you can configure a privacy protocol and password so messages a user sends and receives are encrypted The DES privacy algorithm uses the privacy password and the Engine ID to generate a key that is used for encryption Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save this user and its related configuration to flash memory SNMPv3 View Table The Configure SNMPv3 View Table menu allows you to create a view of the MIB OID Tab
366. u Module 4 gt Line Card DIP Switch Mode Line Card Management Mode Return to Module Configuration Menu Figure 68 Operating Mode Configuration Menu for the AT CM3 Line Cards To configure an AT CM2 or AT CM70S Line Card select the new operating mode for the card from the menu You can select only one operating mode The Line Card DIP Switch Mode selection activates the DIP switches on the line card so that the operating mode is controlled with the switches instead of the management software After selecting the new operating mode go to step 7 To configure an AT CM3 Line Card do one of the following O If want to use the DIP switches on the card itself to set the card s operating mode select Line Card DIP Switch Mode and skip to step 7 This is the default setting O If you prefer to set the card s operating mode using the management software select Line Card Management Mode to display the menu in Figure 69 f Configure Operating Mode via Management Card TS Module 4 Link Test Mode Missing Link Mode Smart Missing Link Mode gt OAM Link Test Mode OAM Missing Link Mode OAM Smart Missing Link Mode Return to Operating Mode Configuration Menu Figure 69 Configure Operating Mode via Management Card Menu Select the new operating mode for the line card from the menu You can select only one operating mode 177 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards 178 Note If
367. u View Setting Line Card Configuration Port Port Port OAM OAM OAM OAM OAM Variable Status Configuration Statistics Configuration Information Statistics Loopback Test Request Slot Number 3 Card Type CM302 OAM Variable Request Branch Number 0 255 Leaf Number 0 255 216 Figure 120 OAM Variable Request Tab Converteon Management Software User s Guide Click Edit to display the OAM Variable Request pop up window Select the Branch Number field and enter the branch number of the MIB package or object to be returned The range is 0 to 255 Select the Leaf Number field and enter the leaf number of the package or object to be returned The range is O to 255 Click Send If the remote OAM device has a value for the corresponding MIB object the value is displayed on the screen 277 Chapter 9 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 278 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 This chapter provides a description of the AT S99 implementation of the SNMPv3 protocol In addition the chapter contains procedures that allow you to create and modify SNMPv3 entities The following sections are provided Q SNMPv3 Overview on page 280 Configuring SNMPv3 Entities on page 289 Configuring the SNMPv3 User Table on page 290 Configuring the SNMPv3 View Table on page 293 Configuring the SNMPv3 Access Table on page 296 Configuring the SNMPv3
368. u in Figure 83 on page 199 3 From the Diagnostics Menu select SFP Information The following prompt is displayed Enter Linecard Slot Number gt 4 Enter the slot number of the AT CM2KO0S AT CM70S or AT CM3K0S Line Card with the SFP module The following prompt is displayed Enter LineCard Port A or B 5 Enter the port of the SFP module The example of the SFP Information window shown in Figure 89 is from the AT CM3KOS Line Card The Digital Diagnostics Monitoring Information section which lists the thresholds that generate the event messages listed in Table 14 on page 127 is limited to SFP modules that support digital diagnostics monitoring Otherwise that section of the window is not displayed 213 Chapter 6 Configuring the Media Converter Line Cards a SFP Information Serial ID Number vendor name OUI Vendor IEEE Company ID vendor part number vendor revision number vendor serial number vendor date code ATI Model Temperature Celcius Real Time Alarm Range High Low warning Range High Low Supply voltage V Real Time Alarm Range High Low warning Range High Low TX Bias Current mA Real Time Alarm Range High Low Warning Range High Low Tx Optical Power mw Real Time Alarm Range High Low Warning Range High Low Rx Received Power mw Real Time Alarm Range High Low Warning Range High Low Slot 4 m any key to continue Port A ATI 0
369. uest OAMPDUs Tx Variable Response OAMPDUs Rx Variable Response OAMPDUs Tx Organizational Specific OAMPDUs Rx Organizational Specific OAMPDUs Rx Unsupported OAMPDUs oo O O O O O O OOOO Figure 117 OAM Statistics Tab Refer to the IEEE 802 3ah standard for the definitions of the different types of OAMPDUs 274 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Sending OAM Variable Requests to View MIB Variables Menus These procedures are used to send OAM variable requests from the fiber optic ports on Converteon line cards to view the values of MIB objects on remote devices For background information refer to OAM Variable Requests on page 68 Note You can use Converteon line cards to send variable requests to query other OAM compatible devices for MIB values However since the line cards do not support any of the MIB objects in the portion of the MIB tree that variable requests can access they will not respond to variable requests sent to them by other OAM compatible devices To send MIB variable requests from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration Menu shown in Figure 58 on page 158 Select the local AT CM Line Card you want to send the OAM variable to its remote OAM counterpart The Module Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 63 on page 169 Select Port A the fiber optic port on the line card to display the Po
370. ugh 7142 7142 7143 through 7326 7326 7327 through 7518 7518 7519 through 7722 7722 7723 through 7936 7936 7937 through 8163 8163 8164 through 8403 8403 8404 through 8658 8658 8659 through 8928 8928 8929 through 9216 9216 367 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 368 Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 9217 through 9523 9523 9524 through 9852 9852 9853 through 10204 10204 10205 through 10582 10582 10583 through 10989 10989 10990 through 11428 11428 11429 through 11904 11904 11905 through 12422 12422 12423 through 12987 12987 12988 through 13605 13605 13606 through 14285 14285 14286 through 15037 15037 15038 through 15873 15873 15874 through 16806 16806 16807 through 17857 17857 17858 through 19047 19047 19048 through 20408 20408 20409 through 21978 21978 21979 through 23809 23809 23810 through 25974 25974 25975 through 28571 28571 28572 through 31746 31746 31747 through 35714 35714 35715 through 40816 40816 40817 through 47619 47619 47620 through 57142 57142 57143 through 71428 71428 71429 through 95238 95238 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 142858 through 250000 285714 369 Appendix C Packe
371. ur managed products are available from the following Internet sites Oo Allied Telesis web site www alliedtelesis com 3 Allied Telesis FTP server ftp ftp alliedtelesis com If the FTP server prompts you to log on enter anonymous as the user name and your email address as the password Preface 20 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card The sections in this chapter are uuuuuuuau uai g i i g u su uiu Features on page 22 AT S99 Management Software on page 23 Console Port on page 23 10 100Base TX Port on page 23 IP Address Configuration on page 23 Event Log on page 24 Activity Monitor on page 24 Syslog Client on page 24 Network Time Protocol Client on page 24 Manager and Operator Accounts on page 25 Management Access on page 26 Active and Standby Management Cards on page 28 Accessing Your Network on page 31 Configuration Files on page 32 Converteon Chassis on page 38 21 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Features 22 Here are the features of the AT CV5M02 Management Card Q u uuu Local out of band management through the RS 232 Console port Remote in band management using the card s Telnet server from clients on your network Remote in band management using a web browser Remote in band management using SNMPv1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 Easy to use menus and web browser windows Event log for viewing operatio
372. uration to display the menu in Figure 72 on page 183 Select Display Current Configuration An example of the window is shown in Figure 61 di OAM SoG to Line Card Configuration Display Current Configuration NN Slot 11 Module AT CM302 Operational Mode Link Test OAM Visible Mode Port A 100BaseFX Port B 100Base TX Port Enable Enabled Enabled Negotiation EZ Manual negotiate Duplex Full Speed 100 Base 100Base TX MDI MDIX m MDI Flow Control Enable Enable Ingress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit Configuration Admin State Enabled Mode Active Maximum OAMPDU Size 64 Unidirectional Support Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support Yes variable Retrieval Support Yes Figure 61 Display Current Configuration Window Web Browser Converteon Management Software User s Guide This window is for viewing purposes only The parameters for the fiber optic port and the twisted pair port are described in Table 21 on page 171 The fiber optic port will not display any values for the Negotiation Duplex Speed and MDI MDIX parameters because these parameters are not adjustable or in the case of the MDI MDIX setting do not apply on that type of port A twisted pair port will display values for these parameters only if Auto Negotiation is disabled and the parameters are set manually The OAM settings which are described in Table 31 on page 255 are displayed if the line ca
373. ure 29 on page 101 5 In the Manager Address fields enter the IP addresses of the trap receivers To remove an IP address enter 0 0 0 0 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the System Configuration Menu and select Save System Configurations To specify the IP addresses of SNMP trap receivers from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the left menu bar 2 Select the SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab The SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab is shown in Figure 31 on page 107 3 To change the addresses of the SNMP trap receivers click the Edit button to display a pop up window 4 In the Manager Address fields enter the IP addresses of up to four trap receivers 5 Click the Update button 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 Converteon Management Software User s Guide Configuring the Management Security Menus The AT S99 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card has several security features that protect the card from unauthorized access There are manager and operator passwords and a console time out feature that automatically ends inactive management sessions Additionally there are controls for enabling or disabling local or remote access to the management card To configure the security features from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown
374. uring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 118 Select Enable from the NTP pull down menu to activate the client Or to disable the client select Disable Click the Update button To save your changes in the master configuration file click the Edit button in the Configuration section of the window and select the Save System Configuration option Converteon Management Software User s Guide Resetting the Management Card Menus This procedure is used to reset the management card in the chassis You might reset the card if it is experiencing a problem You can also reset the card using the CPU Reset button on the card s front panel Review the following information before resetting the management card O In most situations resetting the management card will not affect the network operations of the media converter line cards in the chassis However if you changed but did not save the parameter settings of a media converter line card in a slot where the auto copy feature is enabled the line card will revert to its previous settings after the management card resets This may affect the operations of the line card resulting in the loss of some network traffic C Any changes you ve made to the parameter settings of the management card but not saved in the master configuration file are discarded when the card is reset To save the parameter settings return to the Main Menu and select Configuration and Save System Confirmation or Save Sy
375. urn to Management Card Redundancy Menu Figure 49 Confirmation Prompt for Switch Over Management Cards 3 Choose Yes to activate the switchover or No to cancel the procedure If you select Yes your management session ends as the active and standby management cards change states 144 Converteon Management Software User s Guide 4 To resume managing the chassis wait twenty to thirty seconds for the standby card to transition to the active state and afterwards start a new management session Note For explanations of the other two selections in the Management Card Redundancy menu refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 78 Web Browser To activate the standby management card from the web browser windows 1 Select Management Card Redundancy from the menu bar to display the tab in Figure 50 Management Card Redundancy Help Switch over management cards Copy active card configuration to standby card Save current configuration of standby card Figure 50 Management Card Redundancy Tab 2 Inthe section Switch Over Management Cards click Select A confirmation prompt is displayed 3 Inthe confirmation prompt click Yes and Apply to activate the standby card or No and Apply to cancel the procedure If you select Yes your management session ends as the active and standby management cards change states 4 Toresume managing the chassis wait twenty to thirty seconds for the standby ca
376. us The procedures in this section are used to reset all of the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM708 Line Cards in a chassis A Caution Resetting an AT CM Line Card disrupts its normal operations Some network traffic may be lost When an AT CM Line Card is reset it has to initialize its management software During the initialization process which takes approximately one minute the line card forwards network traffic using the default values for its parameter settings Afterwards it configures its parameters using the settings from the AT CV5M02 Management Card or from its own configuration file depending on the auto copy setting of its slot This procedure does not affect AT CV Line Cards or the AT CV5MO2 Management Card To reset the AT CV Line Cards refer to Resetting All of the AT CM AT CM70S and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards on page 201 For instructions on how to reset the AT CV5M02 Management Card refer to Resetting the Management Card on page 119 To reset all of the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM706S Line Cards in the chassis from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Diagnostics The Diagnostics Menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 148 2 From the Diagnostics Menu select Local CM Line Card Diagnostics Menu to display the menu in Figure 83 a Local CM Line Card Diagnostics Menu CN Converteon Image Version MAC Address and Serial Number SFP Information Reset All CM Line Cards VRET to Diagnostics
377. ve a suffix the AT CM2 or AT CM7068 Line Card supports all of the OAM based features but not dying gasp This restriction does not apply to the AT CM3 Line Cards Note If the line card is already set to the desired OAM mode go to Configuring the OAM Settings on page 93 Otherwise continue to the next step to configure the card s operating mode Select the AT CM2 AT CM3 or AT CM70S Line Card you want to configure and press Return to display the Module Configuration Menu for the card 91 Chapter 4 Starting a Management Session 7 Select Configure Operating Mode to display the Operating Mode Configuration Menu for the line card Note If you are configuring an AT CM2 or AT CM70S Line Card go to step 9 8 From the Operating Mode Configuration Menu select Line Card Management Mode to display the Configure Operating Mode via Management Card menu which lists the available operating modes of the card 9 From the menu do one of the following O To configure an AT CM2 or AT CM70S Line Card select OAM Visible Mode The OAM Bypass mode doesn t support the OAM based features C To configure an AT CM3 Line Card select one of the following OAM Link Test Link Test and OAM Visible mode OAM MissingLink MissingLink and OAM Visible mode OAM Smart MissingLink Smart MissingLink and OAM Visible mode This confirmation prompt is displayed Warning Changing the Operation Mode will reset t
378. want to configure From the line card s Module Configuration Menu select Port A the fiber optic port to display the Port Management Menu Select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration menu If the OAM Configurations selection is not included in the menu you need to set the line card to an OAM mode Return to the Main Menu and repeat the procedure Setting the Operating Mode on page 90 starting with step 4 Select OAM Configuration to display the OAM Configuration submenu In the OAM Configuration menu check the Admin State parameter It must be Enabled If it is set to Disabled select Admin State and press Return to toggle the parameter to Enabled Check the Mode parameter It has to be set to Active If it is set to Passive highlight Mode and press Return to toggle the parameter to Active If the line card will be installed at a remote site and you want it to support the OAM loopback test verify that the Loopback Support parameter is set to Yes If itis set to No highlight Loopback Support and press Return to toggle the parameter to Yes This parameter has to be set to Yes only if the line card will be returning test packets from remote sites This parameter can be set to Yes or No if the line card will be generating the test packets Note The Link Event Support and the Variable Retrieval Support parameters can be ignored For information on all of the OAM parameters refer to Configuring the OAM Client
379. wever have only one adjustable parameter the operating mode So their configuration files contain just that one parameter These configuration files are also automatically updated whenever you change the operating modes of these line cards through the AT CV5M02 Management Card The AT CV5M02 Management Card has four configuration files Two of the files are referred to as the master configuration files and the other two as the SNMPv3 configuration files Most of the following sections discuss the master configuration files To learn about the SNMPv3 configuration files refer to SNMPv3 Configuration Files on page 37 The master configuration files contain most of the settings of the management card itself For example stored in these files are the card s IP address the syslog server address and the settings of its 10 100Base TX port The master configuration files also contain the settings of all of the AT CM2 AT CM3 and AT CM70S Line Cards in the chassis This includes their operating modes their port settings and the OAM settings The reason the configurations of the line cards are stored here as well as on the cards themselves is so that you can restore them to the cards should that be necessary such as if you replace a card The two master configuration files differ in where they are stored and how they are updated One of the master configuration files is stored in DRAM The management card updates this file automatically whe
380. x A Default Settings for the Management Card and the Line Cards 344 Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples This appendix provides two examples of SNMPv3 configurations using the SNMPv3 Table menus In addition a worksheet is provided which you can use as an aid when configuring the SNMPv3 protocol This appendix includes the following sections o SNMPv3 Manager Configuration on page 346 0 SNMPv3 Operator Configuration on page 348 O SNMPv3 Worksheet on page 349 This appendix provides SNMPv3 configuration examples for the following types of users O Manager O Operator In addition an SNMPv3 Configuration Table is provided to record your SNMPv3 configuration For more information about the SNMPv3 protocol see Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 on page 279 345 Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples SNMPv3 Manager Configuration 346 This section provides a sample configuration for a Manager with a User Name of systemadmin24 Each table is listed with its parameters Configure SNMPv3 User Table Menu User Name manager Authentication Protocol MD5 Privacy Protocol DES Storage Type Nonvolatile Configure SNMPv3 View Table Menu View Name internet View Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 Subtree Mask ff View Type Included Storage Type Nonvolatile Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Group Name grpmanager Context Prefix Security Model usm Security Level AuthNoPriv Context Match Pr
381. x C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 352 Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 70 through 556 Same 557 and 558 558 559 through 566 Same 567 and 568 568 569 through 574 Same 575 and 576 576 577 through 581 Same 582 and 583 583 584 through 587 Same 588 and 589 589 590 through 592 Same 593 and 594 594 595 through 598 Same 599 and 600 600 601 through 602 Same 604 and 604 604 605 through 607 607 608 and 609 609 610 through 611 Same 612 and 613 613 614 through 615 Same 616 and 617 617 618 through 619 Same 620 and 621 621 622 through 623 Same 624 and 625 625 626 through 627 Same Converteon Management Software User s Guide Table 49 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 628 and 629 629 630 Same 631 and 632 632 633 through 634 Same 635 and 636 636 637 Same 638 and 639 639 640 Same 641 and 642 642 643 through 644 Same 645 and 646 646 647 Same 648 and 649 649 650 Same 651 and 652 652 653 Same 654 and 655 655 656 Same 657 and 658 658 659 659 660 and 661 661 662 662 663 and 664 664 665 and 666 666 667 667 668 and 669 669 670 670 671 and 672 672 353 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT C
382. ys the results on the screen 4 To return to the Administration Menu press any key This management function is not supported from the web browser windows Converteon Management Software User s Guide Displaying the Inter process Communication Monitor The management card has an inter process communication IPC monitor that you can use as a diagnostic tool to view the communications between the management card and the line cards across the backplane in the chassis Menus To view the IPC monitor from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Diagnostics 2 From the Diagnostics menu select Real Time IPC Message Analyzer Figure 18 is an example of an entry CHET 02 gt 04 L 1352 LI 0 500s CI 0 500s CY 00 879s LC 0 769s IPC 0 449s NMSG 00 vun Figure 57 Real time IPC Message The columns of information are described in Table 18 Table 18 IPC Message Column Description gt RXor lt TX The column indicates the direction and purpose of the transaction and the media converter series of the affected line card The possible symbols are gt RX The management card received a packet from the line card TX The management card transmitted a packet to the line card or This column displays the slot numbers of the management card and the affected line card and the direction of the communication The first number is the slot number of the management card The possible symbols

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Micromax Bling Q55 user manual  Pour voir le magazine, c`est ici  BT-OS 280 E-220 BT-OS 280 E-127 φ  820 User Manual  Case Logic Digital Camera Sling  PedalPro™ Owner`s Manual  DeLOCK 61873  Display - Service, Support  ficha técnica atún ahumado especificaciones del producto  IC-R6 SERVICE MANUAL  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file